IDU Hardware Description (V100R002C00 - 02)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System
V100R002C00
IDU Hardware Description
Issue 02
Date 2009-10-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2009-2009. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 02 (2009-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
About This Document
Purpose
The OptiX RTN 910 system consists of the indoor unit (IDU) and outdoor unit (ODU). The IDU
accesses services, and performs the multiplexing/demultiplexing and IF processing on the
services. The ODU is an outdoor unit of the OptiX RTN 910 system. It performs frequency
conversion and amplification for signals. This document describes the chassis, boards,
accessories, and cables of the IDU 910. This document helps readers to gain comprehensive
understanding of the hardware of the IDU 910.
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX RTN 910 V100R002C00
iManager U2000 V100R001C00

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineer
l Hardware installation engineer
l Installation and commissioning engineer
l Field maintenance engineer
l Data configuration engineer
l System maintenance engineer
Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following:
l Basics of digital microwave communication
l Basics of the OptiX RTN 910
OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description About This Document
iii
Organization
This document is organized as follows.
Chapter Description
1 Introduction Describes the network position, composition, and
configuration modes.
2 Chassis Describes the structure, and installation mode of the
IDU chassis.
3 Boards Describes the slots, functions, working principle,
front panels, parameters, and performance of the IDU
boards.
4 Accessories Describes the accessories of the IDU.
5 Cables Describes the functions, appearance, and connections
of various cables of the IDU 910.
A Parameters Description Describes the parameters used in this document.
B Board Loopback Types Describes the loopback capabilities of each service
board in the IDU.
C Indicators, Weight, and Power
Consumption of Boards
Provides descriptions of all the indicators on the
boards of the IDU 910 for quick reference.
D Glossary Lists the terms used in this document.
E Acronyms and Abbreviations Lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this
document.

Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,
which if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level
of risk, which if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
About This Document
OptiX RTN 910
iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Symbol Description

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,
which if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
degradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a
problem or save time.

Provides additional information to emphasize
or supplement important points of the main
text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in
boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic Book titles are in italics.
Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in
Courier New.

Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Thus, the latest document issue contains all
updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 02 (2009-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00
This document is the second release of the V100R002C00 version.
The updated contents are as follows.
Update Location Description
D Glossary Certain terms are added.
E Acronyms and Abbreviations Certain abbreviations and acronyms are
added.

OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description About This Document
v
Updates in Issue 01 (2009-06-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00
This document is the first release of the V100R002C00 version.
About This Document
OptiX RTN 910
vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii
1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Network Application.......................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Components.....................................................................................................................................................1-3
1.3 Configuration Modes.......................................................................................................................................1-6
2 Chassis..........................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Chassis Structure.............................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Installation Mode.............................................................................................................................................2-2
2.3 IDU Labels......................................................................................................................................................2-2
3 Boards...........................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Board Appearance...........................................................................................................................................3-3
3.2 Board List........................................................................................................................................................3-4
3.3 CSTA...............................................................................................................................................................3-7
3.3.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................3-8
3.3.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................3-8
3.3.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................3-10
3.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-12
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-21
3.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-24
3.3.7 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-24
3.3.8 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-25
3.3.9 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-25
3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.....................................................................................................................................3-28
3.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-29
3.4.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-29
3.4.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................3-32
3.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-36
3.4.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-49
3.4.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-52
OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description Contents
vii
3.5 IF1.................................................................................................................................................................3-58
3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-60
3.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-65
3.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-67
3.6 IFU2..............................................................................................................................................................3-69
3.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-75
3.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-77
3.6.7 Parameter Settings................................................................................................................................3-78
3.7 IFX2..............................................................................................................................................................3-80
3.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-86
3.7.5 Valid Slot..............................................................................................................................................3-89
3.7.7 Parameter Settings................................................................................................................................3-90
3.8 EM6T/EM6F.................................................................................................................................................3-91
3.8.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-97
3.8.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-101
3.8.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................3-102
3.8.7 Board Parameter Settings...................................................................................................................3-102
3.8.8 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-102
3.9 SL1D...........................................................................................................................................................3-104
3.9.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-105
3.9.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-105
3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-106
3.9.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-109
3.9.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-111
Contents
OptiX RTN 910
viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
3.9.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................3-111
3.9.7 Parameter Settings..............................................................................................................................3-112
3.9.8 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-112
3.10 SP3S/SP3D................................................................................................................................................3-113
3.10.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-114
3.10.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-114
3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-115
3.10.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-117
3.10.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-121
3.10.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-121
3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings.................................................................................................................3-122
3.10.8 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-122
3.11 PIU............................................................................................................................................................3-122
3.11.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-123
3.11.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-124
3.11.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-126
3.12 FAN...........................................................................................................................................................3-126
3.12.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-127
3.12.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-129
3.12.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-130
4 Accessories...................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 E1 Panel...........................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.2 PDU.................................................................................................................................................................4-4
4.2.1 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle...........................................................................................................4-5
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode.......................................................................................................................4-6
5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Power Cable.................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2 PGND Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-3
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable...................................................................................................................................5-4
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable........................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3 IF Jumper.........................................................................................................................................................5-5
5.4 XPIC Cable..................................................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.5 Fiber Jumper....................................................................................................................................................5-7
5.6 E1 Cables.........................................................................................................................................................5-9
5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment .....................................................................................................5-9
OptiX RTN 910
ix
5.6.2 E1 Cable to the E1 Panel......................................................................................................................5-13
5.6.3 E1 Transit Cable...................................................................................................................................5-14
5.7 Orderwire Cable............................................................................................................................................5-16
5.8 Network Cable...............................................................................................................................................5-17
A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................A-1
A.1 Parameters for NE Management....................................................................................................................A-3
A.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching..................................................................................................A-3
A.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation....................................................................................................A-7
A.1.3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_NE ID Change........................................................................A-10
A.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization............................................................................A-11
A.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time..................................................A-13
A.1.6 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs..............................................A-15
A.2 Parameters for Cable Management..............................................................................................................A-15
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Fiber Search..................................................................................................A-15
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Fiber Creation...............................................................................................A-17
A.2.3 Parameter Description: Radio Link Creation.....................................................................................A-19
A.3 Parameters for Communications Management............................................................................................A-20
A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting.........................................................A-21
A.3.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration..............................................A-22
A.3.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management.............A-23
A.3.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC........................................A-25
A.3.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management..........................................................................A-26
A.3.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management..............................A-28
A.3.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation................A-29
A.3.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings..........................A-30
A.3.9 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter..............................................A-32
A.3.10 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table...............................................................A-33
A.3.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel...................................................................A-34
A.3.12 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management............................................A-38
A.3.13 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting.................................................................A-39
A.3.14 Parameter Description: Access Control............................................................................................A-40
A.3.15 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control...................................................................................A-41
A.4 Radio Link Parameters................................................................................................................................A-42
A.4.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation.........................................A-43
A.4.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC............................................................................A-47
A.4.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................A-54
A.4.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection..............................................................................................A-55
A.4.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................................A-56
A.4.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection..........................................................................................A-58
A.4.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration....................................................................A-61
A.5 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters....................................................................................................A-72
A.5.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation...................................................................................A-72
Contents
OptiX RTN 910
x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
A.5.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP...................................................................................................A-75
A.6 SDH/PDH Service Parameters....................................................................................................................A-78
A.6.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation..........................................................A-79
A.6.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation..................................A-81
A.6.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services
......................................................................................................................................................................A-84
A.6.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting SNCP Services Into Normal Services
......................................................................................................................................................................A-87
A.6.5 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration..........................................................................A-90
A.6.6 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control..................................................................................A-92
A.7 Clock Parameters.........................................................................................................................................A-95
A.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table.........................................................................A-96
A.7.2 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet............................................................A-98
A.7.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality..........................................................A-101
A.7.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control...............................................A-104
A.7.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status........................................A-105
A.7.6 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters...............A-106
A.7.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching....................................A-108
A.7.8 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source......................A-109
A.7.9 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status.....................................................................A-112
A.8 Parameters for Ethernet Services...............................................................................................................A-113
A.8.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation............................................................................A-114
A.8.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service............................................................................................A-120
A.8.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation...................................................A-125
A.8.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation...........................................................................A-125
A.8.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service...........................................................................................A-130
A.8.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation...................................................................................A-142
A.9 Ethernet Protocol Parameters....................................................................................................................A-142
A.9.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation.....................................................................A-144
A.9.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management.....................................................................................A-145
A.9.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation................................................A-151
A.9.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration.......................................A-153
A.9.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters..................................................A-153
A.9.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters.....................................................A-158
A.9.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST....................A-160
A.9.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Protocol Configuration...........................A-168
A.9.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Adding Port to Be Quickly Deleted........A-171
A.9.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Management...............................A-172
A.9.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuraiton_Static Router Port Creation...................A-173
A.9.12 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Member Port Management.........A-174
A.9.13 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Static Multicast Group Member Creation
....................................................................................................................................................................A-175
A.9.14 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Data Statistics.......................................A-177
OptiX RTN 910
xi
A.9.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation........................A-178
A.9.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Port Priority.................................................A-182
A.9.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation.....................................................................A-183
A.9.18 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation...........................................................................A-184
A.10 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM...........................................................................................................A-185
A.10.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation....A-185
A.10.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation
....................................................................................................................................................................A-186
A.10.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation..............................A-187
A.10.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation.................A-188
A.10.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation................................A-189
A.10.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling.................................A-190
A.10.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling.................................A-191
A.10.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter................................A-193
A.10.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring..........A-195
A.11 QoS Parameters.......................................................................................................................................A-197
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management.................................................................A-197
A.11.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create....................................................A-202
A.11.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification..........................................A-208
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management..................................................................................A-209
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy................................................................................................A-214
A.11.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration.....................................A-220
A.11.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation........................................................A-230
A.12 RMON Parameters..................................................................................................................................A-232
A.12.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group.....................................................A-232
A.12.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group........................................................A-233
A.12.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group..........................................A-234
A.12.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting......................................................A-235
A.13 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces...........................................................................A-237
A.13.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General...................................................................................A-237
A.13.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced................................................................................A-239
A.13.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port...........................................................................A-240
A.13.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port................................................................A-240
A.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface...........................................................A-241
A.14 Parameters for Board Interfaces..............................................................................................................A-244
A.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute..........................................................................A-245
A.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute....................................................................A-247
A.14.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM Configuration........................................................................A-249
A.14.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records......................................................................A-251
A.14.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test................................................................................................A-252
A.14.6 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute.............................................A-253
A.14.7 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes.............................................................A-254
A.14.8 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information...................................................A-257
Contents
OptiX RTN 910
xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
A.14.9 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes.......................................................A-258
A.14.10 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces.......................................................................................A-259
A.14.11 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown....................................................................A-261
A.14.12 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces.......................................................................................A-262
A.14.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes........................................................A-264
A.14.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control............................................................A-267
A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes....................................................A-268
A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes................................................A-272
A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes...................................................A-274
A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes...............................................A-275
A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes............................................A-277
A.15 Parameters for Overhead.........................................................................................................................A-279
A.15.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead.................................................................A-280
A.15.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs...............................................................................................A-280
A.15.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs.............................................................................................A-282
B Board Loopback Types............................................................................................................B-1
C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards..................................................C-1
D Glossary.....................................................................................................................................D-1
E Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................................E-1
OptiX RTN 910
xiii
Figures
Figure 1-1 TDM microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910........................................1-2
Figure 1-2 Hybrid microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910......................................1-3
Figure 1-3 IDU 910..............................................................................................................................................1-4
Figure 1-4 Direct mounting..................................................................................................................................1-5
Figure 1-5 Separate mounting..............................................................................................................................1-6
Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 910........................................................................................................2-2
Figure 2-2 Positions of the IDU 910 labels..........................................................................................................2-4
Figure 3-1 Board appearance (IFU2)...................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-2 Bar code..............................................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout...................................................................................................................................3-4
Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CSTA............................................................................................3-10
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.........................................................................3-11
Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CSTA..................................................................................................................3-13
Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ-45 connector...................................................................................................3-15
Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface............................3-16
Figure 3-9 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface..........................................................................................3-19
Figure 3-10 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card ....................................................................................3-22
Figure 3-11 Slot for the CSTA in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-24
Figure 3-12 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSTA...........................................................................3-24
Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram ..............................................................................................................3-33
Figure 3-14 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.......................................................................3-35
Figure 3-15 Front panel of the CSHA................................................................................................................3-37
Figure 3-16 Front panel of the CSHB................................................................................................................3-37
Figure 3-17 Front panel of the CSHC................................................................................................................3-37
Figure 3-18 Front view of the RJ-45 connector.................................................................................................3-41
Figure 3-19 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface..........................3-42
Figure 3-20 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface........................................................................................3-47
Figure 3-21 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card ....................................................................................3-50
Figure 3-22 Slot for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC in the IDU chassis.....................................................................3-52
Figure 3-23 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHA...........................................................................3-52
Figure 3-24 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHB...........................................................................3-52
Figure 3-25 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHC...........................................................................3-53
Figure 3-26 Functional block diagram of the IF1..............................................................................................3-61
OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description Figures
xv
Figure 3-27 Front panel of the IF1.....................................................................................................................3-65
Figure 3-28 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis................................................................................................3-67
Figure 3-29 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IF1................................................................................3-67
Figure 3-30 Functional block diagram of the IFU2........................................................................................... 3-72
Figure 3-31 Front panel of the IFU2..................................................................................................................3-75
Figure 3-32 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-77
Figure 3-33 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFU2.............................................................................3-77
Figure 3-34 Functional block diagram of the IFX2........................................................................................... 3-83
Figure 3-35 Front panel of the IFX2..................................................................................................................3-86
Figure 3-36 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-89
Figure 3-37 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2.............................................................................3-89
Figure 3-38 Functional block diagram...............................................................................................................3-95
Figure 3-39 Front panel of the EM6T................................................................................................................3-97
Figure 3-40 Front panel of the EM6F................................................................................................................ 3-97
Figure 3-41 Front view of the RJ-45 connector.................................................................................................3-99
Figure 3-42 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis.............................................................................3-101
Figure 3-43 Logical slots for the logical boards of the EM6T/EM6F..............................................................3-101
Figure 3-44 Functional block diagram of the SL1D........................................................................................3-107
Figure 3-45 Front panel of the SL1D...............................................................................................................3-109
Figure 3-46 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis..........................................................................................3-111
Figure 3-47 Logical slots for the logical boards of the SL1D..........................................................................3-111
Figure 3-48 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D...............................................................................3-115
Figure 3-49 Front panel of the SP3S................................................................................................................3-117
Figure 3-50 Front panel of the SP3D...............................................................................................................3-118
Figure 3-51 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface......................................................................................3-119
Figure 3-52 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU 910 chassis.........................................................................3-121
Figure 3-53 Logical slots for the logical boards of the 910.............................................................................3-121
Figure 3-54 Functional block diagram of the PIU...........................................................................................3-124
Figure 3-55 Front panel of the PIU..................................................................................................................3-124
Figure 3-56 Slot for the PIU in the IDU chassis..............................................................................................3-126
Figure 3-57 Logical slot for the logical board of the PIU................................................................................3-126
Figure 3-58 Functional block diagram of the FAN..........................................................................................3-128
Figure 3-59 Front panel of the FAN.................................................................................................................3-129
Figure 3-60 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-130
Figure 3-61 Logical slot for the logical board of the FAN...............................................................................3-130
Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel..................................................................................................................4-2
Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)...........................................................................................4-3
Figure 4-3 Front panel of the PDU.......................................................................................................................4-4
Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU................................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-5 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-C mode ....................................................................................4-7
Figure 4-6 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-I mode .....................................................................................4-7
Figure 5-1 Power cable.........................................................................................................................................5-3
Figures
OptiX RTN 910
xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable................................................................................................................................5-4
Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable.........................................................................................................................5-5
Figure 5-4 IF jumper............................................................................................................................................5-6
Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable......................................................................................................................5-7
Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector................................................................................................................................5-8
Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-8
Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-9
Figure 5-9 E1 cable............................................................................................................................................5-10
Figure 5-10 E1 cable that connects the IDU to an E1 panel..............................................................................5-13
Figure 5-11 E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44 connectors.............................................5-15
Figure 5-12 Orderwire cable..............................................................................................................................5-17
Figure 5-13 Network cable.................................................................................................................................5-19
OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description Figures
xvii
Tables
Table 1-1 Introduction of the IDU 910.................................................................................................................1-3
Table 1-2 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910.............................................................................................1-4
Table 1-3 Configuration Type of the OptiX RTN 910.........................................................................................1-6
Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels..............................................................................................................2-3
Table 3-1 List of IDUs..........................................................................................................................................3-4
Table 3-2 Description of the indicators on the CSTA........................................................................................3-13
Table 3-3 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces.................................................. 3-14
Table 3-4 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface...................................................................................... 3-15
Table 3-5 Pin assignment of the EXT interface................................................................................................. 3-15
Table 3-6 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector..................................................................3-16
Table 3-7 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface........................................................................................3-17
Table 3-8 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface................................................................................................3-18
Table 3-9 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface..................................................................................3-18
Table 3-10 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface..........................................................................................3-18
Table 3-11 Description of the service interfaces on the CSTA..........................................................................3-19
Table 3-12 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface..........................................................................................3-20
Table 3-13 Setting the DIP switches.................................................................................................................. 3-22
Table 3-14 Board feature code of the CSTA......................................................................................................3-24
Table 3-15 STM-1 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-25
Table 3-16 E1 interface performance.................................................................................................................3-26
Table 3-17 Orderwire interface performance.....................................................................................................3-26
Table 3-18 Synchronous data interface performance.........................................................................................3-27
Table 3-19 Asynchronous data interface performance.......................................................................................3-27
Table 3-20 Clock timing and synchronization performance.............................................................................. 3-27
Table 3-21 Wayside service interface performance........................................................................................... 3-28
Table 3-22 Mechanical behavior .......................................................................................................................3-28
Table 3-23 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB..........................................................................3-38
Table 3-24 Description of the indicators on the CSHC......................................................................................3-39
Table 3-25 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces................................................ 3-40
Table 3-26 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface.................................................................................... 3-41
Table 3-27 Pin assignment of the EXT interface............................................................................................... 3-41
Table 3-28 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector................................................................3-42
Table 3-29 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface......................................................................................3-43
OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description Tables
xix
Table 3-30 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface..............................................................................................3-44
Table 3-31 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface................................................................................3-44
Table 3-32 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface..........................................................................................3-45
Table 3-33 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHA/CSHB..............................................................3-45
Table 3-34 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHC..........................................................................3-46
Table 3-35 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode.....................................................................3-46
Table 3-36 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode.................................................................3-47
Table 3-37 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface..........................................................................................3-48
Table 3-38 Setting the DIP switches..................................................................................................................3-50
Table 3-39 Board feature code of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC..............................................................................3-53
Table 3-40 Performance of the GE optical interface .........................................................................................3-54
Table 3-41 GE electric interface performance....................................................................................................3-54
Table 3-42 FE electric interface performance....................................................................................................3-55
Table 3-43 STM-1 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-55
Table 3-44 E1 interface performance.................................................................................................................3-56
Table 3-45 Orderwire interface performance.....................................................................................................3-56
Table 3-46 Synchronous data interface performance.........................................................................................3-56
Table 3-47 Asynchronous data interface performance.......................................................................................3-57
Table 3-48 Clock timing and synchronization performance..............................................................................3-57
Table 3-49 Wayside service interface performance...........................................................................................3-57
Table 3-50 Mechanical behavior .......................................................................................................................3-58
Table 3-51 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1...............................................................3-61
Table 3-52 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1.............................................................3-64
Table 3-53 Description of the indicators on the IF1...........................................................................................3-65
Table 3-54 Description of the Interfaces ...........................................................................................................3-66
Table 3-55 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-67
Table 3-56 Board feature code of the IF1...........................................................................................................3-68
Table 3-57 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-68
Table 3-58 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-69
Table 3-59 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-69
Table 3-60 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFU2............................................................3-72
Table 3-61 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFU2..........................................................3-74
Table 3-62 Description of the indicators on the IFU2........................................................................................3-75
Table 3-63 Description of the Interfaces ...........................................................................................................3-76
Table 3-65 Board feature code of the IFU2........................................................................................................3-78
Table 3-69 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX2............................................................3-83
Table 3-70 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX2..........................................................3-85
Table 3-71 Description of the indicators on the IFX2........................................................................................3-87
Tables
OptiX RTN 910
xx Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Table 3-72 Description of the interfaces............................................................................................................3-88
Table 3-74 Board feature code of the IFX2........................................................................................................3-89
Table 3-77 XPIC performance........................................................................................................................... 3-91
Table 3-79 Signal processing flow in the receive direction............................................................................... 3-95
Table 3-80 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction..............................................................................3-96
Table 3-81 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F.......................................................................... 3-97
Table 3-82 Description of the interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F...........................................................................3-99
Table 3-83 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode.....................................................................3-99
Table 3-84 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode...............................................................3-100
Table 3-85 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector..............................................................3-101
Table 3-86 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F........................................................................................3-101
Table 3-87 Board feature code of the EM6F....................................................................................................3-102
Table 3-88 Performance of the GE optical interface .......................................................................................3-102
Table 3-89 GE electric interface performance..................................................................................................3-103
Table 3-90 FE electric interface performance..................................................................................................3-103
Table 3-91 Mechanical behavior .....................................................................................................................3-104
Table 3-92 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1D.........................................................3-107
Table 3-93 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1D.......................................................3-108
Table 3-94 Description of the indicators on the SL1D.....................................................................................3-109
Table 3-95 Description of the interfaces .........................................................................................................3-110
Table 3-96 Slot allocation for the SL1D..........................................................................................................3-111
Table 3-97 Board feature code of the SL1D.....................................................................................................3-112
Table 3-98 STM-1 optical interface performance............................................................................................3-112
Table 3-99 Mechanical behavior......................................................................................................................3-113
Table 3-100 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D.............................................3-116
Table 3-101 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D...........................................3-116
Table 3-102 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................3-118
Table 3-103 Description of the interface on the SP3S.....................................................................................3-118
Table 3-104 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface......................................................................................3-119
Table 3-105 Slot configuration for the SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................3-121
Table 3-106 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................3-121
Table 3-107 E1 interface performance.............................................................................................................3-122
Table 3-108 Mechanical behavior ...................................................................................................................3-122
Table 3-109 Description of the power status indicators ..................................................................................3-125
Table 3-110 Description of the interfaces on the PIU......................................................................................3-125
Table 3-111 Technical specifications...............................................................................................................3-126
Table 3-112 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed...........................................................................................3-128
Table 3-113 Description of the fan status indicators........................................................................................3-129
OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description Tables
xxi
Table 3-114 Technical specifications for the FAN...........................................................................................3-130
Table 4-1 Interface description of an E1 panel.....................................................................................................4-2
Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)............................................................................................4-3
Table 4-3 Interfaces on the PDU..........................................................................................................................4-5
Table 5-1 Specifications of the power cable.........................................................................................................5-3
Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers.........................................................................................................................5-7
Table 5-3 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 cable.............................................................................................5-10
Table 5-4 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable...........................................................................................5-12
Table 5-5 Connection table of the E1 cable that connects a PO1/PH1 board to an E1 panel............................5-14
Table 5-6 Connection table of the E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44 connectors..........5-15
Table 5-7 Pin assignment of the orderwire cable...............................................................................................5-17
Table 5-8 Pin assignment of the MDI interface.................................................................................................5-17
Table 5-9 Pin assignment of the MDI-X interface.............................................................................................5-18
Table 5-10 Pin assignment of the straight through cable...................................................................................5-19
Table 5-11 Pin assignment of the crossover cable.............................................................................................5-19
Table A-1 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames.........................................................A-271
Table A-2 Data frame processing....................................................................................................................A-276
Table B-1 Loopback types supported by different service interface boards........................................................B-1
Table C-1 Description of the indicators on the CSTA........................................................................................C-1
Table C-2 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB............................................................................C-2
Table C-3 Description of the indicators on the CSHC........................................................................................C-3
Table C-4 Description of the indicators on the IF1.............................................................................................C-5
Table C-5 Description of the indicators on the IFU2..........................................................................................C-6
Table C-6 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F.............................................................................C-7
Table C-7 Description of the indicators on the SL1D.........................................................................................C-8
Table C-8 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D................................................................................C-9
Table C-9 Description of the indicators on the AUX........................................................................................C-10
Table C-10 Description of the power status indicators ....................................................................................C-10
Table C-11 Description of the fan status indicators..........................................................................................C-10
Table C-12 Weight and power consumption of boards.....................................................................................C-11
Tables
OptiX RTN 910
xxii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
1 Introduction
About This Chapter
The OptiX RTN 910 is one of the series products of the OptiX RTN 900 radio transmission
system.
1.1 Network Application
The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation split microwave transmission system developed by
Huawei. It can provide a seamless microwave transmission solution for a mobile communication
network or private network.
1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 910 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU910, the ODU, and
the antenna system. An ODU is connected to an IDU through an IF cable.
1.3 Configuration Modes
The OptiX RTN 910 forms different configuration modes by flexibly configuring different
system control, cross-connect, and timing boards, IF boards, and ODUs to meet the requirements
of different microwave application scenarios.
OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description 1 Introduction
1-1
1.1 Network Application
The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation split microwave transmission system developed by
Huawei. It can provide a seamless microwave transmission solution for a mobile communication
network or private network.
The OptiX RTN 900 products are available in two types: OptiX RTN 910 and OptiX RTN 950.
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 910 is 1U high and supports one or two IF boards. The IDU of the
OptiX RTN 950 is 2U high and supports one to six IF boards. The users can choose an appropriate
type based on the actual requirements.
The OptiX RTN 910 provides several types of service interfaces and facilitates installation and
flexible configuration. It can provide a solution that is integrated with the TDM microwave,
Hybrid microwave, and Packet microwave based on the network requirements. It supports the
smooth upgrade from the TDM microwave to the Hybrid microwave, and from the Hybrid
microwave to the Packet microwave. The solution can evolve based on the service changes that
occur due to radio mobile network evolution. Thus, this solution can meet the transmission
requirements of not only 2G and 3G networks, but also future LTE and 4G networks.
Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 show the TDM microwave transmission solution and the Hybrid
microwave transmission solution respectively that are provided by the OptiX RTN 910 for the
mobile communication network.
Figure 1-1 TDM microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910
OptiX RTN 910 BTS BSC
E1
E1
E1
STM-1/E1 E1 Regional Backhaul
Network
E1
E1
E1
E1
E1
E1

1 Introduction
OptiX RTN 910
1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Figure 1-2 Hybrid microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910
Regional backhaul
network
OptiX RTN 910 BTS NodeB BSC RNC
FE
E1
FE
E1
E1
E1
FE
FE/GE
E1
GE
E1
E1
STM-1/
E1
FE

NOTE
l In the solutions, the local backhaul network is optional. The OptiX RTN 910 can be connected to the RNC
or the BSC directly.
l When the OptiX RTN 910 supports the microwaves in three directions or more, you can adopt the NE
cascading mode or use the OptiX RTN 950, which is more powerful.
1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 910 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU910, the ODU, and
the antenna system. An ODU is connected to an IDU through an IF cable.
IDU 910
The IDU 910 is the indoor unit of an OptiX RTN 910 system. It accesses services, performs
multiplexing/demultiplexing and IF processing of the services, and provides system control and
communication function.
Table 1-1 lists the basic features of the IDU 910.
Table 1-1 Introduction of the IDU 910
Item Performance
Chassis height 1U
Pluggable Supported
Number of microwave
directions
1-2
OptiX RTN 910
1-3
Item Performance
RF configuration mode 1+0 non-protection configuration
2+0 non-protection configuration
1+1 protection configuration
N+1 protection configuration (N = 1)
XPIC configuration

Figure 1-3 IDU 910

ODU
The ODU is the outdoor unit of the OptiX RTN 900. It performs frequency conversion and
amplification of signals.
The OptiX RTN 900 series products share one set of ODUs, covering 6 GHz to 38 GHz entire
frequency band. The OptiX RTN 910 supports standard power ODU, high power ODU, and low
capacity for PDH ODU.
Table 1-2 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910
Item Description
Standard Power
ODU
High Power ODU Low Capacity for
PDH ODU
ODU type SP, SPA HP LP, LPA
Frequency band 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/
26/38 GHz (SP
ODU)
6/7/8/11/13/15/18/2
3 GHz (SPA ODU)
7/8/11/13/15/18/23/
26/32/38 GHz
7/8/11/13/15/18/23
GHz (LP ODU)
7/8/11/13/15/18/23/
26/32/38 GHz (LPA
ODU)
1 Introduction
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Item Description
Standard Power
ODU
High Power ODU Low Capacity for
PDH ODU
Microwave
modulation mode
QPSK/16QAM/
32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM
(SP)
QPSK/16QAM/
32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM (SPA)
QPSK/16QAM/
32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM
QPSK/16QAM
Channel spacing 3.5/7/14/28 MHz 7/14/28/56 MHz 3.5/7/14/28 MHz

Antenna
The OptiX RTN 910 provides an entire frequency band antenna solution, and supports the single-
polarized antenna and dual-polarized antenna with a diameter of 0.3 m to 3.7 m and the
corresponding feeder system.
There are two methods of mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separate
mounting.
l The direct mounting method is normally adopted when a small-diameter and single-
polarized antenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna, the
ODU is directly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for one
antenna, an RF signal combiner/splitter (hereinafter referred to as a hybrid coupler) must
be mounted to connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-4 shows the direct mounting
method.
Figure 1-4 Direct mounting
l The separate mounting method is adopted when a double-polarized antenna or big-diameter
and single-polarized antenna is used. Figure 1-5 shows the separate method. In this
situation, a hybrid coupler can be mounted. That is, two ODUs share one feed boom.
OptiX RTN 910
1-5
Figure 1-5 Separate mounting

1.3 Configuration Modes
The OptiX RTN 910 forms different configuration modes by flexibly configuring different
system control, cross-connect, and timing boards, IF boards, and ODUs to meet the requirements
of different microwave application scenarios.
Table 1-3 Configuration Type of the OptiX RTN 910
Configuration
Modes
Type of the
System
Control,
Cross-
Connect, and
Timing Board
Type of the IF
Board
Type of the
ODU
Main
Application
PDH
microwave
equipment
CSTA IF1 Low capacity
for PDH ODU
Providing a
radio link whose
capacity is not
higher than
16xE1
SDH
microwave
equipment
CSTA IF1 Standard power
ODU or high
power ODU
Providing an
STM-1 radio
link or a high-
capacity PDH
radio link
Hybrid
microwave
equipment
CSHA/CSHB/
CSHC
IFU2 Standard power
ODU or high
power ODU
Providing a
Hybrid radio
link
1 Introduction
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Configuration
Modes
Type of the
System
Control,
Cross-
Connect, and
Timing Board
Type of the IF
Board
Type of the
ODU
Main
Application
XPIC Hybrid
microwave
equipment
CSHA/CSHB/
CSHC
IFX2 Standard power
ODU or high
power ODU
Providing a
Hybrid radio
link of the super
capacity

OptiX RTN 910
1-7
2 Chassis
About This Chapter
The IDU OptiX RTN 910 is a 1U chassis. It supports various installation modes and therefore
can be deployed flexibly.
2.1 Chassis Structure
The dimensions of the IDU 910 are 442 mm (width) x 220 mm (depth) x 44 mm (height). The
IDU 910 has a two-layered structure and supports wind cooling.
2.2 Installation Mode
The IDU 910 chassis supports various installation modes and can be deployed easily.
2.3 IDU Labels
There are labels such as the product nameplate label, qualification card label, ESD protection
label, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operation
warning label on the IDU chassis and the boards in the IDU chassis. You need to be familiar
with the meanings of the labels and perform operations based on the indications of the labels,
thus preventing personal injury and damage to the equipment.
OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description 2 Chassis
2-1
2.1 Chassis Structure
The dimensions of the IDU 910 are 442 mm (width) x 220 mm (depth) x 44 mm (height). The
IDU 910 has a two-layered structure and supports wind cooling.
Figure 2-1 shows the chassis structure of the IDU 910.
Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 910
2.2 Installation Mode
The IDU 910 chassis supports various installation modes and can be deployed easily.
The IDU 910 can be installed:
l In a 300 mm ETSI cabinet
l In a 600 mm ETSI cabinet
l In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinet
l In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet
l In an open rack
l On a wall
l On a table
2.3 IDU Labels
There are labels such as the product nameplate label, qualification card label, ESD protection
label, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operation
warning label on the IDU chassis and the boards in the IDU chassis. You need to be familiar
with the meanings of the labels and perform operations based on the indications of the labels,
thus preventing personal injury and damage to the equipment.
2 Chassis
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Label Description
Table 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and the boards in the IDU
chassis. The actual labels may be different depending on the configurations of the chassis and
boards.
Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels
Label Label Name Description
ESD protection
label
Indicates that the
equipment is
sensitive to static
electricity.
Grounding label Indicates the
grounding position
of the IDU chassis.
Fan warning
label
warns you not to
touch the fan leaves
when the fan is
rotating.
High
temperature
warning label
The board surface
temperature may
exceed 70C when
the ambient
temperature is
higher than 55C. In
this case, you need
to wear protective
gloves before
handling the board.
Qualification
card label
Indicates that the
equipment is
qualified.
RoHS label Indicates that the
equipment
complies with the
related
requirements
specified in the
RoHS directive.
OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description 2 Chassis
2-3
Label Label Name Description
Product
nameplate label
Indicates the
product name and
certification.
PULL
Operation
guidance label
The switch lever
must be pulled
outwards slightly
before setting the
switch to the "I" or
"O" position.

Label Position
Figure 2-2 shows the positions of the labels on the chassis of the IDU 910.
Figure 2-2 Positions of the IDU 910 labels
/QUALIFICATION CARD
MADE IN CHINA HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
HUAWEI
OptiX RTN 910

HUAWEI TECHNOLGIES CO., LTD. MADE IN CHINA

N 14036
Class 1 Laser Product
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
!
ThisdevicecomplieswithPart15of theFCCRules. Operationissubject
tothefollowingtwoconditions: (1) thisdevicemaynot causeharmful
interference, and(2) thisdevicemust accept anyinterferencereceived,
includinginterferencethat maycauseundesiredoperation.
POWER RATING: -48-60V;5A

2 Chassis
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
3 Boards
About This Chapter
The IDU 910 supports the following types of boards: system control, cross-connect, and timing
board, IF board, Ethernet board, SDH board, PDH board, power supply board, and fan board.
3.1 Board Appearance
The dimensions of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 910 chassis are 19.82 mm (height)
x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width). The dimensions of the system control, cross-connect
unit, and timing board in the IDU 910 are 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 388.40 mm
(width).
3.2 Board List
The boards are inserted in the IDU 910. The IDU 910 realizes different functions when housing
different types of boards.
3.3 CSTA
The CSTA is an TDM system control, cross-connect, and timing board.
3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is the integrated Hybrid system control and communication,
switching, and clock board. The differences between the CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC are with
regard to the types and number of service interfaces.
3.5 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board and is available in two types, namely, IF1A and
IF1B. The IF1A is an isolated IF board. The IF1B is a non-isolated IF board. The IF1A supports
the DC-I and DC-C power distribution modes. The IF1B supports only the DC-C power
distribution mode. In this document, the IF1 is used to stand for both the IF1A and IF1B.
3.6 IFU2
The IFU2 is a general IF board, which can support the Hybrid microwave transmission and
Packet microwave transmission at the same time.
3.7 IFX2
The IFX2 is a general IF board, which can support the XPIC function of the Hybrid microwave
and SDH microwave. The IFX2 board supports only the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.8 EM6T/EM6F
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical interfaces and
two GE interfaces. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as
OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
3-1
follows: the GE interfaces on the EM6T always function as electrical interfaces whereas the GE
interfaces on the EM6F use the SFP modules and therefore can function as two optical or
electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces on the EM6F and the EM6T are compatible
with the FE electrical interfaces.
3.9 SL1D
The SL1D is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board.
3.10 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.
3.11 PIU
The PIU is the power supply board and can access two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies.
3.12 FAN
The FAN is the fan board that dissipates the heat from the chassis through wind cooling.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
3.1 Board Appearance
The dimensions of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 910 chassis are 19.82 mm (height)
x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width). The dimensions of the system control, cross-connect
unit, and timing board in the IDU 910 are 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 388.40 mm
(width).
NOTE
The depth of the board refers to the distance between the front panel and the end of the PCB.
Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of the boards in the IDU 910 chassis.
Figure 3-1 Board appearance (IFU2)

The appearance of the IFU2 is provided as an example. The front panel of the IFU2 has two
ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers are used when the IFU2 is inserted or
removed. The captive screws are used to fasten the IFU2. The bar code of the IFU2 is attached
to one of the two ejector levers. Figure 3-2 shows the bar code of the IFU2.
Figure 3-2 Bar code
Bar code
Inner code
Board version
Board name
Board feature code
0514721055000015-SL91SL1D01

OptiX RTN 910
3-3
NOTE
The indication of the board feature code is related to the board type. The feature code of an optical interface
board indicates the type of the optical interface on the board. The feature code of an E1 interface board
indicates the impedance of the E1 interface on the board. The feature code of an IF board indicates the
power distribution mode that the IF board supports. For details about the board feature code, see the
description of each board in this document.
3.2 Board List
The boards are inserted in the IDU 910. The IDU 910 realizes different functions when housing
different types of boards.
Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout
Slot
6
(FAN)
Slot
5
(PIU)
Slot 1 (CSTA/CSHA/CSHB/CSHC)
Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 4 (EXT)
NOTE
The EXT represents an extended slot, which can be inserted with various IF boards and interface boards.

Table 3-1 List of IDUs
Board
Name
Full
Spelling Valid Slot Description
CSTA TDM
control,
switching,
and timing
board
Slot 1 l Provides full timeslot cross-connections
for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent
to 8x8 VC-4s.
l Performs system communication and
control.
l Provides the clock processing function and
supports one external clock input/output
function.
l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1
interfaces.
l Uses the SFP module to provide two
STM-1 optical interfaces.
l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one
NM serial interface, and one NE cascading
interface.
l Provides one orderwire interface, one
asynchronous data interface, and three-
input and one-output external alarm
interfaces.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Board
Name
Full
CSHA Hybrid
control,
switching,
and timing
board
to 8x8 VC-4s.
l Provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching
capability.
control.
interfaces.
l Provides two FE electrical interfaces.
l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that
are compatible with the FE electrical
interface.
interface.
interfaces.
CSHB Hybrid
control,
switching,
and timing
board
to 8x8 VC-4s.
capability.
control.
l Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm
E1 interfaces.
interface.
interface.
interfaces.
OptiX RTN 910
3-5
Board
Name
Full
CSHC Hybrid
control,
switching,
and timing
board
to 8x8 VC-4s.
capability.
control.
interfaces.
l Uses the SFP module to provide two
STM-1 optical interfaces.
l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE
optical or electrical interfaces that are
compatible with the FE electrical interface.
interface.
interfaces.
IF1 SDH IF
board
Slot 3 or slot
4
l Provides one IF interface.
l Supports the TU-based PDH microwave
solution and the STM-1-based SDH
microwave solution.
IFU2 Universal IF
board
Slot 3 or slot
4
l Supports the Hybrid microwave solution.
l Supports AM.
IFX2 Universal
XPIC IF
board
Slot 3 or slot
4
l Supports the XPIC function of the Hybrid
microwave.
l Supports the AM of the Hybrid
microwave.
SL1D 2xSTM-1
interface
board
Slot 3 or slot
4
Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1
optical interfaces.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Board
Name
Full
EM6T 6 Port RJ45
Ethernet/
Gigabit
Ethernet
Interface
Board
Slot 3 or slot
4
l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.
interface.
EM6F 4 Port RJ45 +
2 Port SFP
Fast
Ethernet/
Gigabit
Ethernet
Interface
Board
l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.
l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE
optical/electrical interfaces.
SP3S 16xE1
tributary
board
Slot 3 or slot
4
Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1
interfaces.
SP3D 32xE1
tributary
board
Slot 3 or slot
4
Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1
interfaces.
TNC1PIU Power board Slot 5 Provides two -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs.
TNC1FAN Fan board Slot 6 Cools and ventilates the IDU.

3.3 CSTA
The CSTA is an TDM system control, cross-connect, and timing board.
3.3.1 Version Description
The functional version of the CSTA is SLA1.
3.3.2 Functions and Features
The CSTA provides the full time division cross-connection, system control and communication,
and clock processing functions. In addition, the CSTA provides PDH/SDH service interfaces,
auxiliary interfaces, and management interfaces.
3.3.3 Working Principle
The CSTA comprises the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit,
service processing unit, auxiliary interface unit, and power supply unit.
3.3.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, service interfaces, management interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, buttons,
and labels on the front panel.
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card
This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card.
OptiX RTN 910
3-7
3.3.6 Valid Slots
The CSTA is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of two ordinary
slots. The CSTA is mapped into four logical boards and the corresponding logical slots are also
allocated for the logical boards on the NMS so that the NMS can manage each functional unit
on the CSTA.
3.3.7 Board Feature Code
The E1 interface impedance of the CSTA can be identified by the board feature code of the bar
code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.
3.3.8 Board Parameter Settings
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSTA.
3.3.9 Technical Specifications
This topic describes the board specifications, including cross-connection performance, SDH
optical interface performance, E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interface
performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
The functional version of the CSTA is SLA1.
The CSTA provides the full time division cross-connection, system control and communication,
and clock processing functions. In addition, the CSTA provides PDH/SDH service interfaces,
auxiliary interfaces, and management interfaces.
Time Division Cross-Connection
l Grooms service signals between boards.
l Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which
are equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s.
System Control and Communication
l Provides the system control and communication function to manage the other boards and
the ODUs by using the NE software.
l Controls the other boards by using the board software that runs on the system control and
communication unit.
l Monitors and collects performance events and alarms of all the boards.
l Communicates with the NMS and the other NEs and processes a maximum of seven DCCs.
l Cross-connects and processes overheads.
Clock Processing
l Traces the clock source and provides the system clock and the frame headers of service
signals and overhead signals for the other boards.
l Supports one input and one output of the external clock.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
l Supports the selection of the external clock source or the service clock source to be the
system clock source. The service clock source can be the SDH line clock, microwave
interface line clock, or tributary clock.
l Supports clock protection based on the clock priority, synchronization status message
(SSM) protocol, or extended SSM protocol.
l Supports the detection of the states of the system clock source and the phase-locked loop.
l Supports the locked, holdover, and free-run modes.
Service Interfaces
l Provides sixteen 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 service interfaces.
l Adopts the SFP optical modules and can provide two STM-1 optical interfaces.
Auxiliary Interfaces and Management Interfaces
l Provides one Ethernet NM interface.
l Provides one NM serial interface.
l Provides one NE cascade interface.
l Provides one Orderwire interface.
l Provides one asynchronous data interface.
l Provides one synchronous data interface.
l Provides one three-input and one-output external alarm interface.
Protection Processing
l Performs the 1+1 protection switching.
l Performs the linear MSP switching.
l Performs the SNCP switching.
l Performs the clock protection switching.
Alarms and Performance Events
l Reports various alarms and performance events.
l Supports the alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and
setting the BER threshold.
l Supports the performance event management functions such as setting the performance
thresholds and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.
NOTE
For details about the alarm management and performance event management functions, see the OptiX RTN
910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.
Maintenance Features
l Supports the inloop and outloop over optical interfaces.
l Supports the outloop in VC-4 paths.
l Supports the board reset.
OptiX RTN 910
3-9
l Detects the board temperature, alarm inputs/outputs, and overvoltage/undervoltage of the
-48 V power supply.
l Checks the indicators on all the boards.
l Supports the hot swapping and mis-insertion prevention functions.
l Supports the query of the board manufacturing information.
l Supports the local and remote loading of the FPGA and supports the misloading prevention
function.
l Supports the insertion and removal of the CF card and backs up the configuration data. The
backup configuration data can be used for quick service restoration in the case of an on-
site board replacement.
The CSTA comprises the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit,
service processing unit, auxiliary interface unit, and power supply unit.
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CSTA
Backplane
System
control and
communicatio
n unit
Cross-connect
unit
External alarm
interface
Clock unit
Clock signal
provided to other
boards
External clock signal
Clock interface
STM-1
signal
processing
unit
E1 signal
processing
unit
VC-4
signal
VC-4
signal
E1 signal
SDH signal
Control bus
VC-4 signal
Asynchronous
data interface
Synchronous
data interface
Orderwire
interface
A
u
x
i
l
i
a
r
y

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
u
n
i
t
Clock signal
provided to the
other units on
the board
NM interface
NM serial interface
NE cascade
interface
Clock source
received from
the service unit
on the board
Power
supply
unit
-48 V1
-48 V2
Supplies power to
the other units on
the board
+12 V power
supplied to the fans
+3.3 V power supplied
to other boards
Clock signal
received from
other boards

3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
System Control and Communication Unit
The system control and communication unit comprises the CPU unit and logic control unit. The
system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l Controls and manages the other units on the CSTA, and also collects alarms and
performance events through the control bus.
l Controls and manages the other boards in the IDU, and also collects alarms and performance
events through the control bus.
l Controls and manages the ODU by using the ODU control signal transmitted through the
control bus in the backplane and the SMODEM on the IF board.
l Processes the network management messages in the DCCs through the logic control unit.
l The CPU unit communicates with the NMS through the Ethernet NM interface and NE
cascade interface.
l The CPU unit reads the information from the CF card through the bus and loads the
software.
l The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and loads
the FPGA software.
l The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads of the auxiliary interface unit, the CPU
unit, and other boards, thus realizing the following functions:
Adds or drops the DCC information processed by the CPU unit.
Adds or drops the orderwire and asynchronous data services.
Realizes the interchange of the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between
different lines.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system through the higher order cross-
connect unit and the lower order cross-connect unit. Figure 3-5 shows the functional block
diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM
service unit
HOXC
LOXC
Sink TDM
service unit

OptiX RTN 910
3-11
The source TDM service unit transmits the VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect unit
through the VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals are all VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
unit processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit. If
the VC-4 signals include any VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect unit
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect unit. The lower order cross-
connect unit processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services back to the
higher order cross-connect unit. The higher order cross-connect unit processes the services and
then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
E1 Signal Processing Unit
The E1 signal processing unit provides access to, codes/decodes, and maps/demaps E1 electrical
signals, and also processes overheads. The signal processing flow on this unit is the same as the
signal processing flow on the SP3S/SP3D. For details, see 3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal
Flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
STM-1 Signal Processing Unit
The STM-1 signal processing unit provides access to STM-1 optical signals, extracts the clock
signal, restores the data, scrambles/descrambles the data, processes overheads, and processes
pointers. The signal processing flow on the STM-1 signal processing unit is the same as the
signal processing flow on the SL1D. For details, see 3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal
Flow of the SL1D.
Clock Unit
The clock unit selects the external clock source or the service clock source from a service
interface according to the clock priority. Through the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides
the system clock and the frame headers of service signals and overhead signals to other units on
the system control and communication board and the other boards.
Auxiliary Interface Unit
The auxiliary interface unit processes the input and output of the Orderwire interface,
asynchronous data interface, synchronous data interface, and external alarm interface.
Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by
the chips of the other units on the system control and communication board.
l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power required
by the other boards in the IDU.
l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power required by
the fan.
3.3.4 Front Panel
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CSTA
C
S
T
A
S
T
A
T
P
R
O
G
S
Y
N
C
S
R
V
CF RCV RST NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE
E1
1~16 L
O
S
1
L
O
S
2
1
2
3 4 5
1 2
STM-1
1. Indicators 2. Buttons 3. Auxiliary interfaces and
management interfaces
4. STM-1 optical interfaces 5. E1 (1-16) interface

Indicators
Table 3-2 Description of the indicators on the CSTA
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is working normally.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.
PROG On for 100 ms (green) and
off for 100 ms repeatedly
When the board is being powered on or
being reset, the software is being loaded
to the flash memory.
On for 300 ms (green) and
being reset, the board software is in
BIOS boot state.
On (green) The upper layer software is being
initialized.
On for 100 ms (red) and off
for 100 ms repeatedly
being reset, the BOOTROM self-check
fails.
On (red) When the board is being powered or
being reset, the memory self-check fails
or loading upper layer software fails.
When the board is running, the logic file
or upper layer software is lost.
The pluggable storage card is faulty.
OptiX RTN 910
3-13
Off The software is running normally.
SYNC On (green) The clock is normal.
On (red) The clock source is lost or is switched.
SRV On (green) The system is working normally.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs on the
board.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in the
system.
Off There is no power supplied to the system.
LOS1 On (red) The first optical interface on the line
reports the R_LOS alarm.
Off The first optical interface on the line does
not report the R_LOS alarm.
LOS2 On (red) The second optical interface on the line
Off The second optical interface on the line
does not report the R_LOS alarm.

Table 3-3 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces
Interface Description Connector Type
NMS/COM NM interface/NM serial interface
RJ-45
EXT NE cascade interface
CLK/TOD External clock/time interface (2048 kbit/s or
2048 kHz)/The wayside E1 interface
F1/S1 Synchronous/Asynchronous data interface
ALMI/ALMO Alarm input/output interface
PHONE Orderwire interface
CF RCV CF configuration reset button -
RST Board warm reset button -

3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
NOTE
l The external clock interface and wayside E1 interface are combined into one interface. This interface can
transparently transmit the DCC byte, orderwire overhead byte, and synchronous/asynchronous data service
overhead byte. One interface, however, can implement only one of the three functions: external clock
interface, wayside E1 service, and transparent transmission of the overhead byte.
l The 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface can transparently transmit the orderwire byte. One interface,
however, can implement only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface and transparent
transmission of the orderwire byte.
The auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces use RJ-45 connectors. The pin assignments
of the interfaces, however, are different. Figure 3-7 shows the front view of the RJ-45 connector.
Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ-45 connector
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table 3-4 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface
Interface Pin Signal
NMS/COM
1 Transmitting data (+)
2 Transmitting data (-)
3 Receiving data (+)
4 Grounding end of the NM serial
interface
5 Receive end of the NM serial interface
6 Receiving data (-)
7 Not defined
8 Transmit end of the NM serial
interface

Table 3-5 Pin assignment of the EXT interface
EXT
OptiX RTN 910
3-15
4, 5, 7, 8 Not defined

NOTE
The EXT interface supports the MDI/MDI-X auto-negotiation. That is, the EXT interface can transmit data
through pins 3 and 6 and can receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. For the meanings of the states of the indicators, see
Table 3-6.
Table 3-6 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector
LINK (green) On The link is normal.
Off The link fails.
ACT (yellow) On or blinking The interface is transmitting or
receiving data.
Off The interface is not transmitting or
receiving data.

NOTE
The NMS/COM interface and the NE interface are equivalent to two ports on a hub. Thus, ensure that no
external Ethernet link is configured between the two interfaces during the networking process. Otherwise,
an Ethernet loop is formed. As a result, a network storm is generated, wherein repeated resets are performed
on the NEs.
Figure 3-8 shows the two common incorrect connections.
Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface
C
S
T
A
S
T
A
T
P
R
O
G
S
Y
N
C
S
R
V
E1
1~16
C
R
I T
M
A
J
M
I N
M
A
J
L
O
S
1
L
O
S
2
C
S
T
A
S
T
A
T
P
R
O
G
S
Y
N
C
S
R
V
E1
1~16
C
R
I T
M
A
J
M
I N
M
A
J
L
O
S
1
L
O
S
2
LAN

The clock interface (CLK) and the high-precision time interface (TOD) use different pins of the
same RJ-4 connector. The pin assignment information of the CLK/TOD interface is provided
in Table 3-7.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
NOTE
Pins 3 and 6-8 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588 protocol) and are not
used in this product version.
Table 3-7 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface
Pin Working Mode
Externa
l Clock
External
Time Input
(1 PPS +
Time
Informatio
n)
External Time
Output
(1 PPS + Time
Information)
External
Time Input
(DCLS)
External Time
Output
(DCLS)
1 CLK
receivin
g (-)
Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined
2 CLK
receivin
g (+)
3 Not
defined
1 PPS signal
input (-)
(RS-422
level)
1 PPS signal
output (-)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time
signal input (-)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time
signal output (-)
(RS-422 level)
4 CLK
transmit
ting (-)
Grounding
end
Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end
5 CLK
transmit
ting (+)
Grounding
end
6 Not
defined
1 PPS signal
input (+)
(RS-422
level)
1 PPS signal
output (+)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time
signal input (+)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time
signal output (+)
(RS-422 level)
7 Not
defined
Time
information
input (-)
(RS-422
level)
Time
information
output (-)
(RS-422 level)
Not defined Not defined
8 Not
defined
Time
information
input (+)
(RS-422
level)
Time
information
output (+)
(RS-422 level)

OptiX RTN 910
3-17
The pin assignment information of the F1/S1 interface is provided in Table 3-8.
Table 3-8 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface
F1/S1 1 Transmitting asynchronous data signals
2 Grounding end
3 Receiving asynchronous data signals
4 Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)
5 Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)
6 Grounding end
7 Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)
8 Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)

The pin assignment information of the ALMI/ALMO interface is provided in Table 3-9.
Table 3-9 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface
ALMI/
ALMO
1 The first external alarm input signal
2 Grounding end for the first alarm input signal
3 The second external alarm input signal
4 The third external alarm input signal
5 Grounding end for the third alarm input signal
6 Grounding end for the second alarm input signal
7 The first external alarm output signal (+)
8 The first external alarm output signal (-)

The pin assignment information of the PHONE interface is provided in Table 3-10.
Table 3-10 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface
PHONE 1 Not defined
2
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
3
4 RING
5 TIP
6 Not defined
7
8

Service Interfaces
Table 3-11 Description of the service interfaces on the CSTA
TX1 Transmit port of the first
STM-1 optical interface
LC (the SFP optical module)
RX1 Receive port of the first
TX2 Transmit port of the second
RX2 Receive port of the second
E1 (1-16) The first to sixteenth E1
signals
Anea 96

The E1 interface uses the Anea 96 socket. The pin assignment information of the Anea 96
interface is provided in Figure 3-9 and Table 3-12.
Figure 3-9 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface
POS.96
POS.1

OptiX RTN 910
3-19
Table 3-12 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface
Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 The first received E1
differential signal (+)
25 The first transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
differential signal (-)
signal (-)
3 The second received E1
27 The second transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
5 The third received E1
29 The third transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
7 The fourth received E1
31 The fourth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
9 The fifth received E1
33 The fifth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
11 The sixth received E1
35 The sixth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
13 The seventh received E1
37 The seventh transmitted E1
15 The eighth received E1
39 The eighth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
17 The ninth received E1
41 The ninth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
19 The tenth received E1
43 The tenth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
21 The eleventh received E1
45 The eleventh transmitted E1
23 The twelfth received E1
47 The twelfth transmitted E1
49 The thirteenth received E1
73 The thirteenth transmitted E1
51 The fourteenth received E1
75 The fourteenth transmitted E1
53 The fifteenth received E1
77 The fifteenth transmitted E1
55 The sixteenth received E1
79 The sixteenth transmitted E1

Different values of the DIP switches correspond to different functions of the DIP switches.
The CF card stores the following information:
l All the data of the NE, including the NE ID, NE IP address, and service data
l NE software and all the board software programs
l All the FPGA files
OptiX RTN 910
3-21
l License file for microwave link capability
Figure 3-10 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card
O
N
D
I
P
1
2
3
4
2
1

1. DIP switches 2. CF card
Table 3-13 Setting the DIP switches
Setting the DIP Switches (1: ON, 0: OFF) Function
4 3 2 1
0 0 0 0 Normal
operating state
when the
watchdog is
enabled.
0 0 0 1 Reserved.
0 0 1 0 Memory self-
check state.
0 0 1 1 Commissioning
state.
0 1 0 0 Operating state
when the
watchdog is
disabled and the
full memory
check is
performed.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
4 3 2 1
0 1 0 1 BIOS holdover
state.
0 1 1 0 BIOS exhibition
state.
0 1 1 1 Reserved (by
default,
operating state
when the
watchdog is
started).
default,
operating state
when the
watchdog is
started).
1 0 0 1 To recover the
data of the CF
card.
1 0 1 0 To erase the data
in the system
parameter area.
1 0 1 1 To erase the
databases.
1 1 0 0 To erase the NE
software,
including the
patches.
databases and
NE software
(including the
patches).
1 1 1 0 To format the
file system, that
is, to erase all
the data in the
file system.
OptiX RTN 910
3-23
4 3 2 1
file system so
that all the data
is erased (file
system +
extended BIOS
+ system
parameter area).

3.3.6 Valid Slots
The CSTA is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of two ordinary
slots. The CSTA is mapped into four logical boards and the corresponding logical slots are also
allocated for the logical boards on the NMS so that the NMS can manage each functional unit
on the CSTA.
Figure 3-11 Slot for the CSTA in the IDU chassis
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 5
(PIU)
Slot 1 (CSTA)

According to the functional units, the CSTA is mapped into the logical system control and
communication board (CSTA), logical auxiliary and management board (AUX), and logical
service boards (SL1D and SP3S) on the NMS.
Figure 3-12 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSTA
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 5
(PIU)
Slot 1 (CSTA)
Slot 10 (AUX)
Slot 8 (SL1D) Slot 9 (SP3S)

The E1 interface impedance of the CSTA can be identified by the board feature code of the bar
code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.
Table 3-14 Board feature code of the CSTA
Board Feature Code Interface Impedance (Ohm)
A 120
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
B 75

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSTA.
Related References
A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting
A.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table
A.7.9 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status
A.13.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General
A.13.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port
A.13.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port
A.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface
This topic describes the board specifications, including cross-connection performance, SDH
optical interface performance, E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interface
performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Cross-Connection Performance
Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which are
equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s.
STM-1 Optical Interface Performance
The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The
following table provides the primary performance.
Table 3-15 STM-1 optical interface performance
Item Performance
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 155520
Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2
Fiber type Multi-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Transmission distance
(km)
2 15 40 80
OptiX RTN 910
3-25
Item Performance
Operating wavelength
(nm)
1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
Mean launched power
(dBm)
-19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-30 -28 -34 -34
Minimum overload (dBm) -14 -8 -10 -10
Minimum extinction ratio
(dB)
10 8.2 10 10

NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP
modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-16 E1 interface performance
Item Performance
Code pattern HDB3
Wire pair in each
transmission direction
One coaxial wire pair One symmetrical wire pair
Impedance (ohm) 75 120

Orderwire Interface Performance
Table 3-17 Orderwire interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-
defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Orderwire type Addressing call
Wire pair in each
One symmetrical wire pair
Impedance (ohm) 600

3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
NOTE
The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when an OptiX RTN
equipment calls the number of 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire
phones in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is
established.
Synchronous Data Interface Performance
Table 3-18 Synchronous data interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined
byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Interface type Codirectional
Interface characteristics Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

Asynchronous Data Interface
Table 3-19 Asynchronous data interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the
Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 19.2
Interface characteristics Meets the RS-232 standard.

Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance
The clock timing and synchronization performance meets the relevant standards specified in the
ITU-T Recommendations.
Table 3-20 Clock timing and synchronization performance
Item Performance
External synchronization
source
2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 9), or 2048 kHz
(compliant with ITU-T G.703 13)
Frequency accuracy Compliant with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in, hold-in, and pull-out
ranges
OptiX RTN 910
3-27
Item Performance
Noise generation
Noise tolerance
Noise transfer
Transient response and
holdover performance

Wayside Service Interface Performance
Table 3-21 Wayside service interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the
microwave frame.
Impedance (ohm) 120

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-22 Mechanical behavior
Item Performance
Dimensions 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 388.40 mm
(width)
Weight 1.079 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 19W
3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is the integrated Hybrid system control and communication,
switching, and clock board. The differences between the CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC are with
regard to the types and number of service interfaces.
The functional version of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is SLA1.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-
connection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. In addition, the
CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides FE/GE interfaces, PDH/SDH interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, and
management interfaces.
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC comprises the system control and communication unit, packet
switching unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.
3.4.4 Front Panel
3.4.6 Valid Slots
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of
two ordinary slots. The functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC are mapped into the logical
boards and the corresponding logical slots are also allocated for the logical boards on the NMS
so that the NMS can manage each functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.
The E1 interface impedance of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC can be identified by the board feature
code of the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board
name.
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.
This topic describes the board specifications, including the packet switching performance, cross-
connection performance, Ethernet interface performance, SDH optical interface performance,
E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interface performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
The functional version of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is SLA1.
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-
connection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. In addition, the
CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides FE/GE interfaces, PDH/SDH interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, and
management interfaces.
Packet Switching
l Supports the E-Line and E-LAN services.
l Supports the addition, deletion, and switching of IEEE 802.1q/p-compliant VLAN tags and
forwards packets based on the VLAN tags.
l Supports the MAC address learning function.
OptiX RTN 910
3-29
l Supports the MSTP protocol that adopts only the common and internal spanning tree
(CIST).
l Supports the IGMP Snooping protocol.
l Supports the QoS function.
l Supports the ITU-T G.8032-compliant ERPS Ethernet ring protection.
l Supports the disabling of the Ethernet interface connecting to the user equipment when a
fault occurs on the transmission network.
l Supports two aggregation modes (namely, manual aggregation and static aggregation) and
two load sharing types (namely, sharing and non-sharing). The load sharing algorithm is
based on the hash algorithm of the MAC address or the IP address.
l Supports the Ethernet OAM functions that are compliant with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE
802.3ah.
l Supports the synchronous Ethernet that is compliant with ITU-T G.8261 and ITU-T G.
8262.
Time Division Cross-Connection
l Grooms service signals between boards.
l Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which
are equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s.
System Control and Communication
l Provides the system control and communication function to manage the other boards and
the ODUs by using the NE software.
l Controls the other boards by using the board software that runs on the system control and
communication unit.
l Monitors and collects performance events and alarms of all the boards.
l Realizes the communication with the NMS and other NEs. The CSHC can process a
maximum of seven DCCs. The CSHA and CSHB can process a maximum of five DCCs.
l Cross-connects and processes overheads.
Clock Processing
l Traces the clock source and provides the system clock and the frame headers of service
signals and overhead signals for the other boards.
l Supports one input and one output of the external clock.
l Supports the selection of the external clock source or the service clock source to be the
system clock source. The service clock source can be the SDH line clock, microwave
interface line clock, Ethernet interface line clock, or tributary clock.
l Supports clock protection based on the clock priority, synchronization status message
(SSM) protocol, or extended SSM protocol.
l Supports the detection of the state of the system clock source and the phase-locked loop.
l Supports the trace, holdover, and free-run modes.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
TDM Service Processing Interfaces
l The CSHA provides sixteen 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 data interfaces.
l The CSHB provides thirty-two 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 data interfaces.
l The CSHC supports sixteen 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 data interfaces and two STM-1 optical
interfaces. The two STM-1 optical interfaces use the SFP optical modules.
Ethernet Service Interfaces
l The CSHA provides two FE electrical interfaces and two GE electrical interfaces. The two
GE electrical interfaces can also transmit FE electrical signals.
l The CSHB provides two FE electrical interfaces and two GE electrical interfaces. The two
GE electrical interfaces can also transmit FE electrical signals.
l The CSHC provides two FE electrical interfaces and two GE optical interfaces. The two
GE optical interfaces use the SFP optical modules.
l The Ethernet interfaces support the auto-negotiation and self-loop diagnosis functions.
l Supports the setting and query of the tag attributes of the Ethernet interfaces. The following
three TAG attributes are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid. The tag attributes of an
Ethernet interface can be set only when the network attributes of the Ethernet interface is
set to UNI.
l Supports the IEEE 802.3x-compliant flow control function.
l Provides one Ethernet NM interface.
l Provides one NM serial interface.
l Provides one NE cascade interface.
l Provides one Orderwire interface.
l Provides one asynchronous data interface.
l Provides one synchronous data interface.
l Provides one three-input and one-output external alarm interface.
l Performs the 1+1 protection switching.
l Performs the linear MSP switching.
l Performs the SNCP switching.
l Performs the clock protection switching.
setting the alarm thresholds.
l Supports RMON performance events.
OptiX RTN 910
3-31
NOTE
For details on the alarm management and performance event management functions, see the OptiX RTN
l Supports the inloop at the PHY layer over Ethernet interfaces.
l Supports the inloop at the MAC layer over Ethernet interfaces.
l Supports the outloop on VC-4 paths.
l Supports the board reset.
l Detects the board temperature, alarm inputs/outputs, and overvoltage/undervoltage of the
-48 V power supply.
l Checks the indicators on all the boards.
l Supports the hot swapping and mis-insertion prevention functions.
l Supports the local and remote loading of the FPGA and supports the misloading prevention
function.
l Supports the insertion and removal of the CF card and backs up the configuration data. The
backup configuration data can be used for quick service restoration in the case of an on-
site board replacement.
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC comprises the system control and communication unit, packet
switching unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.
NOTE
This topic considers the CSHC as an example to describe the working principle of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram
Backplane
System control
and
communication
unit
Cross-connect
unit
Power
supply
unit
External alarm
interf ace
Clock unit
Clock signal provided
to the other boards
External clock signal Clock
interf ace
STM-1 signal
processing
unit
E1 signal
processing
unit
VC-4
signal
VC-4
signal
E1 signal
SDH signal
Control bus
VC-4 signal
Asynchronous data
interface
Synchronous data
interface
Orderwire
interf ace
A
u
x
i
l
i
a
r
y
i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
u
n
i
t
-48 V1
-48 V2
Power supplied to
the other units on
the board
Clock signal
provided to
the other units
on the board
+12 V power supplied
to the f ans
+3.3 V power supplied
to other boards
NM interf ace
NM serial interface
NE cascade
interf ace
Packet
switching unit
FE signal
access
unit
GE signal
access
unit
FE signal
GE signal
GE bus
FE signal
GE signal
Clock signal received
f rom other boards
Clock signal
received f rom
the service unit
on the board

System Control and Communication Unit
The system control and communication unit comprises the CPU unit and logic control unit. The
system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l Controls and manages the other units on the board, and also collects alarms and performance
l Controls and manages the other boards in the IDU, and also collects alarms and performance
l Controls and manages the ODU by using the ODU control signal transmitted through the
control bus in the backplane and the SMODEM in the IF board.
OptiX RTN 910
3-33
l The CPU unit drives the packet switching unit to groom Ethernet service packets, through
the control bus.
l The CPU unit processes the Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit,
through the control bus.
l Processes the network management messages in the DCCs through the logic control unit.
l The CPU unit communicates with the NMS through the Ethernet NM interface and NE
cascade interface.
l The CPU unit reads the information from the CF card through the bus and loads the
software.
l The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and loads
the FPGA software.
l The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads of the auxiliary interface unit, the CPU
unit, and other boards, thus realizing the following functions:
Adds or drops the DCC information processed by the CPU unit.
Adds or drops the orderwire and asynchronous data services.
Realizes the interchange of the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between
different lines.
Packet Switching Unit
The main functional unit of the packet switching unit is the Layer 2 switching unit. The Layer
2 switching unit performs the operations related to the Layer 2 switching and Layer 2 protocol.
l After receiving Ethernet services from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or from
other Ethernet boards, the packet switching unit grooms the Ethernet services based on the
configurations that are delivered by the system control and communication unit.
l After receiving protocol packets from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or from other
Ethernet boards, the packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the system
control and communication unit for processing. The system control and communication
unit processes the protocol packets and then sends the protocol packets back to the packet
switching unit. The packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the Ethernet
interface unit on the board or to the other Ethernet boards.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system through the higher order cross-
connect unit and the lower order cross-connect unit. Figure 3-14 shows the functional block
diagram of the cross-connect unit.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Figure 3-14 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM
service unit
HOXC
LOXC
Sink TDM
service unit

The source TDM service unit transmits the VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect unit
through the VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals are all VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
unit processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit. If
the VC-4 signals include any VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect unit
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect unit. The lower order cross-
connect unit processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services back to the
higher order cross-connect unit. The higher order cross-connect unit processes the services and
then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
FE Signal Access Unit
The FE signal access unit provides access to two FE signals and works with the Layer 2 switching
unit to realize the Layer 2 switching function.
l In the receive direction, after performing restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for the FE signals, the FE signal access unit extracts framed FE signals by
delimiting the frames and adding the preambles and performs the CRC check and Ethernet
performance statistics.
l In the transmit direction, after delimiting the frames, adding the preambles, calculating the
CRC check codes, and performing the Ethernet performance statistics, the FE signal access
unit performs the parallel/serial conversion, encodes the FE signals, and then transmits the
FE signals to the FE interface.
GE Signal Access Unit
The GE signal access unit provides access to two GE optical signals or two GE electrical signals
and works with the Layer 2 switching unit to realize the Layer 2 switching function.
l In the receive direction, after performing the O/E conversion, restructuring, decoding, and
serial/parallel conversion for the GE optical signals or after performing restructuring,
decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for the GE electrical signals, the GE signal access
unit extracts framed GE signals by delimiting the frames and adding the preambles and
performs the CRC check and Ethernet performance statistics.
OptiX RTN 910
3-35
l In the transmit direction, after delimiting the frames, adding the preambles, calculating the
CRC check codes, and performing the Ethernet performance statistics, the GE signal access
unit performs the parallel/serial conversion and encoding and then transmits the GE signals
to the GE interface after performing O/E conversion.
E1 Signal Processing Unit
The E1 signal processing unit provides access to, codes/decodes, and maps/demaps E1 electrical
signals, and also processes overheads. The signal processing flow on this unit is the same as the
signal processing flow on the SP3S/SP3D. For details, see 3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal
Flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
STM-1 Signal Processing Unit
The STM-1 signal processing unit provides access to STM-1 optical signals, extracts the clock
signal, restores the data, scrambles/descrambles the data, processes overheads, and processes
pointers. The signal processing flow on the STM-1 signal processing unit is the same as the
signal processing flow on the SL1D. For details, see 3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal
Flow of the SL1D.
Clock Unit
The clock unit selects the external clock source or the service clock source from a service
interface according to the clock priority. Through the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides
the system clock and the frame headers of service signals and overhead signals to other units on
the system control and communication board and the other boards.
Auxiliary Interface Unit
The auxiliary interface unit processes the input and output of the Orderwire interface,
asynchronous data interface, synchronous data interface, and external alarm interface.
Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by
the chips of the other units on the system control and communication board.
l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power required
by the other boards in the IDU.
l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power required by
the fan.
3.4.4 Front Panel
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-15 Front panel of the CSHA
C
S
H
A
S
T
A
T
P
R
O
G
S
Y
N
C
S
R
V
CF RCV RST NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE FE1 FE2 GE1 GE2
E1
1~16
1 2 3 4 5 6
4. FE service interfaces 5. GE service interfaces 6. E1 (1-16) interface

Figure 3-16 Front panel of the CSHB
C
S
H
B
S
T
A
T
P
R
O
G
S
Y
N
C
S
R
V
E1
1~16
E1
17~32
1 2
3 4 5 6
4. FE service interfaces 5. GE service interfaces 6. E1 (1-32) interface

Figure 3-17 Front panel of the CSHC
C
S
H
C
S
T
A
T
P
R
O
G
S
Y
N
C
S
R
V
CF RCV RSTNMS/COM NE CLK/TIME F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE FE1 FE2
E1(1~16)
ETH STM-1
L
I N
K
1
A
C
T
1
L
I N
K
2
A
C
T
2
L
O
S
1
L
O
S
2
C
S
H
C
S
T
A
T
P
R
O
G
S
Y
N
C
S
R
V
CF RCV RST
NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE FE1 FE2
E1
1~16
L
I N
K
1
A
C
T
1
L
I N
K
2
A
C
T
2
L
O
S
1
L
O
S
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
GE STM-1
GE1 GE2 STM-1
2 1 2 1

4. FE service interfaces 5. GE service interfaces 6. STM-1 optical interfaces
7. E1 (1-16) interface

OptiX RTN 910
3-37
Indicators
Table 3-23 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB
board.
BIOS boot state.
initialized.
fails.
board.
system.

3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Table 3-24 Description of the indicators on the CSHC
board.
BIOS boot state.
initialized.
fails.
board.
system.
LINK1 On (green) The port connection is normal.
Off The port connection is interrupted.
ACT1 On or blinking (yellow) The data is being transmitted or received.
OptiX RTN 910
3-39
Off No data is being transmitted or received.

Description of the Auxiliary Interfaces and Management Interfaces
Table 3-25 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces
NMS/COM NM interface/NM serial interface
RJ-45
EXT NE cascade interface
CLK/TOD External clock/time interface (2048 kbit/s or
2048 kHz)/The wayside E1 interface
F1/S1 Synchronous/Asynchronous data interface
ALMI/ALMO Alarm input/output interface
PHONE Orderwire interface
CF RCV CF configuration reset button -
RST Board warm reset button -

3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
NOTE
l The external clock interface and wayside E1 interface are combined into one interface. This interface can
transparently transmit the DCC byte, orderwire overhead byte, and synchronous/asynchronous data service
overhead byte. One interface, however, can implement only one of the three functions: external clock
interface, wayside E1 service, and transparent transmission of the overhead byte.
l The 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface can transparently transmit the orderwire byte. One interface,
however, can implement only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface and transparent
transmission of the orderwire byte.
The auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces use RJ-45 connectors. The pin assignments
of the interfaces, however, are different. Figure 3-18 shows the front view of the RJ-45
connector.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table 3-26 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface
NMS/COM
4 Grounding end of the NM serial
interface
5 Receive end of the NM serial interface
7 Not defined
8 Transmit end of the NM serial
interface

Table 3-27 Pin assignment of the EXT interface
EXT
OptiX RTN 910
3-41
4, 5, 7, 8 Not defined

NOTE
The EXT interface supports the MDI/MDI-X auto-negotiation. That is, the EXT interface can transmit data
through pins 3 and 6 and can receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. For the meanings of the states of the indicators, see
Table 3-28.
Off The link fails.
receiving data.
receiving data.

NOTE
The NMS/COM interface and the NE interface are equivalent to two ports on a hub. Thus, ensure that no
external Ethernet link is configured between the two interfaces during the networking process. Otherwise,
an Ethernet loop is formed. As a result, a network storm is generated, wherein repeated resets are performed
on the NEs.
Figure 3-19 shows the two common incorrect connections.
Figure 3-19 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface
C
S
H
A
S
T
A
T
P
R
O
G
S
Y
N
C
S
R
V
E1
1~16
C
S
H
A
S
T
A
T
P
R
O
G
S
Y
N
C
S
R
V
E1
1~16
LAN

3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
The clock interface (CLK) and the high-precision time interface (TOD) use different pins of the
same RJ-4 connector. The pin assignment information of the CLK/TOD interface is provided
in Table 3-29.
NOTE
Pins 3 and 6-8 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588 protocol) and are not
used in this product version.
Table 3-29 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface
Pin Working Mode
Externa
l Clock
External
Time Input
(1 PPS +
Time
Informatio
n)
External Time
Output
(1 PPS + Time
Information)
External
Time Input
(DCLS)
External Time
Output
(DCLS)
1 CLK
receivin
g (-)
2 CLK
receivin
g (+)
3 Not
defined
1 PPS signal
input (-)
(RS-422
level)
1 PPS signal
output (-)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time
signal input (-)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time
signal output (-)
(RS-422 level)
4 CLK
transmit
ting (-)
Grounding
end
5 CLK
transmit
ting (+)
Grounding
end
6 Not
defined
1 PPS signal
input (+)
(RS-422
level)
1 PPS signal
output (+)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time
signal input (+)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time
signal output (+)
(RS-422 level)
7 Not
defined
Time
information
input (-)
(RS-422
level)
Time
information
output (-)
(RS-422 level)
OptiX RTN 910
3-43
Pin Working Mode
Externa
l Clock
External
Time Input
(1 PPS +
Time
Informatio
n)
External Time
Output
(1 PPS + Time
Information)
External
Time Input
(DCLS)
External Time
Output
(DCLS)
8 Not
defined
Time
information
input (+)
(RS-422
level)
Time
information
output (+)
(RS-422 level)

The pin assignment information of the F1/S1 interface is provided in Table 3-30.
Table 3-30 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface
F1/S1 1 Transmitting asynchronous data signals
2 Grounding end
3 Receiving asynchronous data signals
4 Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)
5 Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)
6 Grounding end
7 Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)
8 Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)

The pin assignment information of the ALMI/ALMO interface is provided in Table 3-31.
Table 3-31 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface
ALMI/
ALMO
1 The first external alarm input signal
2 Grounding end for the first alarm input signal
3 The second external alarm input signal
4 The third external alarm input signal
5 Grounding end for the third alarm input signal
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
6 Grounding end for the second alarm input signal
7 The first external alarm output signal (+)
8 The first external alarm output signal (-)

The pin assignment information of the PHONE interface is provided in Table 3-32.
Table 3-32 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface
PHONE 1 Not defined
2
3
4 RING
5 TIP
6 Not defined
7
8

Service Interfaces
Table 3-33 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHA/CSHB
FE1 FE interface
RJ-45
FE2
GE1 GE electrical interface
GE2
E1 (1-16) The first to sixteenth E1 signal
interfaces
Anea 96
E1 (17-32) The seventeenth to thirty-second
E1 signal interfaces
a

OptiX RTN 910
3-45
NOTE
a. Only the CSHB provides 32 E1 signal interfaces. The CSHA provides only 16 E1 signal interfaces.
Table 3-34 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHC
FE1 FE interface RJ-45
FE2
GE1 GE optical interface LC (the SFP optical module)
GE2
TX1 Transmit port of the first STM-1
optical interface
RX1 Receive port of the first STM-1
optical interface
TX2 Transmit port of the second STM-1
optical interface
RX2 Receive port of the second STM-1
optical interface
E1 (1-16) The first to sixteenth E1 signals Anea 96

The FE interfaces and GE electrical interfaces support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-negotiation
modes. For the pin assignment information, see Table 3-35 and Table 3-36.
Table 3-35 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode
Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T
Signal Function Signal Function
1 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A
(+)
2 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A
(-)
3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B
(+)
4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C
(+)
5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C
(-)
6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B
(-)
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D
(+)
8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D
(-)

Table 3-36 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode
(+)
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
(+)
(-)

The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. The meanings of the two indicators are the same as the
meanings of the indicators on the NMS/COM interface (RJ-45 connector).
The E1 interface uses the Anea 96 socket. The pin assignment information of the Anea 96
interface is provided in Figure 3-20 and Table 3-37.
POS.96
POS.1
OptiX RTN 910
3-47

signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)

Different values of the DIP switches correspond to different functions of the DIP switches.
The CF card stores the following information:
l All the data of the NE, including the NE ID, NE IP address, and service data
OptiX RTN 910
3-49
l NE software and all the board software programs
l All the FPGA files
l License file for microwave link capability
Figure 3-21 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card
O
N
D
I
P
1
2
3
4
2
1

1. DIP switches 2. CF card
Table 3-38 Setting the DIP switches
4 3 2 1
0 0 0 0 Normal
operating state
when the
watchdog is
enabled.
0 0 0 1 Reserved.
0 0 1 0 Memory self-
check state.
0 0 1 1 Commissioning
state.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
4 3 2 1
0 1 0 0 Operating state
when the
watchdog is
disabled and the
full memory
check is
performed.
0 1 0 1 BIOS holdover
state.
0 1 1 0 BIOS exhibition
state.
default,
operating state
when the
watchdog is
started).
default,
operating state
when the
watchdog is
started).
1 0 0 1 To recover the
data of the CF
card.
1 0 1 0 To erase the data
in the system
parameter area.
databases.
1 1 0 0 To erase the NE
software,
including the
patches.
databases and
NE software
(including the
patches).
OptiX RTN 910
3-51
4 3 2 1
file system, that
is, to erase all
the data in the
file system.
file system so
that all the data
is erased (file
system +
extended BIOS
+ system
parameter area).

3.4.6 Valid Slots
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of
two ordinary slots. The functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC are mapped into the logical
boards and the corresponding logical slots are also allocated for the logical boards on the NMS
so that the NMS can manage each functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.
Figure 3-22 Slot for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC in the IDU chassis
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 5
(PIU)
Slot 1 (CSHA/CSHB/CSHC)

Different logical boards are allocated for the CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC on the NMS.
Figure 3-23 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHA
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 5
(PIU)
Slot 7 (EM4T) Slot 9 (SP3S) Slot 1
(
CSHA
)
Slot 10
(
AUX
)

Figure 3-24 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHB
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 5
(PIU)
Slot 1 ( CSHB )
Slot 10 ( AUX
)
Slot 7 (EM4T) Slot 9 (SP3D)

3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Figure 3-25 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHC
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 5
(PIU)
Slot 1 ( CSHC
)
Slot 10 ( AUX ) Slot 7 (EM4F) Slot 8 (SL1D) Slot 9 (SP3S)

The E1 interface impedance of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC can be identified by the board feature
name.
Table 3-39 Board feature code of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC
A 120
B 75

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.
Related References
This topic describes the board specifications, including the packet switching performance, cross-
connection performance, Ethernet interface performance, SDH optical interface performance,
E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interface performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Packet Switching
Supports the 4.2Gbit/s packet switching function.
OptiX RTN 910
3-53
Cross-Connection Performance
Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which are
equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s.
Ethernet Interface Performance
The Ethernet interface performance meets the relevant standards specified in IEEE 802.3. The
following three tables provide the performance indexes of the GE optical interfaces, GE electrical
interfaces, and FE electrical interfaces, respectively.
Table 3-40 Performance of the GE optical interface
Item Performance
Classification code 1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX
Fiber type Multiple-mode optical
fiber
Single-mode optical
fiber
Transmission distance (km) 0.5 10
Operating wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355
Mean launched power (dBm) -9.5 to 0 -9 to -3
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) -17 -19
Minimum overload (dBm) 0 -3
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 9 9

NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing GE optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Table 3-41 GE electric interface performance
Item Performance
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)
Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)
MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)
Interface type RJ-45

3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Table 3-42 FE electric interface performance
Item Performance
100 (100BASE-TX)

Item Performance
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
(km)
2 15 40 80
(nm)
1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
Mean launched power
(dBm)
-19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-30 -28 -34 -34
(dB)
10 8.2 10 10

NOTE
OptiX RTN 910
3-55
Item Performance
Code pattern HDB3
Wire pair in each

Orderwire Interface Performance
Table 3-45 Orderwire interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-
defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Orderwire type Addressing call
Wire pair in each
One symmetrical wire pair
Impedance (ohm) 600

NOTE
The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when an OptiX RTN
equipment calls the number of 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire
phones in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is
established.
Synchronous Data Interface Performance
Table 3-46 Synchronous data interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined
byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Interface type Codirectional
Interface characteristics Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Asynchronous Data Interface
Table 3-47 Asynchronous data interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the
Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 19.2
Interface characteristics Meets the RS-232 standard.

Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance
The clock timing and synchronization performance meets the relevant standards specified in the
ITU-T Recommendations.
Table 3-48 Clock timing and synchronization performance
Item Performance
External synchronization
source
2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 9), or 2048 kHz
(compliant with ITU-T G.703 13)
Frequency accuracy Compliant with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in, hold-in, and pull-out
ranges
Noise generation
Noise tolerance
Noise transfer
Transient response and
holdover performance

Wayside Service Interface Performance
Table 3-49 Wayside service interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the
microwave frame.
Impedance (ohm) 120

OptiX RTN 910
3-57
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
(width)
Weight CSHA: 1.110kg
CSHB: 1.158kg
CSHC: 1.129kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the CSHA: < 19 W
Power consumption of the CSHB: < 22 W
Power consumption of the CSHC: < 20 W
3.5 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board and is available in two types, namely, IF1A and
IF1B. The IF1A is an isolated IF board. The IF1B is a non-isolated IF board. The IF1A supports
the DC-I and DC-C power distribution modes. The IF1B supports only the DC-C power
distribution mode. In this document, the IF1 is used to stand for both the IF1A and IF1B.
The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.
The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal and provides the management channel to the ODU
and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This topic considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the IF1.
3.5.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF interface, and an ODU power switch on the front panel.
3.5.5 Valid Slots
The IF1 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS should be the
same as the physical slots.
The power distribution mode supported by the IF1 can be identified by the board feature code
that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code.
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
This topic describes the board specifications, including baseband signal processing performance
of the modem, IF performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.
The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal and provides the management channel to the ODU
and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
IF Processing
l Maps SDH and PDH service signals into microwave frame signals.
l Codes and decodes microwave frame signals.
l Modulates and demodulates microwave frame signals.
l Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals.
l Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies.
Overhead Processing
l Processes the regenerator section overheads of the SDH microwave signals.
l Processes the multiplex section overheads of the SDH microwave signals.
l Processes the higher order path overheads of the SDH microwave signals.
l Processes the overheads of the PDH microwave frame signals.
l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 overhead bytes in the SDH microwave
signals.
l Supports the setting and query of the link ID.
NOTE
Higher order path overheads are processed in two modes, namely, the pass-through mode and termination mode.
In the pass-through mode, the path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values
are not changed. In the termination mode, when the path overheads are detected in the receive direction, the
overhead bytes are re-set to the default values in the transmit direction. By default, the board adopts the pass-
through mode.
Pointer Processing
l Processes the AU pointers in the SDH microwave signals.
l Processes the TU pointers in the PDH microwave signals.
l Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection.
l Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.
l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels
in an SNCP group.
l Supports the setting of SNCP switching conditions.
OptiX RTN 910
3-59
NOTE
For details on the 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, 1+1 SD, and SNCP, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission
System Feature Description.
NOTE
l Supports the inloop and outloop over IF interfaces.
l Supports the detection of the board temperature.
l Supports the monitoring of the power supply and the clock.
l Supports the warm reset and cold reset on the board.
l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
NOTE
l For details on the loopback function, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance
Guide.
l A warm reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control and communication unit
but does not affect the services. A cold reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system
control and communication unit, the initiation of the board (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is
reloaded), and a service interruption.
This topic considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the IF1.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Figure 3-26 Functional block diagram of the IF1
Backplane
Cross-connect unit
I F I

F

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
L
o
g
i
c

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
System control and
communication unit
System control and
communication unit
M
U
X
/
D
E
M
U
X

u
n
i
t
MODEM
unit
C
o
m
b
i
n
e
r

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e

u
n
i
t
Power
supply
unit
SMODEM
unit
Clock
unit
Logic
control unit
System control and
communication unit
ODU control signal
Paired board
Microwave
frame signal
HSM switching signal
Service
bus
Overhead
bus
Control bus
-48 V
+3.3
V
+3.3 power supplied
to the monitoring
circuit
-48 V power supplied
to the ODU
+3.3 V power supplied to
other modules on the
board
System clock signal
Clock signal provided
to the other units on
the board

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction
Table 3-51 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1
Step Functional Unit Processing Flow
1 Combiner interface
unit
Separates the ODU control signal and the microwave
service signal from the IF signal.
2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates the ODU control signal.
l Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial interface
of the CPU unit in the system control and
communication unit.
3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of the service signal through the
automatic gain control (AGC) circuit.
l Filters the signal.
l Performs A/D conversion.
OptiX RTN 910
3-61
4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.
l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates the
corresponding alarms.
5 MUX/DEMUX unit
(for SDH microwave
signal processing)
l Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS and
R_LOF alarms.
l Performs descrambling.
l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the
corresponding alarms and performance events.
l Checks the link ID and generates the corresponding
alarms.
l Checks bits 6-8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte, and
generates the corresponding alarms and performance
events.
l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and
reports the SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
l Detects the changes in the ATPC message and the
microwave RDI, and reports the changes to the system
control and communication unit through the control
bus.
l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and
K bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal, and
transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Extracts the wayside service bytes to form another 2
Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the 2 Mbit/s
overhead signal to the logic processing unit.
l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates the
corresponding performance events.
l Checks the higher order path overheads and generates
the corresponding alarms and performance events.
l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4
signal to the logic processing unit.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
MUX/DEMUX unit
(for PDH microwave
signal processing)
l Detects the PDH microwave frame header and
events.
l Verifies the check code and generates the
l Detects the link ID and generates the corresponding
alarms.
bus.
including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes
from the PDH microwave frame to form a 2 Mbit/s
overhead signal, and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead
l Adjusts the TU pointers.
l Maps the TU-12s of the PDH microwave signals into
the specified position in the VC-4.
6 Logic processing
unit
l Processes the clock signal.
l Multiplexes the 2 Mbit/s overhead signals into an 8
overhead signal to the system control and
communication unit. Each 2 Mbit/s overhead signal
occupies a 2 Mbit/s timeslot in the 8 Mbit/s overhead
bandwidth.
l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication
signal to the cross-connect unit.

NOTE
In the 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits the service signals by HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board selects the signal of higher quality for
subsequent processing.
OptiX RTN 910
3-63
Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-52 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1
1 Logic processing
unit
l Demultiplexes the 8 Mbit/s overhead signal into 2
Mbit/s overhead signals.
l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal
from the cross-connect unit.
2 MUX/DEMUX unit
(for SDH microwave
signal processing)
l Sets the higher order path overheads.
l Sets the AU pointer.
l Sets the multiplex section overheads.
l Sets the regenerator section overheads.
l Performs scrambling.
MUX/DEMUX unit
(for PDH microwave
signal processing)
l Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signal.
l Sets the PDH microwave frame overheads.
3 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.
l Performs digital modulation.
4 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.
l Performs analog modulation.
5 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmitted
from the system control and communication unit.
unit
Combines the ODU control signal, microwave service
signal, and -48 V power supplies, and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.

Control Signal Processing Flow
The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the board
through the control bus. The command responses, alarms, and performance events are also
reported to the CPU unit through the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the read/write address signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.
Power Supply unit
l Receives the -48 V power supply from the power supply bus in the backplane, performs
the start-relay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion operations, and then supplies the -48 V
power to the ODU.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
l Receives the +3.3 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies the
+3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides the clock
signal to the other units on the board.
3.5.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF interface, and an ODU power switch on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-27 Front panel of the IF1
PULL
I
F
1
IF
I O
ODU-PWR
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
L
I
N
K
O
D
U
R
M
T
A
C
T
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
I
F
1

Indicators
Table 3-53 Description of the indicators on the IF1
STAT On (green) The board is working
normally.
l There is no power supplied
to the board.
SRV On (green) The services are normal.
On (red) Indicates that a critical or
major alarm occurs in the
service.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm
occurs in the services.
Off The services are not
configured.
LINK On (green) The space link is normal.
On (red) The space link is faulty.
OptiX RTN 910
3-65
ODU On (green) The ODU works normally.
On (red) The ODU is faulty or there is
no power supplied to the
ODU.
On for 300 ms (yellow) and
The antennas are not aligned.
RMT On (yellow) The equipment at the
opposite end reports an RDI.
Off The equipment at the
opposite end does not report
an RDI.
ACT On (green) The board is in the active
state in the 1+1 protection
system.
The board is already
activated in the unprotected
system.
Off The board is in the standby
system.
The board is not activated in
the unprotected system.

Interfaces
Table 3-54 Description of the Interfaces
Interface Description Connector Type Corresponding
Cable
IF IF interface TNC
IF jumper
b
ODU-PWR
a
ODU power switch - -

NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever outwards slightly. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: The 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board. Hence, when the 5D IF cable is used, the IF jumper
is not required.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. In this case, you need to wear protective
gloves before handling the board.
The operation warning label indicates that you must turn off the ODU-PWR switch before
removing the IF cable.
The operation guidance label indicates that you need to pull the switch outward slightly before
setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.
3.5.5 Valid Slots
The IF1 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS should be the
same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-28 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 5
(PIU)
Slot 1
Slot 3 (IF1) Slot 4 (IF1)

The ODU is not inserted in a physical slot but has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus
20.
Figure 3-29 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IF1
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 5
(PIU)
Slot 1
Slot 3 (IF1) Slot 4 (IF1)
Slot 10 SLOT 7 Slot 8 Slot 9
Slot 23 (ODU) Slot 24 (ODU)

Table 3-55 Slot allocation
Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slot 3 > slot 4

The power distribution mode supported by the IF1 can be identified by the board feature code
OptiX RTN 910
3-67
Table 3-56 Board feature code of the IF1
Board Feature Code Power Distribution Mode
A DC-I
B DC-C

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.
Related References
A.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
A.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
A.15.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
This topic describes the board specifications, including baseband signal processing performance
of the modem, IF performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
IF Performance
Table 3-57 IF performance
Item Performance
IF signal
Transmit frequency of the IF
board (MHz)
350
Receive frequency of the IF
board (MHz)
140
Impedance (ohm) 50
ODU O&M signal
Modulation mode ASK
board (MHz)
5.5
board (MHz)
10

3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem
Table 3-58 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem
Item Performance
Encoding mode l Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH microwave signals
l Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for
SDH microwave signals
Adaptive time-
domain equalizer for
baseband signals
Supported

Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
(width)
Weight 0.72 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 8 W
3.6 IFU2
The IFU2 is a general IF board, which can support the Hybrid microwave transmission and
Packet microwave transmission at the same time.
NOTE
In this version, the IFU2 supports only the Hybrid microwave transmission.
The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.
The IFU2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channel
to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
This topic considers the processing of one Hybrid microwave IF signal as an example to describe
the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.
3.6.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF interface, labels and an ODU power switch on the front panel.
OptiX RTN 910
3-69
3.6.5 Valid Slots
The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS should be
the same as the physical slots.
The power distribution mode supported by the IFU2 can be identified by the board feature code
3.6.7 Parameter Settings
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.
This topic describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,
board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.
The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.
The IFU2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channel
to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
IF Processing
l Supports the Hybrid microwave frames, and supports the pure transmission of E1 or
Ethernet signals and the hybrid transmission of E1 and Ethernet signals.
l Supports the Packet microwave frames and supports the packet service transmission.
l Supports the adaptive modulation (AM) technology.
l Maps service signals into microwave frame signals.
l Provides a maximum of 56 MHz signal bandwidth and supports the highest modulation
mode of 256QAM.
Overhead Processing
l Processes the overheads of the Hybrid/Packet microwave signals.
l Supports N+1 protection.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
NOTE
For details on the 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, and 1+1 SD, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System
Feature Description.
NOTE
l Supports the inloop and outloop at composite ports.
l Supports the MAC inloop at IF_ETH ports.
l Supports the PRBS BER test over IF interfaces.
l Supports the monitoring of the power supply and the clock.
l Supports the detection of the board voltage.
l Supports the detection of the board clock.
NOTE
Guide.
the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.
NOTE
The working principle and signal flow of the Packet microwave IF signals are similar to the working
principle and signal flow of the Hybrid microwave IF signals. The only difference is with regard to the
frame structure. In the case of the Packet microwave, the MUX/DEMUX unit only multiplexes/
demultiplexes the packet services and does not transmit the TDM services to the cross-connect unit or
receive the TDM services from the cross-connect unit.
OptiX RTN 910
3-71
Figure 3-30 Functional block diagram of the IFU2
Backplane
Cross-connect unit
I F I

F

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
L
o
g
i
c

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
System control and
communication unit
System control and
communication unit
M
U
X
/
D
E
M
U
X

u
n
i
t
MODEM
unit
C
o
m
b
i
n
e
r

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e

u
n
i
t
Power
supply
unit
SMODEM
unit
Clock
unit
Logic
control unit
ODU control
signal
Paired board
Microwave frame
signal
Service bus
Overhead
bus
GE bus
Packet switching unit
Control bus
-48V2
-48 V power supplied to the ODU
the other units on the board
System clock signal
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the board
Ethernet
processin
g unit
+3.3
V
-48 V1
the monitoring circuit

Table 3-60 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFU2
Step Functional
Module
Processing Flow
unit
l Transmits the ODU control unit to the system control
and communication unit.
3 IF processing unit l Filters the signal.
l Performs the ADC sampling.
l Performs A/D conversion.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Step Functional
Module
Processing Flow
4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.
5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects the Hybrid microwave frame header and
events.
alarms.
bus.
SSM bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal, and
processing unit.
l Maps the E1 signals in the Hybrid microwave service
signals to the specific positions in the VC-4s and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.
l Transmits the Ethernet signals in the Hybrid
microwave service signals to the ethernet processing
unit.
6 Ethernet processing
unit
l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/
DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the packet switching
unit.
7 Logic processing
unit
bandwidth.
signal to the cross-connect unitthe main and standby
cross-connect units.

OptiX RTN 910
3-73
NOTE
Table 3-61 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFU2
Step Functional
Module
Processing Flow
1 Logic processing
unit
unit
l Receives the GE signal from the packet switching unit.
l Processes the GE signals.
3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal.
l Sets the Hybrid microwave frame overheads.
l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and
microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
l Amplifies the signals.
unit

3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Power Supply Unit
l This unit receives the -48 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane, performs
the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the -48 V power to the
ODU.
the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to
the other units on the IFU2.
Clock Unit
3.6.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF interface, labels and an ODU power switch on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-31 Front panel of the IFU2
I
F
U
2
PULL
IF
I O
ODU-PWR
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
L
I
N
K
O
D
U
R
M
T
A
C
T
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER
BEFORE

Indicators
Table 3-62 Description of the indicators on the IFU2
normally.
to the board.
service.
OptiX RTN 910
3-75
configured.
ODU.
an RDI.
system.
system.
system.

Interface and Switch
Table 3-63 Description of the Interfaces
Cable
IF IF interface TNC
IF jumper
b
ODU-PWR
a

3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
NOTE
is not required.
Labels
3.6.5 Valid Slots
The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS should be
Figure 3-32 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 5
(PIU)
Slot 1
Slot 3 (IFU2) Slot 4 (IFU2)

20.
Figure 3-33 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFU2
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 5
(PIU)
Slot 1
Slot 3 (IFU2) Slot 4 (IFU2)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 10 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9

OptiX RTN 910
3-77
Item Description

The power distribution mode supported by the IFU2 can be identified by the board feature code
Table 3-65 Board feature code of the IFU2
A DC-I
B DC-C

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.
Related References
A.14.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM Configuration
A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes
A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,
IF Performance
Item Performance
IF signal
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Item Performance
board (MHz)
350
board (MHz)
140
Impedance (ohm) 50
ODU O&M signal
Modulation mode ASK
board (MHz)
5.5
board (MHz)
10

Item Performance
Encoding mode The LDPC encoding is performed for the Hybrid microwave signals.
Adaptive time-
baseband signals
Supported

Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
Dimensions 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width)
Weight 0.79 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the IFU2A: < 22 W
Power consumption of the IFU2B: < 17.4 W
OptiX RTN 910
3-79
3.7 IFX2
The IFX2 is a general IF board, which can support the XPIC function of the Hybrid microwave
and SDH microwave. The IFX2 board supports only the DC-I power distribution mode.
NOTE
In this version, the IFX2 supports only the Hybrid microwave transmission.
The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.
The IFX2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channel
to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 can cancel the cross-
polarization interference in the IF signal.
the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.
3.7.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF interface, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on
the front panel.
3.7.5 Valid Slot
The IFX2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS should be
The power distribution mode supported by the IFX2 can be identified by the board feature code
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.
This section describes the board performance, including IF performance, modem performance,
XPIC performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.
The IFX2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channel
to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 can cancel the cross-
polarization interference in the IF signal.
IF Processing
l Supports the XPIC function, provides the XPIC input and output interfaces, and supports
the manual configuration of the XPIC function.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
l Supports the Hybrid microwave frames and supports the pure transmission of E1 or
Ethernet signals and the hybrid transmission of E1 and Ethernet signals.
l Supports the Packet microwave frames and supports the packet service transmission.
l Supports the adaptive modulation (AM) technology.
l Maps service signals into microwave frame signals.
l Provides the maximum signal bandwidth of 56 MHz and supports the highest modulation
mode of 256QAM.
Overhead Processing
l Processes the overheads of the Hybrid/Packet microwave signals.
l Supports N+1 protection.
NOTE
For details on the 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, and 1+1 SD, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System
NOTE
l Supports the inloop and outloop at composite ports.
l Supports the MAC inloop at IF_ETH ports.
l Supports the PRBS BER test over IF interfaces.
l Supports the detection of the board voltage.
OptiX RTN 910
3-81
l Supports the detection of the board clock.
NOTE
Guide.
the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.
NOTE
The working principle and signal flow of the Packet microwave IF signals are similar to the working
principle and signal flow of the Hybrid microwave IF signals. The only difference is with regard to the
frame structure. In the case of the Packet microwave, the MUX/DEMUX unit only multiplexes/
demultiplexes the packet services and does not transmit the TDM services to the cross-connect unit or
receive the TDM services from the cross-connect unit.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Figure 3-34 Functional block diagram of the IFX2
Backplane
Cross-connect unit
I I
F
p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g
u
n
i
t
L
o
g
i
c
p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g
u
n
i
t
System control and
communication unit
System control and
communication unit
M
U
X
/
D
E
M
U
X
u
n
i
t
MODEM
unit
C
o
m
b
i
n
e
r
i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
u
n
i
t
Power
supply
unit
SMODEM
unit
Clock
unit
Logic
control unit
ODU control
signal
Paired board
Microwave frame
signal
Service bus
Overhead
bus
GE bus
Control bus
-48V2
-48 V power supplied to the ODU
the other units on the board
System clock signal
Ethernet
processin
g unit
+3.3 V
-48 V1
the monitoring circuit
XPIC signal
F

Table 3-69 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX2
Step Functional
Module
Processing Flow
unit
l Transmits the ODU control unit to the system control
and communication unit.
OptiX RTN 910
3-83
Step Functional
Module
Processing Flow
3 IF processing unit l Performs the ADC sampling.
l Filters the signal and splits the signal to two channels.
Performs A/D conversion for one filtered signal and
transmits the converted signal to the MODEM unit.
Outputs the other filtered signal as the XPIC signal.
l Performs A/D conversion for the XPIC signal from the
paired IFX2 and transmits the converted signal to the
MODEM unit.
4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation by using the XPIC IF
signal from the paired IFX2 as a reference signal.
5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects the Hybrid microwave frame header and
events.
alarms.
bus.
SSM bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal, and
processing unit.
l Maps the E1 signals in the Hybrid microwave service
signals to the specific positions in the VC-4s and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.
l Transmits the Ethernet signals in the Hybrid
microwave service signals to the Ethernet processing
unit.
unit
l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/
DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the packet switching
unit.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Step Functional
Module
Processing Flow
7 Logic processing
unit
bandwidth.

NOTE
Table 3-70 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX2
Step Functional
Module
Processing Flow
1 Logic processing
unit
unit
l Receives the GE signal from the packet switching unit.
l Processes the GE signals.
3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal.
l Sets the Hybrid microwave frame overheads.
l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and
microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
l Amplifies the signals.
OptiX RTN 910
3-85
Step Functional
Module
Processing Flow
unit

Power Supply Unit
the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the -48 V power to the
ODU.
the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to
the other units on the IFX2.
Clock Unit
3.7.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF interface, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on
the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-35 Front panel of the IFX2
I
F
X
2
IF
I O
ODU-PWR
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
L
I
N
K
O
D
U
R
M
T
A
C
T
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
I
F
X
2
X-IN X-OUT
PULL X
P
I
C

3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Indicators
Table 3-71 Description of the indicators on the IFX2
XPIC On (green) The XPIC input signal is
normal.
On (red) The XPIC input signal is lost.
Off The XPIC function is
disabled.
normally.
to the board.
service.
configured.
ODU.
an RDI.
OptiX RTN 910
3-87
system.
system.
system.

Interfaces
Table 3-72 Description of the interfaces
Cable
IF IF interface TNC
IF jumper
b
ODU-PWR
a
X-IN XPIC signal input
interface
SMA XPIC cable
X-OUT XPIC signal output
interface
SMA

NOTE
is not required.
Labels
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
3.7.5 Valid Slot
The IFX2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS should be
Figure 3-36 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 5
(PIU)
Slot 1
Slot 3 (IFX2) Slot 4 (IFX2)

20.
Figure 3-37 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 5
(PIU)
Slot 1
Slot 3 (IFX2) Slot 4 (IFX2)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)

Item Description

The power distribution mode supported by the IFX2 can be identified by the board feature code
Table 3-74 Board feature code of the IFX2
A DC-I

OptiX RTN 910
3-89
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.
Related References
This section describes the board performance, including IF performance, modem performance,
XPIC performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
IF Performance
Item Performance
IF signal
board (MHz)
350
board (MHz)
140
Impedance (ohm) 50
ODU O&M signal
Modulation mode ASK
board (MHz)
5.5
board (MHz)
10

3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Item Performance
Encoding mode The LDPC encoding is performed for the Hybrid microwave signals.
Adaptive time-
baseband signals
Supported

XPIC Performance
Table 3-77 XPIC performance
Item Performance
Cross polarization
improvement factor
(XPIF)
19 dB

Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
Weight 0.796 kg

Power Consumption
3.8 EM6T/EM6F
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical interfaces and
two GE interfaces. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as
follows: the GE interfaces on the EM6T always function as electrical interfaces whereas the GE
interfaces on the EM6F use the SFP modules and therefore can function as two optical or
electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces on the EM6F and the EM6T are compatible
with the FE electrical interfaces.
The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91.
OptiX RTN 910
3-91
The EM6T/EM6F accesses, processes, and aggregates four FE signals and two GE signals.
This topic considers the processing of one GE signal on the EM6T as an example to describe
the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.
3.8.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, FE interfaces, and GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T/EM6F.
The GE electrical interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T are compatible with the FE
interfaces. The GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6F use pluggable SFP optical modules.
3.8.5 Valid Slots
The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the
NMS should be the same as the physical slots.
The type of the SFP module equipped on the EM6F can be identified by the board feature code
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F.
This topic describes the board specifications, including the GE interface performance, FE
interface performance, board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.
The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91.
The EM6T/EM6F accesses, processes, and aggregates four FE signals and two GE signals.
Ethernet Service Signal Processing
l The EM6T provides two GE electrical interfaces whereas the EM6F uses the SFP optical
modules to provide two GE optical or electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are
compatible with the FE electrical interfaces.
l Supports the setting and query of the working modes of the Ethernet interfaces. The
supported working modes are as follows:
The FE interfaces support 10M full duplex, 10M half duplex, 100M full duplex, 100M
half duplex, and auto-negotiation.
The GE electrical interfaces support 10M full duplex, 10M half duplex, 100M full
duplex, 100M half duplex, 1000M full duplex, and auto-negotiation.
The GE optical interfaces support 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation.
l Supports the addition, deletion, and switching of IEEE 802.1q/802.1p-compliant VLAN
tags, and forwards packets based on the VLAN tags.
l Supports the setting and query of the tag attributes of the Ethernet interfaces. The following
three TAG attributes are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
l Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with the maximum frame length
ranging from 1518 to 9600 bytes.
l Supports Jumbo frames with the maximum frame length of 9600 bytes.
l Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.
l Supports the link state pass through (LPT) function.
l Supports the link aggregation group (LAG) function.
l Supports the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS).
NOTE
For details on LAG and Link State Pass Through, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System
Layer 2 Switching Processing of Ethernet Services
The Ethernet interface board can realize the following functions when working with the packet
switching board:
l Supports port-based, port+VLAN-based, and port+QinQ E-Line services.
l Supports 802.1d bridge-based, 802.1q bridge-based, and 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN
services.
QoS Service Processing
The Ethernet interface board can realize the following QoS functions when working with the
packet switching board:
l Supports flow classification over Ethernet interfaces based on the port, C-VLAN ID, S-
VLAN ID, priority of the 802.1p packets with C-VLAN or S-VLAN tags, or DSCP in the
IPv6 packets.
l Supports CAR flow monitoring.
l Supports queue scheduling.
Each Ethernet interface supports scheduling of eight levels of priority queues.
Supports the setting of the queue scheduling mode of each Ethernet interface to SP, SP
+WRR, or WRR.
l Supports traffic shaping for a specific port, priority queue, or traffic flow.
Ethernet OAM Processing
The Ethernet interface board can realize the following Ethernet OAM functions when working
with the packet switching board:
l Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.1ag:
Management of OAM maintenance points
Continuity check test
Loopback test
Link trace test
l Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.3ah:
OAM automatic discovery
OptiX RTN 910
3-93
Link performance monitoring
Fault detection
Loopback at the remote end
Self-loop detection and self-loop port blocking
Clock Processing
l Supports synchronous Ethernet.
l Supports receiving and transmitting SSM messages through Ethernet interfaces.
setting the alarm thresholds.
l Supports RMON performance events.
NOTE
For details on the alarm management and performance event management functions, see the OptiX RTN
l Supports the inloop at the PHY layer over Ethernet ports.
l Supports the inloop at the MAC layer over Ethernet ports.
l Supports the mirroring function over Ethernet interfaces.
l Supports the query of the manufacturing information about the SFP module.
This topic considers the processing of one GE signal on the EM6T as an example to describe
the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Figure 3-38 Functional block diagram
GE signal
access unit
FE signal
access unit
Ethernet
processing
unit
Logic
processing
unit
Logic
control unit
Clock unit
Backplane
Control bus of the board
System control and
communication unit
GE signal
FE signal
Ethernet
signal
Ethernet
signal
Control bus
+3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power
supplied to the board
System clock
Control signal
Control signal
Power
supply unit
-48 V1
-48 V2
the board

Table 3-79 Signal processing flow in the receive direction
1 GE signal access unit l Provides access to GE signal.
l Performs reassembling, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for the GE signals.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRC
code processing, and Ethernet performance count for
the frame signals.
OptiX RTN 910
3-95
unit
l Adds the tags identifying the ingress ports to the
Ethernet data frames.
l Processes the VLAN tags in the Ethernet data frames.
l Performs the QoS processing, such as traffic
classification and CAR traffic monitoring, for the
Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards the Ethernet data frames to the logic
processing unit.
3 Logic processing
unit
Transmits the Ethernet data frames to the packet
switching unit.

Table 3-80 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction
1 Logic processing unit l Selects the Ethernet data frames from the packet
switching unit.
l Transmits the Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet
processing unit.
unit
l Processes the VLAN tags in the Ethernet data frames.
l Performs the QoS processing, such as traffic shaping
and queue scheduling, for the Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards the Ethernet data frames to the
corresponding egress ports based on the egress tags
contained in the Ethernet data frames.
3 GE signal access unit l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC
code computing, and Ethernet performance count.
l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for the
Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated FE/
GE signals through the Ethernet interfaces.

The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access by using the control signal.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit and logic processing unit through
the control unit on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the system control and communication unit through
the system control bus. The configuration data and query commands from the system control
and communication unit are issued to the various units of the board through the logic control
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
unit. The command response reported by each unit on the board, and the alarms and performance
events are reported to the system control and communication unit through the logic control unit.
Power Supply Unit
This unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power into
the +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
The power supply unit receives a +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as
a +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
3.8.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, FE interfaces, and GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T/EM6F.
The GE electrical interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T are compatible with the FE
interfaces. The GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6F use pluggable SFP optical modules.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-39 Front panel of the EM6T
E
M
6
T
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4
GE2
E
M
6
T
GE1
P
R
O
G

Figure 3-40 Front panel of the EM6F
E
M
6
F
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
GE2
E
M
6
F
GE1
L
I
N
K
1
L
I
N
K
2
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4
P
R
O
G

Indicators
Table 3-81 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F
OptiX RTN 910
3-97
l There is no power supplied to the board.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the
system.
On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.
PROG On for 100 ms (green) and off
being reset, the software is being loaded to
the flash memory.
On for 300 ms (green) and off
being reset, the board software is in BIOS
boot state.
On (green) The upper layer software is being initialized.
On for 100 ms (red) and off for
100 ms repeatedly
fails.
On (red) When the board is being powered on or
being reset, the memory self-check fails or
loading the upper layer software fails.
When the board is running, the logic file or
upper layer software is lost.
LINK1
a
On (green) The GE1 interface is connected correctly
and is not receiving or transmitting data.
Blinking (yellow) The GE1 interface is receiving or
transmitting data.
Off The GE1 interface is not connected or is
connected incorrectly.
LINK2
a
Flashing (green) The GE2 interface is receiving or
transmitting data.

3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE optical interfaces.
Interfaces
Table 3-82 Description of the interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F
Inte
rfac
e
Description Connector Type Corresponding Cable
FE1 FE interface
RJ-45 5.8 Network Cable
FE2
FE3
FE4
GE1 GE electrical
interface
GE2
GE1 GE optical
interface (EM6F)
LC (SFP optical module) 5.5 Fiber Jumper
GE2

The FE electrical interfaces and GE electrical interfaces support the MDI and MDI-X adaptation
modes. For the front view and pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector, see Figure 3-41 and refer
to Table 3-83 and Table 3-84.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table 3-83 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode
(+)
OptiX RTN 910
3-99
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
(+)
(-)

Table 3-84 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode
(+)
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
(+)
(-)

3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. For meaning of the indicators, see Table 3-85.
Off The link fails.
receiving data.
receiving data.

Label
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel.
The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS
1. That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than 10 dBm
(10 mW).
3.8.5 Valid Slots
The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the
NMS should be the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-42 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 5
(PIU)
Slot 1
Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F)

Figure 3-43 Logical slots for the logical boards of the EM6T/EM6F
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 5
(PIU)
Slot 1
Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot10 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9

Table 3-86 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F
Item Description

OptiX RTN 910
3-101
The type of the SFP module equipped on the EM6F can be identified by the board feature code
Table 3-87 Board feature code of the EM6F
Board Feature Code Module Type BOM Code of the Module
01 1000BASE-SX (Multi-
mode, 0.5 km)
34060286
02 1000BASE-LX (Single-
mode, 10 km)
34060473
03 10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
(100m)
34100052

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F.
Related References
A.14.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes
A.14.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control
A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the board specifications, including the GE interface performance, FE
interface performance, board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.
Performance of Optical Interfaces
The optical interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F meet the requirements specified in IEEE 802.3. The
following table lists the main specifications for the optical interfaces.
Table 3-88 Performance of the GE optical interface
Item Performance
Classification code 1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX
Fiber type Multiple-mode optical
fiber
Single-mode optical
fiber
Transmission distance (km) 0.5 10
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Item Performance
Operating wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355
Mean launched power (dBm) -9.5 to 0 -9 to -3
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) -17 -19
Minimum overload (dBm) 0 -3
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 9 9

NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing GE optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Performance of GE Electrical Interfaces
The GE electrical interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F meet the requirements specified in IEEE 802.3.
The following table lists the main specifications for the GE electrical interfaces.
Table 3-89 GE electric interface performance
Item Performance
100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)
4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)

Performance of FE Electrical Interfaces
The FE electrical interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F meet the requirements specified in IEEE 802.3.
The following table lists the main specifications for the FE electrical interfaces.
Table 3-90 FE electric interface performance
Item Performance
100 (100BASE-TX)
OptiX RTN 910
3-103
Item Performance

Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
EM6T EM6F
Dimensions 19.82mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width)
Weight 0.370 kg 0.382 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of EM6T: < 12 W
Power consumption of EM6F: < 12 W
3.9 SL1D
The SL1D is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board.
The functional version of the SL1D is SL91.
The SL1D transmits and receives 2xSTM-1 optical signals.
This topic considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the SL1D.
3.9.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, STM-1 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.
3.9.5 Valid Slots
The SL1D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS should be
The type of the SFP optical module equipped on the SL1D can be identified by the board feature
name.
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
This topic describes the board specifications, including STM-1 optical interface performance,
The functional version of the SL1D is SL91.
The SL1D transmits and receives 2xSTM-1 optical signals.
Specifications for Optical Interfaces
l Provides Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2 optical interfaces.
l All the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.957.
Specifications for Optical Modules
l Adopts the SFP optical module to facilitate the later maintenance of the optical module.
l Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
l Supports the enabling and disabling of the laser.
l Supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
NOTE
The ALS function is described as follows:
1. After detecting that the R_LOS alarm persists over the receive port for 500 ms, the optical module
automatically shuts down the laser of the transmit port.
2. The laser changes to emit alternative laser pulses. The laser pulses are emitted for 2s after a 60s
interval.
3. After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser is recovered to normal and emits light continuously.
Overhead Processing
l Processes the regenerator section overheads in STM-1 signals.
l Processes the multiplex section overheads in STM-1 signals.
l Processes the higher order path overheads in STM-1 signals.
l Supports the setting and query of the J0/J1/C2 byte.
NOTE
Higher order path overheads are processed in two modes, namely, the pass-through mode and termination
mode. In the pass-through mode, the path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the
overhead values are not changed. In the termination mode, when the path overheads are detected in the
receive direction, the overhead bytes are re-set to the default values in the transmit direction. By default,
the board adopts the pass-through mode.
Pointer Processing
Processes AU pointers.
OptiX RTN 910
3-105
in an SNCP group.
in a linear MSP group.
l Supports the setting of SNCP switching conditions.
l Supports the setting of linear MSP switching conditions.
NOTE
For details on SNCP and linear MSP, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Feature
Description.
NOTE
NOTE
A warm reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control and communication unit but
does not affect the services. A cold reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control
and communication unit, the initiation of the board (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded), and
service interruption.
This topic considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the SL1D.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Figure 3-44 Functional block diagram of the SL1D
Backplane
Logic
control
unit
STM-1
STM-1
O
/
E
c
o
n
v
e
r
s
i
o
n
u
n
i
t
O
v
e
r
h
e
a
d
p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g
u
n
i
t
L
o
g
i
c
p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g
u
n
i
t
System control and
communication unit
Overhead
bus
System control and
communication unit
Cross-connect unit
Clock
unit
System clock signal
+3.3 V
Service
bus
Control bus
Supplies power to the

Table 3-92 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1D
1 O/E conversion unit l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals.
l Detects the R_LOS alarm.
l Converts the STM-1 optical signals into electrical
signals.
OptiX RTN 910
3-107
2 Overhead processing
unit
l Restores the clock signal.
l Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS and
R_LOF alarms.
l Performs descrambling.
l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the
l Checks bits 6-8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte, and
events.
l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and
reports it to the system control and communication
unit.
including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and K
bytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to the
logic processing unit.
l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates the
corresponding performance events.
l Checks the higher order path overheads and generates
the corresponding alarms and performance events.
l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4
3 Logic processing
unit
bandwidth.

Table 3-93 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1D
1 Logic processing
unit
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
2 Overhead processing
unit
l Sets the higher order path overheads.
l Sets the AU pointer.
l Sets the multiplex section overheads.
l Sets the regenerator section overheads.
l Performs scrambling.
3 O/E conversion unit l Converts the electrical signals into optical signals.

The SL1D is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the SL1D
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit and loads the FPGA software.
Clock Unit
3.9.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, STM-1 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-45 Front panel of the SL1D
S
L
1
D
TX1/RX1
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
S
L
1
D
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
L
O
S
1
L
O
S
2
TX2/RX2

Indicators
Table 3-94 Description of the indicators on the SL1D
normally.
OptiX RTN 910
3-109
to the board.
service.
configured.
LOS1 On (red) The first optical interface of
the SL1D reports the R_LOS
alarm.
Off The first optical interface of
the SL1D does not report the
R_LOS alarm.
LOS2 On (red) The second optical interface
of the SL1D reports the
R_LOS alarm.
Off The second optical interface
of the SL1D does not report
the R_LOS alarm.

Interfaces
Table 3-95 Description of the interfaces
Cable
TX1 Transmit port of the
first STM-1 optical
interface
LC (SFP) Fiber jumper
RX1 Receive port of the
first STM-1 optical
interface
TX2 Transmit port of the
second STM-1
optical interface
LC (SFP)
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Cable
RX2 Receive port of the
second STM-1
optical interface

Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel.
The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS
1. That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than 10 dBm
(10 mW).
3.9.5 Valid Slots
The SL1D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS should be
Figure 3-46 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 5
(PIU)
Slot 1
Slot 3 (SL1D) Slot 4 (SL1D)

Figure 3-47 Logical slots for the logical boards of the SL1D
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 5
(PIU)
Slot 1
Slot 3 (SL1D) Slot 4 (SL1D)

Table 3-96 Slot allocation for the SL1D
Item Description

The type of the SFP optical module equipped on the SL1D can be identified by the board feature
name.
OptiX RTN 910
3-111
Table 3-97 Board feature code of the SL1D
Feature Code Type of Optical Module Part Number of the
Optical Module
01 Ie-1 (Multi-mode, 2km) 34060287
02 S-1.1 (Single-mode, 15km) 34060276
03 L-1.1 (Single-mode, 40km) 34060281
04 L-1.2 (Single-mode, 80km) 34060282

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D.
Related References
A.14.10 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces
A.15.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead
This topic describes the board specifications, including STM-1 optical interface performance,
Item Performance
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
(km)
2 15 40 80
(nm)
1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
Mean launched power
(dBm)
-19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Item Performance
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-30 -28 -34 -34
(dB)
10 8.2 10 10

NOTE
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
(width)
Weight 0.296 kg

Power Consumption
3.10 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.
The functional version of the SP3S/SP3D is SL91.
The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
This topic considers the processing of one E1 signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
3.10.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and E1 interfaces on the front panel.
3.10.5 Valid Slots
The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS
should be the same as the physical slots.
OptiX RTN 910
3-113
The E1 interface impedance of the SP3S/SP3D can be identified by the board feature code of
the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.
This topic describes the board specifications, including the E1 interface performance, board
mechanical behavior and board power consumption.
The functional version of the SP3S/SP3D is SL91.
The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Overhead and Pointer Processing
l Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-12 level.
l Supports the query of the J2 and V5 bytes.
l Supports the setting of the J2 and V5 bytes.
Clock Processing
l Supports the E1 retiming function.
l Supports the first and fifth E1 signals to be extracted as the tributary clock source.
NOTE
l Supports the inloop and outloop over the E1 tributary interfaces.
l Supports the PRBS 15 test.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
NOTE
Guide.
l A warm reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control and communication unit but
does not affect the services. A cold reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control
and communication unit, the initiation of the board (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded), and
a service interruption.
This topic considers the processing of one E1 signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
Figure 3-48 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D
Backplane
Logic
control
unit
Cross-connect unit
E1
E1
I
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e

u
n
i
t
M
a
p
p
i
n
g
/
D
e
m
a
p
p
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
System control and
communication unit
Service bus
Control bus
E1 signal
C
o
d
e
c

u
n
i
t
L
o
g
i
c

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
+3.3 V
Clock
unit
System clock signal
Power
Supply Unit
-48 V1
+3.3V power supplied
to the board
-48 V2
+3.3V backup power
supplied to the board

OptiX RTN 910
3-115
Table 3-100 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D
1 Interface unit The external E1 signals are coupled by the transformer
and then are transmitted to the board.
2 Codec unit l Equalizes the received signals.
l Recovers the clock signal.
l Detects the T_ALOS alarm.
l Performs the HDB3 decoding.
3 Mapping/
Demapping unit
l Asynchronously maps the signals into C-12s.
l Adds the path overhead bytes to the C-12s, thus
forming VC-12s.
l Processes the pointers, thus forming TU-12s.
l Performs the byte interleaving for three TU-12s, thus
forming one TUG-2.
l Performs the byte interleaving for seven TU-2s, thus
forming one TUG-3.
l Performs the byte interleaving for three TU-3s, thus
forming one C-4.
l Adds the higher order path overhead bytes to the C-4,
thus forming one VC-4.
4 Logic processing
unit

Table 3-101 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D
1 Logic processing
unit
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
2 Mapping/
Demapping unit
l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.
l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.
l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.
l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects the
l Extracts the E1 signals.
3 Codec unit Performs the HDB3 coding.
4 Interface unit The E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and then
are transmitted to the external cable.

The SP3S/SP3D is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication
unit. The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the
SP3S/SP3D through the control bus. The command responses, alarms, and performance events
are also reported to the CPU unit through the control bus.
Power Supply Unit
This unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power into
the +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
The power supply unit receives a +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as
a +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
3.10.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and E1 interfaces on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-49 Front panel of the SP3S
S
P
3
S
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
1-16
S
P
3
S
E1

OptiX RTN 910
3-117
Figure 3-50 Front panel of the SP3D
S
P
3
D
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
42
22
21
1
S
P
3
D

Indicator
Table 3-102 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D
normally.
to the board.
service.
configured.

Interface
Table 3-103 Description of the interface on the SP3S
Interface Description Connector
Type
Corresponding Cable
1-22 The first to sixteenth
E1 interfaces
Anea 96 E1 Cable to the External
Equipment or E1 Cable to the
E1 Panel

NOTE
In the case of the OptiX RTN 910, only the ports 1-16 and 22-37 of the SP3D interface are used. Ports 1-16
correspond to E1 signals 1-16 and ports 22-37 correspond to E1 signals 17-32.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
The interfaces on the SP3S/SP3D use the Anea 96 connectors. The pin assignment information
of the Anea 96 interfaces is provided in Figure 3-51 and Table 3-104.
POS.96
POS.1

signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
OptiX RTN 910
3-119
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)

3.10.5 Valid Slots
The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS
should be the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-52 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU 910 chassis
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 5
(PIU)
Slot 1
Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)

Figure 3-53 Logical slots for the logical boards of the 910
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 5
(PIU)
Slot 1
Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)

Table 3-105 Slot configuration for the SP3S/SP3D
Item Description

The E1 interface impedance of the SP3S/SP3D can be identified by the board feature code of
the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.
Table 3-106 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D
A 120
B 75

OptiX RTN 910
3-121
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.
Related References
A.14.12 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces
This topic describes the board specifications, including the E1 interface performance, board
mechanical behavior and board power consumption.
Item Performance
Code pattern HDB3
Wire pair in each

Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
SP3S SP3D
Weight 0.544 kg 0.644 kg

Power consumption
Power consumption of the SP3S: < 5 W
Power consumption of the SP3D: < 10 W
3.11 PIU
The PIU is the power supply board and can access two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
The functional version of the PIU is TNC1.
The PIU supports the functions and features such as power access, power protection, lightning
protection, and information reporting.
The PIU mainly consists of the lightning protection and failure detection unit, communication
unit, and board in-position unit.
3.11.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and power access interfaces.
3.11.5 Valid Slots
The PIU can be inserted in Slot 5. The logical slot of the PIU on the NMS should be the same
as the physical slot.
This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions and input voltage.
The functional version of the PIU is TNC1.
The PIU supports the functions and features such as power access, power protection, lightning
protection, and information reporting.
l Power access
The PIU accesses two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies for the equipment. The
maximum power and maximum current of each power supply are 170 W and 5 A
respectively.
l Power protection
The PIU protects the DC power supplies against overcurrent and short circuits. In this
manner, the board and board components are prevented from being blown out in the case
of overcurrent.
l Lightning protection
The PIU protects the equipment against lightning and reports an alarm if the protection
fails.
l Power backup
The two DC power supplies provide 1+1 hot backup for each other.
The PIU mainly consists of the lightning protection and failure detection unit, communication
unit, and board in-position unit.
Figure 3-54 shows the functional block diagram of the PIU.
OptiX RTN 910
3-123
Figure 3-54 Functional block diagram of the PIU
Communication
unit
Board
in-position unit
Backplane
Inter-board
communication
bus System control and
communication unit
Lightning protection
and failure detection
unit
-48 V/-60 V
Board in-
position signal
Alarm signal indicating
lightning failure
Other boards
Other boards
Alarm signal
indicating lightning
failure
System control and
communication unit
Lightning protection
and failure detection
unit
-48 V/-60 V

Lightning Protection and Failure Detection Unit
This unit protects the equipment against lightning and detects the failure of the lightning
protective circuit. If the lightning protection fails, the PIU reports the alarm signals to system
control and communication unit, through the communication unit.
Communication Unit
This unit reports the board manufacturing information, PCB version information, and alarm
signals indicating the lightning protection failure to the system control and communication unit.
Board In-Position Unit
This unit reports the board in-position signals to the system control and communication unit.
3.11.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and power access interfaces.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-55 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.
Figure 3-55 Front panel of the PIU
P
W
R
A
P
W
R
B
PIU
R
T
N
2
(
+
)
N
E
G
2
(
-
)
R
T
N
1
(
+
)
N
E
G
1
(
-
)
-48V -60V
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)

Indicators
Table 3-109 Description of the power status indicators
Indicator Status Description
PWRA On (green) The power supply is connected.
Off There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power
supply is connected incorrectly.
PWRB On (green) The power supply is connected.

Interfaces
The PIU accesses two power supplies. Table 3-110 lists the types of the interfaces on the PIU
and their respective usage.
Table 3-110 Description of the interfaces on the PIU
Interface Interface Type Usage
NEG1(-) -48 V power input
interface
Inputs the -48 V power.
RTN1(+) BGND power input
interface
Inputs the BGND power.
NEG2(-) -48 V power input
interface
Inputs the -48 V power.
RTN2(+) BGND power input
interface
Inputs the BGND power.

Label
The label on the front panel indicates that the PIU accesses multiple power supplies.
CAUTION
Multiple power supplies are accessed for the equipment. When powering off the equipment,
ensure that these power supplies are disabled.
OptiX RTN 910
3-125
3.11.5 Valid Slots
The PIU can be inserted in Slot 5. The logical slot of the PIU on the NMS should be the same
as the physical slot.
Figure 3-56 Slot for the PIU in the IDU chassis
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 5
(PIU)
Slot 1
Slot 3 Slot 4

Figure 3-57 Logical slot for the logical board of the PIU
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 5
(PIU)
Slot 1
Slot 3 Slot 4

This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions and input voltage.
Table 3-111 lists the technical specifications for the PIU.
Table 3-111 Technical specifications
Item Performance
Dimensions 41.4 mm (width) x 224.8 mm (depth) x 21.0
mm height)
Weight 0.018 kg
Power Consumption < 0.5 W
Input voltage -38.4 V to -72.0 V

3.12 FAN
The FAN is the fan board that dissipates the heat from the chassis through wind cooling.
The functional version of the FAN is TNC1.
The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.
The FAN mainly consists of the start-delay unit, communication unit, intelligent fan speed
adjustment unit, and board in-position unit.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
3.12.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.
3.12.5 Valid Slots
The FAN is inserted in slot 6 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS should
be the same as the physical slot.
This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions, weight, power
consumption, and working voltage.
The functional version of the FAN is TNC1.
The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.
The FAN has the following functions and features:
l Accesses one +12 V power supply for driving the three fans each of which consumes 6 W
power.
l Provides start-delay for the power supply of the fans and protects fans against
overcurrent.
l Intelligently adjusts the rotating speed of fans to ensure proper heat dissipation of the system
with lowest power consumption and lowest noise.
l Reports the fan rotating speed, alarms, version number, and board in-position information.
l Provides alarm indicators.
l Disables the power supplies to the fans.
The FAN mainly consists of the start-delay unit, communication unit, intelligent fan speed
adjustment unit, and board in-position unit.
Figure 3-58 shows the functional block diagram of the FAN.
OptiX RTN 910
3-127
Figure 3-58 Functional block diagram of the FAN
System control and
communication unit
Three fans
+12 V power
shutdown signal
Inter-board
communication
bus
Board in-position
unit
PWM signal
Communication unit
System control and
communication unit
Fan rotating
speed
Fan in-position
signal
+12 V
+12 V
+12 V
Start
delay
+12 V
Intelligent fan speed
adjustment unit
PWM driving
unit
Rotating speed
reporting unit
System control and
communication unit
System control and
communication unit
System control and
communication unit

Start-Delay Unit
This unit protects the fan power supplies against start delay and overcurrent.
Communication Unit
This unit reports the board manufacturing information, PCB version information, and ambient
temperature information to the system control and communication unit. In addition, it provides
the +12 V power shutdown signal to the start-delay unit.
Intelligent Fan Speed Adjustment Unit
This unit reports the fan rotating speed to the system control and communication unit and adjusts
the fan rotating speed based on the three pulse-width modulation (PWM) signals that are received
from the system control and communication unit. The PWM signals of the fans are isolated from
each other.
The system adjusts the fan rotating speed according to the working temperature, as listed in
Table 3-112.
Table 3-112 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed
Working Temperature Rotating Speed
25 Low speed (3200 rotation/min)
25 to 60 Linear increase in accordance with the
temperature
60 Full speed (16000 rotation/min)

3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Board In-Position Unit
This unit reports the board in-position information to the system control and communication
unit.
3.12.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-59 shows the front panel of the FAN.
Figure 3-59 Front panel of the FAN

Indicators
Table 3-113 Description of the fan status indicators
FAN On (green) The fan is running normally.
On (red) The fan is faulty.
Off The fan is not powered on or is not installed.

ESD Wrist Strap Jack
The ESD wrist strap needs to be connected to the ESD wrist strap jack to realize the proper
grounding of the human body.
Labels
The front panel of the FAN has the following labels:
l ESD protection label: indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive.
l Fan warning label: warns you not to touch the fan leaves when the fan is rotating.
OptiX RTN 910
3-129
3.12.5 Valid Slots
The FAN is inserted in slot 6 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS should
be the same as the physical slot.
Figure 3-60 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 5
(PIU)
Slot 3 Slot 4
Slot 10

Figure 3-61 Logical slot for the logical board of the FAN
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 5
(PIU)
Slot 1
Slot 3 Slot 4

This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions, weight, power
consumption, and working voltage.
Table 3-114 lists the technical specifications for the FAN.
Table 3-114 Technical specifications for the FAN
Item Performance
Dimensions 42.0 mm (width) x 217.6 mm (depth) x 28.5 mm height)
Weight 0.200 kg
Power consumption <2.3 W (room temprature)
<17 W (high temperature)
Working voltage 10.8 V-13.2 V (for accessing the 12 V DC power)

3 Boards
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
4 Accessories
About This Chapter
The accessories of the OptiX RTN 910 include the E1 panel and the power distribution unit
(PDU). You need to select the accessories based on the actual requirements.
4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, you can install an E1 panel in the cabinet. The
E1 panel can function as the DDF of the IDU.
4.2 PDU
The PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the input
power to the equipment in the cabinet.
OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description 4 Accessories
4-1
4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, you can install an E1 panel in the cabinet. The
E1 panel can function as the DDF of the IDU.
The dimensions of the E1 panel are 483 mm x 33 mm x 42 mm (width x depth x height). An E1
panel provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16
1-8
9-16

Interfaces
Table 4-1 Interface description of an E1 panel
Interface Description Type of Connector
T1-T16 Transmit port of the 1st to
16th E1 ports (connected to
the external equipment)
BNC
R1-R16 Receive port of the 1st to 16th
E1 ports (connected to the
external equipment)
1-8 1st to 8th E1 ports (connected
to an IDU)
DB37
9-16 9th to 16th E1 ports
(connected to an IDU)
Grounding bolt Connecting a protection
ground cable
-

NOTE
The interface impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.
For the pin assignments of the E1 port that is connected to an IDU, see Figure 4-2 and refer to
Table 4-2.
4 Accessories
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)
Pos. 1
Pos. 37

Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)
20 1st E1 receiving differential
signal (+)
21 1st E1 transmitting differential
signal (+)
2 1st E1 receiving differential
signal (-)
3 1st E1 transmitting differential
signal (-)
22 2nd E1 receiving differential
signal (+)
23 2nd E1 transmitting differential
signal (+)
4 2nd E1 receiving differential
signal (-)
signal (-)
24 3rd E1 receiving differential
signal (+)
25 3rd E1 transmitting differential
signal (+)
6 3rd E1 receiving differential
signal (-)
signal (-)
26 4th E1 receiving differential
signal (+)
27 4th E1 transmitting differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (-)
OptiX RTN 910
4-3
signal (+)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (-)
Others Reserved - -

4.2 PDU
The PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the input
power to the equipment in the cabinet.
4.2.1 Front Panel
There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches
on the front panel of the PDU.
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle
The PDU realizes the simple power distribution function. The PDU distributes the input power
to the equipment in a cabinet.
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode
The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes. By default, the DC-C power
distribution mode is used.
4.2.1 Front Panel
There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches
on the front panel of the PDU.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 4-3 Front panel of the PDU
NEG2(-)
INPUT
RTN2(+) RTN1(+) NEG1(-)
3
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4
1 4
1 2 3 4
OUTPUT OUTPUT
A
B
2
20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A
5 6
1. Output power terminals (A) 2. PGND terminals
4 Accessories
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
3. Input power terminals 4. Output power terminals (B)
5. Power switches (A) 6. Power switches (B)

Interfaces
Table 4-3 Interfaces on the PDU
Position Interface Description
Output power
terminals (A)
+ Power output (+)
- Power output (-)
PGND
terminals
Grounding stud
of the two-hole
OT terminal
For connecting the PGND cable
Input power
terminals
RTN1(+) The first power input (+)
RTN2(+) The second power input (+)
NEG1(-) The first power input (-)
NEG2(-) The second power input (-)
Output power
terminals (B)
+ Power output (+)
- Power output (-)
Power
switches (A)
20 A They are switches for the power outputs. The fuse
capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the right
correspond to output power terminals 1-4 on the A side,
respectively.
Power
switches (B)
20 A They are switches for the power outputs. The fuse
capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the right
correspond to output power terminals 1-4 on the B side,
respectively.

4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle
The PDU realizes the simple power distribution function. The PDU distributes the input power
to the equipment in a cabinet.
Functions
l The PDU supports two inputs of -48 V/-60 V DC power.
l Each input power supply supports four outputs.
l The fuse capacity of the switch of each power output is 20 A.
l The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes.
OptiX RTN 910
4-5
Working Principle
The PDU mainly consists of input terminals, output terminals, and miniature circuit breakers
(MCBs). The PDU supports the simple power distribution function for the input power.
Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW1
SW2
SW4
SW4
INPUT
RTN1(+)
RTN2(+)
NEG1(-)
NEG2(-)
+
1
-
+
2
-
+
3
-
+
4
-
+
1
-
+
2
-
+
3
-
+
4
-
OUTPUT A
OUTPUT B
PGND
BGND
BGND

4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode
The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes. By default, the DC-C power
distribution mode is used.
The power distribution mode of the PDU is controlled by the short-circuiting copper bar that is
inside the PDU.
DC-C Power Distribution Mode
When the DC-C power distribution mode is used, the short-circuiting copper bar short-circuits
terminal RTN1(+), terminal RTN2(+), and the PGND.
4 Accessories
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Figure 4-5 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-C mode

DC-I Power Distribution Mode
To use the DC-I power distribution mode, remove the short-circuiting copper bar.
Figure 4-6 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-I mode

OptiX RTN 910
4-7
5 Cables
About This Chapter
This topic describes the purpose, appearance, and pin assignment information of various cables
of the IDU 910.
5.1 Power Cable
The power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to the power supply device (for example,
the PDU on top of the cabinet), thus conducting the -48 V power to the IDU.
5.2 PGND Cable
The PGND cable is available in two types, namely, the IDU PGND cable and E1 panel PGND
cable.
5.3 IF Jumper
The IF jumper connects the IDU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used with the IF cable to transmit
the IF signal, O&M signal, and -48 V power between the ODU and the IDU.
5.4 XPIC Cable
The XPIC cable is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX2 boards of the
XPIC working group to realize the XPIC function.
5.5 Fiber Jumper
The fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper is terminated with an
LC/PC connector and is connected to the SDH optical interface or GE optical interface on the
OptiX RTN 910. The connector with which the other end of the fiber jumper is terminated
depends on the type of the optical interface on the equipment to be connected.
5.6 E1 Cables
The E1 cable is available in two types, namely, the E1 cable (Anea 96) to the external equipment
and E1 cable to the E1 panel.
5.7 Orderwire Cable
The orderwire cable connects the orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with RJ-11 connectors. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the
PHONE interface on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected
to the interface of the orderwire phone.
5.8 Network Cable
OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables
5-1
The network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable
are terminated with RJ-45 connectors.
5 Cables
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
5.1 Power Cable
The power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to the power supply device (for example,
the PDU on top of the cabinet), thus conducting the -48 V power to the IDU.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-1 Power cable
1U DC connector
Single cord end terminal
Power cable

Table 5-1 Specifications of the power cable
Model Cable Terminal
2.5 mm
2
power
cable and
terminal
Power Cable, 450 V/
750 V, H07Z-K-2.5
mm
2
, Blue/Black,
Low Smoke Zero
Halogen Cable
Common Terminal, Single Cord End Terminal,
Conductor Cross Section 2.5 mm
2
, 12.5 A,
Insertion Depth 8 mm, Black

NOTE
In the case of the OptiX RTN 910, the power cable whose core has a sectional area of 2.5 mm
2
can extend for
a maximum distance of 50 m.
5.2 PGND Cable
The PGND cable is available in two types, namely, the IDU PGND cable and E1 panel PGND
cable.
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable
The IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of the
external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and the
external equipment share the same ground.
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable
OptiX RTN 910
5-3
The E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of
the external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and
the external equipment share the same ground.
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable
The IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of the
external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and the
external equipment share the same ground.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable
2
Main label
H.S.tube Cable tie 1
L
1. Bare crimping terminal, OT 2. Bare crimping terminal, OT

Pin Assignment
None.
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable
The E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of
the external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and
the external equipment share the same ground.
5 Cables
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable
1
Main label
L
Bare crimping terminal, OT

Pin Assignment
None.
5.3 IF Jumper
The IF jumper connects the IDU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used with the IF cable to transmit
the IF signal, O&M signal, and -48 V power between the ODU and the IDU.
The IF jumper is a 2 m RG-223 cable. One end of the IF jumper is terminated with a type-N
connector and is connected to the IF cable. The other end of the IF jumper is terminated with a
TNC connector and is connected to the IF board.
NOTE
l The 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board. Thus, when the 5D IF cable is used, the IF jumper
is not required.
l When the RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable is used, an IF jumper is required to connect the RG-8U or 1/2-
inch IF cable to the IF board.
OptiX RTN 910
5-5
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-4 IF jumper
1
2
H.S.tube 2 PCS
L = 3 cm
2000 mm
1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male 2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female

Pin Assignment
None.
5.4 XPIC Cable
The XPIC cable is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX2 boards of the
XPIC working group to realize the XPIC function.
The XPIC cable is an RG316 cable with SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPIC
cable is connected to the X-IN port of one IFX2 board of an XPIC working group, and the other
end of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-OUT port of the other IFX2 board of the same XPIC
working group.
When the XPIC function of an IFX2 board is disabled, use an XPIC cable to connect the X-IN
port and X-OUT port of the IFX2 board to loop back signals.
The XPIC cable is available in the following two types:
l XPIC cable using angle connectors: The XPIC cable using angle connectors is very long,
and is used to connect the two IFX2 boards in the horizontal direction.
l XPIC cable using straight connectors: The XPIC cable using straight connectors is very
short, and is used to connect the two IFX2 boards in the vertical direction. The XPIC cable
using straight connectors is also used to connect the X-IN port and X-OUT port of the same
IFX2 board to loop back signals.
The OptiX RTN 910 uses the XPIC cables with angle connectors.
5 Cables
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable
L1
1
1
1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male

Cable Connection Table
None.
5.5 Fiber Jumper
The fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper is terminated with an
LC/PC connector and is connected to the SDH optical interface or GE optical interface on the
OptiX RTN 910. The connector with which the other end of the fiber jumper is terminated
depends on the type of the optical interface on the equipment to be connected.
Types of Fiber Jumpers
Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers
Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable
LC/PC FC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber
2 mm multi-mode fiber
LC/PC SC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber
LC/PC LC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber

NOTE
In the case of the OptiX RTN 910, multi-mode fibers are required to connect to the 1000Base-SX GE optical
interfaces.
OptiX RTN 910
5-7
Fiber Connectors
The following figures show three common types of fiber connectors, namely, LC/PC connector,
SC/PC connector, and FC/PC connector.
Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector

Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector

5 Cables
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector

5.6 E1 Cables
The E1 cable is available in two types, namely, the E1 cable (Anea 96) to the external equipment
and E1 cable to the E1 panel.
5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment
The E1 cable to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to input or output E1 signals
directly to the external equipment.
5.6.2 E1 Cable to the E1 Panel
The E1 cable to the E1 panel is used together with the E1 transit cable to connect the IDU to the
E1 panel when the E1 panel functions as the DDF. One end of the E1 cable is terminated with
a DB44 connector and is connected to the E1 transit cable. The other end of the E1 cable is
terminated with a DB37 connector and is connected to the E1 panel.
5.6.3 E1 Transit Cable
An E1 transit cable is used to connect an E1 interface on the IDU. One end of the E1 transit
cable is terminated with an Anea 96 connector and is connected to the E1 interface on the IDU.
The other end of the E1 transit cable is terminated with a DB44 connector and is connected to
the E1 cable on the external equipment or to the E1 cable on the E1 panel.
5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment
The E1 cable to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to input or output E1 signals
directly to the external equipment.
Each E1 cable to the external equipment can transmit a maximum of 16 E1 signals. The E1
cables to the external equipment are categorized into two types, namely, 75-ohm coaxial cables
and 120-ohm twisted pair cables.
OptiX RTN 910
5-9
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-9 E1 cable
Main Label
1
W
X1
A
1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female
NOTE
The appearance of the 120-ohm E1 cable is the same as the appearance of the 75-ohm E1 cable.

Pin Assignment
Table 5-3 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 cable
Pin W1 Remark
s
Pin W2 Remark
s
Core Serial
No.
Color of
the
Core
Relatio
n
1 Tip 1 R1 25 Tip 2 T1
2 Ring 26 Ring
3 Tip 3 R2 27 Tip 4 T2
4 Ring 28 Ring
5 Tip 5 R3 29 Tip 6 T3
6 Ring 30 Ring
7 Tip 7 R4 31 Tip 8 T4
8 Ring 32 Ring
9 Tip 9 R5 33 Tip 10 T5
10 Ring 34 Ring
5 Cables
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Pin W1 Remark
s
Pin W2 Remark
s
Core Serial
No.
Color of
the
Core
Relatio
n
11 Tip 11 R6 35 Tip 12 T6
12 Ring 36 Ring
13 Tip 13 R7 37 Tip 14 T7
14 Ring 38 Ring
15 Tip 15 R8 39 Tip 16 T8
16 Ring 40 Ring
17 Ring 17 R9 41 Ring 18 T9
18 Tip 42 Tip
19 Ring 19 R10 43 Ring 20 T10
20 Tip 44 Tip
21 Ring 21 R11 45 Ring 22 T11
22 Tip 46 Tip
23 Ring 23 R12 47 Ring 24 T12
24 Tip 48 Tip
49 Ring 25 R13 73 Ring 26 T13
50 Tip 74 Tip
51 Ring 27 R14 75 Ring 28 T14
52 Tip 76 Tip
53 Ring 29 R15 77 Ring 30 T15
54 Tip 78 Tip
55 Ring 31 R16 79 Ring 32 T16
56 Tip 80 Tip
Shell Braid Shell Braid

OptiX RTN 910
5-11
Table 5-4 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable
Pin W1 Remark
s
Pin W2 Remark
s
Color of
the
Core
Relatio
n
Color of
the
Core
Relatio
n
1 White Twisted
pair
R1 25 White Twisted
pair
T1
2 Blue 26 Orange
3 White Twisted
pair
R2 27 White Twisted
pair
T2
4 Green 28 Brown
5 White Twisted
pair
R3 29 Red Twisted
pair
T3
6 Grey 30 Blue
7 Red Twisted
pair
R4 31 Red Twisted
pair
T4
8 Orange 32 Green
9 Red Twisted
pair
R5 33 Red Twisted
pair
T5
10 Brown 34 Grey
11 Black Twisted
pair
R6 35 Black Twisted
pair
T6
12 Blue 36 Orange
13 Black Twisted
pair
R7 37 Black Twisted
pair
T7
14 Green 38 Brown
15 Black Twisted
pair
R8 39 Yellow Twisted
pair
T8
16 Grey 40 Blue
17 White Twisted
pair
R9 41 White Twisted
pair
T9
18 Blue 42 Orange
19 White Twisted
pair
R10 43 White Twisted
pair
T10
20 Green 44 Brown
21 White Twisted
pair
R11 45 Red Twisted
pair
T11
22 Grey 46 Blue
23 Red Twisted
pair
R12 47 Red Twisted
pair
T12
24 Orange 48 Green
49 Red Twisted
pair
R13 73 Red Twisted
pair
T13
50 Brown 74 Grey
5 Cables
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Pin W1 Remark
s
Pin W2 Remark
s
Color of
the
Core
Relatio
n
Color of
the
Core
Relatio
n
51 Black Twisted
pair
R14 75 Black Twisted
pair
T14
52 Blue 76 Orange
53 Black Twisted
pair
R15 77 Black Twisted
pair
T15
54 Green 78 Brown
55 Black Twisted
pair
R16 79 Yellow Twisted
pair
T16
56 Grey 80 Blue

5.6.2 E1 Cable to the E1 Panel
The E1 cable to the E1 panel is used together with the E1 transit cable to connect the IDU to the
E1 panel when the E1 panel functions as the DDF. One end of the E1 cable is terminated with
a DB44 connector and is connected to the E1 transit cable. The other end of the E1 cable is
terminated with a DB37 connector and is connected to the E1 panel.
Each E1 cable can transmit eight E1 signals. The interface impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-10 E1 cable that connects the IDU to an E1 panel
1500 mm
A
A
Pos.1
Pos.44
X1
B
Pos.1
Pos.37
B
X2
X1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male X2. Cable connector, type-D, 37 male

OptiX RTN 910
5-13
Table 5-5 Connection table of the E1 cable that connects a PO1/PH1 board to an E1 panel
Connector
X1
Connector
X2
Remarks Connector
X1
Connector
X2
Remarks
X1.38 X2.20 R1 X1.34 X2.36 R5
X1.23 X2.2 X1.19 X2.17
X1.37 X2.22 R2 X1.33 X2.34 R6
X1.22 X2.4 X1.18 X2.15
X1.36 X2.24 R3 X1.32 X2.32 R7
X1.21 X2.6 X1.17 X2.13
X1.35 X2.26 R4 X1.31 X2.30 R8
X1.20 X2.8 X1.16 X2.11
X1.15 X2.21 T1 X1.11 X2.35 T5
X1.30 X2.3 X1.26 X2.16
X1.14 X2.23 T2 X1.10 X2.33 T6
X1.29 X2.5 X1.25 X2.14
X1.13 X2.25 T3 X1.9 X2.31 T7
X1.28 X2.7 X1.24 X2.12
X1.12 X2.27 T4 X1.8 X2.29 T8
X1.27 X2.9 X1.7 X2.10

5.6.3 E1 Transit Cable
An E1 transit cable is used to connect an E1 interface on the IDU. One end of the E1 transit
cable is terminated with an Anea 96 connector and is connected to the E1 interface on the IDU.
The other end of the E1 transit cable is terminated with a DB44 connector and is connected to
the E1 cable on the external equipment or to the E1 cable on the E1 panel.
An E1 transit cable can be connected to a 75-ohm E1 interface or a 120-ohm E1 interface.
5 Cables
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-11 E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44 connectors
Label 2
M092
X3
X2
2
#4-40
View B
Pos.44
Pos.1
Main Label
W2
W1
Label 1
X1
A
B
400
X1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female X2/X3. Cable connector, type-D, 44 female
Label 1: "CHAN 0-7" Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"

Table 5-6 Connection table of the E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44
connectors
Wire Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
Remarks Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
Remarks
W1 X1.2 X2.38 R1 X1.10 X2.34 R5
X1.1 X2.23 X1.9 X2.19
X1.26 X2.15 T1 X1.34 X2.11 T5
X1.25 X2.30 X1.33 X2.26
X1.4 X2.37 R2 X1.12 X2.33 R6
X1.3 X2.22 X1.11 X2.18
X1.28 X2.14 T2 X1.36 X2.10 T6
X1.27 X2.29 X1.35 X2.25
X1.6 X2.36 R3 X1.14 X2.32 R7
X1.5 X2.21 X1.13 X2.17
OptiX RTN 910
5-15
Wire Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
Remarks Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
Remarks
X1.30 X2.13 T3 X1.38 X2.9 T7
X1.29 X2.28 X1.37 X2.24
X1.8 X2.35 R4 X1.16 X2.31 R8
X1.7 X2.20 X1.15 X2.16
X1.32 X2.12 T4 X1.40 X2.8 T8
X1.31 X2.27 X1.39 X2.7
W2 X1.18 X3.38 R9 X1.50 X3.34 R13
X1.17 X3.23 X1.49 X3.19
X1.42 X3.15 T9 X1.74 X3.11 T13
X1.41 X3.30 X1.73 X3.26
X1.20 X3.37 R10 X1.52 X3.33 R14
X1.19 X3.22 X1.51 X3.18
X1.44 X3.14 T10 X1.76 X3.10 T14
X1.43 X3.29 X1.75 X3.25
X1.22 X3.36 R11 X1.54 X3.32 R15
X1.21 X3.21 X1.53 X3.17
X1.46 X3.13 T11 X1.78 X3.9 T15
X1.45 X3.28 X1.77 X3.24
X1.24 X3.35 R12 X1.56 X3.31 R16
X1.23 X3.20 X1.55 X3.16
X1.48 X3.12 T12 X1.80 X3.8 T16
X1.47 X3.27 X1.79 X3.7

5.7 Orderwire Cable
The orderwire cable connects the orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with RJ-11 connectors. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the
PHONE interface on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected
to the interface of the orderwire phone.
5 Cables
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-12 Orderwire cable
1
6
1
6
1
Main label
X1 X2
1. Orderwire interface, RJ-11 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 5-7 Pin assignment of the orderwire cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Function
X1.3 X2.3 Tip
X1.4 X2.4 Ring

5.8 Network Cable
The network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable
are terminated with RJ-45 connectors.
Two types of interfaces use the RJ-45 connectors, which are the medium dependent interface
(MDI) and MDI-X. The MDI interface is used by the terminal equipment, for example, the
network card. For the pin assignment information of the MDI interface, see Table 5-8. The MDI-
X interface is used by the network equipment. For the pin assignment information of the MDI-
X interface, see Table 5-9.
Table 5-8 Pin assignment of the MDI interface
(+)
(-)
(+)
OptiX RTN 910
5-17
(+)
(-)
(-)
(+)
(-)

Table 5-9 Pin assignment of the MDI-X interface
(+)
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
(+)
(-)

Straight through cables are used between MDI and MDI-X interfaces, and crossover cables are
used between MDI interfaces or between MDI-X interfaces. The only difference between the
straight through cable and crossover cable is with regard to the pin assignment.
The NMS/COM interface, NE interface, and Ethernet service electrical interfaces of the OptiX
RTN 910 support the MDI and MDI-X autosensing modes. Straight through cables and crossover
5 Cables
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
cables can be used to connect the NMS/COM interface, NE interface, and Ethernet service
electrical interfaces to MDI or MDI-X interfaces.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-13 Network cable
1
8
1
8
1
Label 1 Label 2 Main Label
1. Network port connector, RJ-45

Pin Assignment
Table 5-10 Pin assignment of the straight through cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation
X1.1 X2.1 White/Orange Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown

Table 5-11 Pin assignment of the crossover cable
X1.6 X2.2 Orange Twisted pair
X1.3 X2.1 White/Orange
X1.1 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
OptiX RTN 910
5-19
X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown

5 Cables
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
A Parameters Description
This topic describes the parameters used in this document.
A.1 Parameters for NE Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).
A.2 Parameters for Cable Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing cables.
A.3 Parameters for Communications Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management.
A.4 Radio Link Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.
A.5 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).
A.6 SDH/PDH Service Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.
A.7 Clock Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.
A.8 Parameters for Ethernet Services
This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.
A.9 Ethernet Protocol Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol.
A.10 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration and
maintenance (OAM).
A.11 QoS Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.
A.12 RMON Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.
A.13 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.
A.14 Parameters for Board Interfaces
OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
A-1
This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.
A.15 Parameters for Overhead
This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.
OptiX RTN 910
A-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
A.1 Parameters for NE Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).
A.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching
This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.
A.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.
A.1.3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_NE ID Change
This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.
A.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization
This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.
A.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE
time.
A.1.6 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions
of an NE.
A.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching
This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.
Navigation Path
On the Main Topology, choose File > Discovery > NE.
OptiX RTN 910
A-3
Parameters for the Search Field
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Address Type IP Address of GNE
NSAP Address
IP Address Range of GNE
IP Address Range of GNE l If the OSI protocol is
used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
based on NSAP
Address only.
l If the IP protocol is
used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
based on IP Address of
GNE or IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To search for all the
NEs that communicate
with the gateway NE,
select IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To select the gateway
NE only, select IP
Address of GNE.
NOTE
If Address Type is set to IP
Address of GNE or IP
Address Range of GNE,
and if the U2000 (server)
and the gateway NE are
located in different network
segments, ensure that the
U2000 and relevant routers
are configured with the IP
routes for the network
segment in which the
U2000 and gateway NE are
located.
If Address Type is set to
NSAP Address, ensure that
the OSI protocol stack is
installed.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Search Address - - l If Address Type is set
to IP Address of
GNE, enter the IP
address of the gateway
NE, such as 129.9.x.x.
l If Address Type is set
to IP Address Range
of GNE, enter the
number of the IP
network segment in
which the gateway NE
is located, such as
129.9.255.255.
l If Address Type is set
to NSAP Address,
enter the NSAP address
of the gateway NE.
User Name - - This parameter specifies
the user name of the
gateway NE.
Password - - This parameter specifies
the password of the
gateway NE.

Parameter for Searching for NEs
Search for NE Selected
Deselected
Selected This parameter specifies
whether to search for all
the NEs in the specified
domain.
OptiX RTN 910
A-5
Create NE after search Selected
Deselected
Deselected l To create NEs in
batches, it is
recommended that you
select Create NE after
search. The NEs are
automatically created
after they are found.
l After Create NE after
search is selected,
enter NE User and
Password that are used
for creating an NE.
NOTE
If only Create NE after
search is selected, Search
for NE is selected
automatically.
NE User - - l This parameter
specifies the user name
to be entered when an
NE is created.
l This parameter is valid
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
Password - - l This parameter
specifies the password
NE is created.
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
Upload after create Selected
Deselected
Deselected l This parameter
specifies whether to
automatically upload
the NE data after the
NE is found and
created.
l If only Upload after
create is selected,
Search for NE and
Create NE after
search are selected
automatically.

OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Parameter for the Found NEs
NE ID - - This parameter indicates
the ID of the found NE,
which consists of
extended ID and NE ID.
For example, in the case of
NE9-25, the value 9
indicates the extended ID,
and the value 25 indicates
the NE ID.
GNE Address - - This parameter indicates
the address of the gateway
NE that is connected to the
found NE.
GNE ID - - This parameter indicates
the ID of the gateway NE
that is connected to the
found NE.
Created As GNE Yes
No
Yes l This parameter
specifies the password
NE is created.
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
Connection Mode Common
Security SSL
Common The communication
between the client and the
server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to
Security SSL.
Port - 1400 This parameter specifies
the communication port.
NE Status Created
Uncreated
- This parameter indicates
whether the found NE is
created.

A.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.
OptiX RTN 910
A-7
Navigation Path
1. In the Physical View, right-click New > NE.
2. Choose RTN Series > OptiX RTN 910 from the Object Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Type - - This parameter indicates
the type of the NE to be
created.
ID - - l The ID refers to the
basic ID. If the
extended ID is not
used, the basic ID of an
NE must be unique on
the networks that are
managed by the same
NMS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
NOTE
The NE ID consisting of the
basic ID and extended ID
identifies an NE on the
NMS.
Extended ID 1 to 254 9 If the number of existing
NEs does not exceed the
range represented by the
basic ID, do not change
the extended ID.
Name - - l This parameter
specifies the name of
the NE.
l After you specifies the
name of the NE, the
name is displayed
under the icon of the
NE.
Remarks - - This parameter specifies
the remarks of the NE.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Gateway Type Non-Gateway
Gateway
Non-Gateway l This parameter is set to
Gateway if the new NE
is a gateway NE.
l This parameter is set to
Non-Gateway if the
new NE is a non-
gateway NE.
according to the DCN
planning if the new NE
can function as a
gateway NE or a non-
gateway NE.
Affiliated Gateway - - This parameter indicates
the gateway NE of the new
NE when Gateway Type
is set to Non-Gateway.
Affiliated Gateway
Protocol
IP
OSI
IP l This parameter needs to
be set when Gateway
Type is set to
Gateway.
l When the OSI over
DCC solution is used,
this parameter is set to
OSI.
l In other cases, this
parameter is set to IP.
IP Address - - This parameter indicates
the IP address of the new
NE. This parameter needs
to be set when Affiliated
Gateway Protocol is set
to IP.
Connection Mode Common
Security SSL
Common The communication
between the client and the
server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to
Security SSL.
Port - 1400 This parameter specifies
the communication port.
NE User - - This parameter specifies
the user name to be
entered when an NE is
created.
OptiX RTN 910
A-9
Password - - This parameter specifies
the password to be entered
when an NE is created.
NSAP Address - - This parameter indicates
the NSAP address of the
new NE. This parameter
needs to be set when
Affiliated Gateway
Protocol is set to OSI.
You need to set the area ID
only, and the other parts
are automatically
generated by the NE.

A.1.3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_NE ID Change
This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > NE
Attribute from the Function Tree.
2. Click Modify NE ID. The Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed.
Parameters for Changing NE IDs
New ID - - l The new ID refers to
the basic ID. If the
extended ID is not
used, the basic ID of an
NE must be unique on
the networks that are
managed by the same
NMS.
according to the
NOTE
The NE ID consisting of the
basic ID and extended ID
identifies an NE on the
NMS.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
New Extended ID 1 to 254 9 If the number of existing
NEs does not exceed the
range represented by the
basic ID, do not change
the extended ID.

A.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization
This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.
Navigation Path
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from
the Main Menu.
2. Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.
Parameters for NE Time Synchronization
NE Name - - This parameter indicates
the name of the NE.
NE ID - - This parameter indicates
the ID of the NE.
Synchronous Mode Standard NTP
NM
Null
Null l If this parameter is set
to NM, the NE
synchronizes the time
of the NMS server.
l If this parameter is set
to Standard NTP, the
NE synchronizes the
Network Time
Protocol (NTP) server
through the standard
NTP.
Standard NTP
Authentication
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled This parameter is valid
only when Synchronous
Mode is set to Standard
NTP.

OptiX RTN 910
A-11
Parameters for the Standard NTP Server
Standard NTP Server
Identifier
NE ID
IP
NE ID l If the NE functions as
the gateway NE, this
l If the NE functions as a
non-gateway NE and
communicates with the
gateway NE through
the HWECC protocol,
NE ID.
non-gateway NE and
communicates with the
gateway NE through
the IP protocol, this
Standard NTP Server - - l If the NE functions as
the gateway NE, this
parameter is set to the
IP address of the
external NTP server.
non-gateway NE, this
ID or IP address of the
gateway NE.
Standard NTP Server
Key
0 to 1024 0 l If the NTP server does
not need to
authenticated, this
value "0".
l If the NTP server needs
to be authenticated, the
authentication is
performed according to
the allocated key of the
NTP server. In this
case, the NE
authenticates the NTP
server based on the key
and the corresponding
password (specified in
the management of the
standard NTP key).

OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Parameters for Setting Automatic Synchronization
Synchronization
Starting Time
- - l This parameter
specifies the start time
of the synchronization
period. After this
parameter is specified,
the NMS and the NE
synchronize the time
once at the intervals of
Synchronization
Period(days).
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.
DST Selected
Deselected
Deselected l This parameter
indicates whether
Synchronization
Starting Time is the
daylight saving time.
according to the actual
situation.
Synchronization Period
(days)
1 to 300 1 l This parameter
indicates the period of
synchronizing the time
of the NE with the time
of the NMS.
you use the default
value.

A.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE
Time
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE
time.
Navigation Path
1. On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time
Localization Management.
2. Select the NE for time localization management from the Object Tree, and then click
.
OptiX RTN 910
A-13
Parameters for Localization Management of the NE Time
NE - - This parameter indicates the name of the
NE.
TimeZone - - This parameter indicates the time zone.
DST - - This parameter indicates whether DST is
enabled.

Parameters for Time Zone
Time Zone - - l After the time zone is changed, the
current time of the NE is changed
accordingly.
l This parameter is set according to the
place where the NE is located.
DST Selected
Deselected
Deselected l The parameters related to daylight saving
time can be valid only when this
parameter is selected.
situation whether daylight saving time is
used in the place where the NE is located.
Offset 1 to 120
Unit: minute(s)
- This parameter specifies the offset value of
the daylight saving time.
Start Rule DATE
WEEK
DATE-WEEK
WEEK This parameter specifies the method of
adjusting the daylight saving time.
Start Time - - This parameter specifies the start daylight
saving time.
End Rule DATE
WEEK
DATE-WEEK
WEEK This parameter specifies the method of
adjusting the daylight saving time.
End Time - - This parameter specifies the end daylight
saving time.

OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
A.1.6 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions
of NEs
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions
of an NE.
Navigation Path
1. On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic
Disabling of NE Function.
2. Select the NE whose functions need to be automatically disabled from the Object Tree, and
then click .
Parameters for Automatically Disabling the Functions of NEs
NE Name - - This parameter indicates the name of the
NE.
NE Type OptiX RTN 910 - This parameter indicates the type of the NE.
Operation Type - - This parameter indicates the type of the
operation, such as loopback, and shutdown
of the laser.
Auto Disabling Disabled
Enabled
Enabled This parameter specifies whether to
automatically disable the operations such as
loopback, and shutdown of the laser.
Auto Disabling
Time(min)
1 to 2880 5 This parameter specifies the time of
automatically disabling the operations such
as loopback, and shutdown of the laser.

A.2 Parameters for Cable Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing cables.
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Fiber Search
This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for fibers.
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Fiber Creation
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating fibers.
A.2.3 Parameter Description: Radio Link Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating radio links.
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Fiber Search
This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for fibers.
OptiX RTN 910
A-15
Navigation Path
1. Choose File > Discovery > Fiber from the Main Menu.
2. Select the board of the NE on which the fiber needs to be searched for or the IF board of
the NE on which radio links need to be searched for from the Subject Tree, and the click
.
3. Click Search.
Parameters for Searching For Fibers
Source NE - - This parameter indicates
the name of the source NE
on which fibers or radio
links are found.
Source Board - - This parameter indicates
the board and slot of the
source NE on which fibers
or radio links are found.
Source Port - - This parameter indicates
the number of the port on
the board of the source NE
links are found.
Sink NE - - This parameter indicates
the name of the sink NE on
which fibers or radio links
are found.
Sink Board - - This parameter indicates
the board and slot of the
sink NE on which fibers or
radio links are found.
Sink Port - - This parameter indicates
the number of the port on
the board of the sink NE
links are found.
Level - - This parameter indicates
the level of the found fiber
or the working mode of
the found radio link.
Name - - This parameter indicates
the name of the found
fiber or radio link.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Direction Two-Fiber Bidirectional
Single-Fiber
Unidirectional
the direction of the found
fiber.
Conflict with logical link
(Y/N)
Yes
No
whether the found fiber or
radio link conflicts with
the fiber or radio link
displayed on the NMS.
Operation Result Succeeded
Failed
whether the cable is
created successfully.
Fiber/Cable Type - - This parameter indicates
the type of the found fiber
or cable.

A.2.2 Parameter Description: Fiber Creation
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating fibers.
Navigation Path
1. Choose File > Create > Link from the Main Menu. The Add Object dialog box is
displayed.
2. Choose Link > Fiber from the Object Tree.
Parameters for Fibers
Create Ways Common Ways
Batch Ways
Common Ways l If Common Ways is
selected, fibers need to
created one by one.
l If Batch Ways is
selected, fibers can be
created in batches.
Fiber/Cable Type Fiber Fiber This parameter indicates
that Fiber/Cable Type to
be created is a fiber.
OptiX RTN 910
A-17
Name - - This parameter specifies
the name of the fiber to be
created. The name
consists of up to 255
characters, excluding
certain special marks such
as | * ? " < >.
the remark information
customized by the user.
Source NE - - This parameter specifies
the source NE on which
the fiber needs to be
created.
Source NE Slot-Board
Type-Port
- - This parameter specifies
the board, slot, and port of
the fiber needs to be
created.
Rate Level - - This parameter indicates
the level that corresponds
to the port on the board.
Medium Type G.652
G.653
G.654
G.655
G.652 This parameter specifies
the medium type of the
fiber.
Sink NE - - This parameter specifies
the sink NE on which the
fiber needs to be created.
Sink NE Slot-Board
Type-Port
fiber needs to be created.
Direction Two-Fiber Bidirectional
Single-Fiber
Unidirectional
- This parameter specifies
the direction of the fiber to
be created.
Length(km) - - This parameter specifies
the length of the fiber to be
created.
Attenuation(dB) - - This parameter specifies
the attenuation of the fiber
to be created.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Created On - - This parameter specifies
the time when the fiber is
created.
Creator - - This parameter specifies
the name of the person
who creates the fiber.
Maintainer - - This parameter specifies
who maintains the fiber.

A.2.3 Parameter Description: Radio Link Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating radio links.
Navigation Path
1. Choose File > Create > Link from the Main Menu. The Add Object dialog box is
displayed.
2. Choose Link > Microwave Link from the Object Tree.
Parameters for Microwave Links
Fiber/Cable Type Radio Link Radio Link This parameter indicates
that a radio link needs to
be created is Fiber/Cable
Type.
the name of the radio link
to be created. The name
consists of up to 255
characters, excluding
certain special marks such
as | * ? " < >.
the remark information
customized by the user.
Source NE - - The parameter specifies
the radio link needs to be
created.
OptiX RTN 910
A-19
Source NE Slot-Board
Type-Port
the radio link needs to be
created.
Rate Level - - This parameter indicates
the level that corresponds
to the port on the IF board.
Sink NE - - The parameter specifies
radio link needs to be
created.
Sink NE Slot-Board
Type-Port
radio link needs to be
created.
Length(km) - - This parameter specifies
the length of the radio link
to be created.
Created On - - This parameter indicates
the time when the radio
link is created.
Creator - - This parameter specifies
who creates the radio link.
Maintainer - - This parameter specifies
who maintains the radio
link.

A.3 Parameters for Communications Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.
A.3.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.
A.3.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.
A.3.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.
A.3.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.
A.3.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.
A.3.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.
A.3.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings
This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.
A.3.9 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol
model.
A.3.10 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table
This topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.
A.3.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.
A.3.12 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.
A.3.13 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.
A.3.14 Parameter Description: Access Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.
A.3.15 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.
A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter
Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >
Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.
Parameters for NE Communication Setting
IP Address - Before delivery, the
IP address of the NE
is set to 129.9.0.x.
The letter x indicates
the basic ID.
In the HWECC solution, an IP address is set
according to the following rules:
l The IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway of the gateway NE should meet
the planning requirements of the external
DCN.
OptiX RTN 910
A-21
Gateway IP
Address
l If an NE uses the extended ECC, the IP
address must be in the same network
segment.
l The IP address of other NEs should be set
according to the NE ID. In this case, the
IP address of an NE should be set in the
format of 0x81000000+ID. That is, if the
ID is 0x090001, the IP address should be
set to 129.9.0.1.
- 0.0.0.0

A.3.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate
Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab.
Parameters for DCC Rate Configuration
Port - - This parameter indicates the port that is
connected to the DCC channel.
Enabled/Disabled Enabled
Disabled
Enabled (for line
ports)
Disabled (for
external clock
interfaces)
It is recommended that you use the default
value, except for the following cases:
l If the port is connected to the other ECC
subnet, Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disabled.
l If the port is connected to a third-party
network and does not exchange the
network management information with
other ports, Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disabled.
l If external clock interfaces are used to
transparently transmit the DCC solution,
Enabled/Disabled is set to Enabled for
the external clock interfaces.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Channel Type D1-D3
D4-D12
D1-D12
D1-D1
D1-D1 (for the PDH
radio whose
transmission
capacity is less than
16xE1)
D1-D3 (for other
cases)
It is recommended that you use the default
l If the IP over DCC or OSI over DCC
solution is adopted, Channel Type for
the SDH line ports is set to a value that is
the same as the value for third-party
network.
l If the DCC transparent transmission
solution is adopted, the value of Channel
Type for the SDH line ports should not
conflict with the value that is set for the
third-party network.
DCC Resources - - This parameter indicates the DCC
resources.
Communication
Status
- - This parameter indicates the
communication status.
Protocol Type HWECC
TCP/IP
OSI
HWECC It is recommended that you use the default
l If the IP over DCC solution is adopted,
Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP.
l If the OSI over DCC solution is adopted,
Protocol Type is set to OSI.
LAPD Role User
Network
User l This parameter is valid only when
Protocol Type is set to OSI.
l In the case of a DCC channel, LAPD
Role must be set to User for one end and
must be set to Network for the other end.

A.3.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent
Transmission Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
2. Click the DCC Transparent Transmission Management tab.
OptiX RTN 910
A-23
Parameters for DCC Transparent Transmission Management
Source Timeslot/
Port
a
- - This parameter indicates the source timeslot
or port.
Transparent
Transmission of
Overhead Bytes at
Source Port
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
E1
E2
F1
K1
K2
X1
X2
X3
X4
- l Only one overhead byte can be selected
each time.
l X1, X2, X3, and X4 indicate the
customized overhead bytes that are used
for transmitting asynchronous data
services.
l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that is
used. For example, an overhead byte
cannot be a byte in the used DCC channel.
Sink Timeslot/
Port
a
- - This parameter indicates the sink timeslot or
port.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Transparent
Transmission of
Overhead Bytes at
Sink Port
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
E1
E2
F1
K1
K2
X1
X2
X3
X4
- l Only one overhead byte can be selected
each time.
l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that is
used. For example, an overhead byte
cannot be a byte in the used DCC channel.
l Generally, Transparent Transmission
of Overhead Bytes at Sink Port can be
set to a value that is the same as or
different from the value in the case of
Source Timeslot/Port.

NOTE
a. A bidirectional cross-connection is set up between the source port and the sink port. Hence, a port functions
the same regardless of the source port or sink port.
A.3.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port
Extended ECC
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the
Function Tree.
OptiX RTN 910
A-25
Parameters for the ECC Extended Mode
ECC Extended
Mode
Auto mode
Specified mode
Specified mode It is recommended that you use the default
value.

Parameters for Setting the Server
IP - 0.0.0.0 This parameter indicates the IP address of
the server.
Port 1601 to 1699 1601 l This parameter is valid only when ECC
Extended Mode is set to Specified
mode.
l This parameter can be set only when the
NE functions as the server of the
extended ECC. In normal cases, the NE
that is close to the U2000 functions as the
server.
l This parameter can be set to any value
from 1601 to 1699.

Parameters for Setting the Client
Opposite IP - 0.0.0.0 l This parameter is valid only when ECC
Extended Mode is set to Specified
mode.
l This parameter can be set only when the
NE functions as the client of the extended
ECC. Except for the NE that functions as
the server, all other NEs that use the
extended ECC can function as the client.
l Opposite IP and Port are respectively set
to the IP address of the server NE and the
specified pot number.
Port 1601 to 1699 1601

A.3.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > NE ECC
Link Management from the Function Tree.
Parameter for NE ECC Link Management
Destination NE - - This parameter specifies the sink NE of the
ECC connection.
Transfer NE - - This parameter specifies the next transfer
NE and the direction of the ECC route.
Distance 0 to 64 0 l This parameter specifies the number of
NEs (excluding the source NE and sink
NE) through which the ECC route passes,
namely, the number of ECC packet
forwarding attempts. The value can be set
to a value that is greater than the number
of actual ECC packet forwarding
attempts. If the value is set to a value that
is less than the number of actual ECC
packet forwarding attempts, however, the
destination NE fails to be accessed.
l If the value is set to 0, it indicates that the
source NE is adjacent to the destination
NE.
Level 4
5
- l This parameter indicates that multiple
ECC routes from the source NE to the
destination NE may be available. An
ECC route of a higher priority is selected
to transmit the packets to the destination
NE.
l If the ECC route is generated
automatically, the priority is 4.
l If the ECC route is added manually, the
priority is 5.
Mode Manual
Automatic
- This parameter indicates the ECC routing
mode.
SCC No. - - This parameter specifies the physical port
through which the ECC route passes. The
value of this parameter is automatically
assigned the NE.

OptiX RTN 910
A-27
A.3.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP
Route Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IP Route Management tab.
Parameters for IP Route Management
Destination
Address
- - This parameter specifies the destination
address of the packets. This parameter can
be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or
C only, but cannot be set to the IP address
of the local host or the loopback address
with the 127 field.
Mask - - This parameter indicates the subnet mask of
the destination address of the packets.
Gateway IP
Address
- - This parameter specifies the IP address of
the gateway on the subnetwork where the
NE is located, namely, the IP address of the
next hop of the packets.
Protocol DIRECT
STATIC
OSPF
RIP
OSPF_ASE
OSPF_NSSA
- l DIRECT: indicates the route between
the local NE and an adjacent NE.
l STATIC: indicates the route that is
created manually.
l OSPF: indicates the route between the
local NE and a non-adjacent NE.
l RIP: indicates the route that is discovered
by the routing information protocol.
l OSPF_ASE: indicates the route whose
Destination Address is beyond the
OSPF domain.
l OSPF_NSSA: indicates the route whose
Destination Address is in a not so stubby
area (NSSA).
l A route can be deleted in the case of
STATIC only, but cannot be edited in the
other cases.
l Compared with a dynamic route, a static
route has a higher priority. If any conflict
occurs, the static route is preferred.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Interface - - This parameter indicates the interface that is
used on the route. Interface is a concept
specified in the TCP/IP protocol stack. In
the TCP/IP protocol stack, you can create
multiple types of interface, such as a
loopback interface (namely, the interface
whose IP address is 127.0.0.1), an Ethernet
interface, and PPP interface. Each interface
must have a unique interface name.
Hop Count 0 to 65535 - This parameter indicates the maximum
number of routers through which the
packets are transmitted. Hop Count is used
to indicate the overhead bytes that are
transmitted to the destination address. The
smaller the value, the less the overhead
bytes. If multiple routes can reach the same
destination address, a route whose overhead
is less is preferred to transmit the packets.
Working Status Working
Unworking
- This parameter indicates whether the
current IP route is available.

A.3.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP
Route Management Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.
Navigation Path
2. Click the IP Route Management tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters for Creating IP Routes
Destination
Address
- - This parameter specifies the destination
address of the packets. This parameter can
be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or
C only, but cannot be set to the IP address
of the local host or the loopback address
with the 127 field.
Mask - - This parameter indicates the subnet mask of
the destination address of the packets.
OptiX RTN 910
A-29
Gateway IP
Address
- - This parameter specifies the IP address of
the gateway on the subnetwork where the
NE is located, namely, the IP address of the
next hop of the packets.

A.3.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF
Parameter Settings
This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.
Navigation Path
2. Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab.
OSPF Parameters
Area - - l The OSPF protocol supports the division
of NEs into multiple areas. Only the NEs
in the same area can transmit the OSPF
packets to each other to generate the
route.
l When setting the area for the NEs, you
need to set the NEs that run the OSPF
protocol to the same area.
DCC Hello Timer
(s)
1 to 255 1 l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the Hello
packet timer at the DCC interface.
l The Hello packets are used for detecting
the neighbor router on the network that is
connected to the router. By periodically
transmitting the hello packets, you can
determine whether the interface on the
neighbor router is still in the active status.
l DCC Hello Timer(s) determines the
interval for the hello packet timer to
transmit the hello packets.
l In the case of two interconnected NEs,
DCC Hello Timer(s) must be set to the
same value.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
DCC Neighbor
Dead Time(s)
1 to 65535 6 l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies
the dead time of a neighbor router at the
DCC interface.
l If the local router fails to receive the hello
packets from the connected neighbor
router within the time specified in DCC
Neighbor Dead Time(s), it considers
that the neighbor router is unavailable.
l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be
set to a value that is a minimum of twice
the value of DCC Hello Timer(s).
l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC
Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to
the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF
protocol fails to operate normally.
DCC
Retransmission
Timer(s)
1 to 65535 5 DCC Retransmission Timer(s) specifies
the interval for transmitting a request
through the DCC interface to retransmit the
link state advertisement (LSA) packets.
DCC Delay(s) 1 to 3600 1 l DCC Delay(s) specifies the delay time to
transmit the LSA packets through the
DCC interface.
l The LSA packets in the LSA database of
the local router are aged as the time
elapses, but are not aged when they are
being transmitted on the network. Hence,
before the LSA packets are transmitted,
you need to increase the age of the LSA
packets based on the value of DCC Delay
(s).
LAN Hello Timer
(s)
0 to 65535 - l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the hello
packet timer at the LAN interfaces.
l The hello packets are used for detecting
the neighbor router on the network that is
connected to the router. By periodically
transmitting the hello packets, you can
determine whether the interface on the
neighbor router is still in the active status.
l LAN Hello Timer(s) determines the
interval for the hello packet timer of the
NE to transmit the hello packets.
l In the case of two interconnected NEs,
LAN Hello Timer(s) must be set to the
same value.
OptiX RTN 910
A-31
LAN Neighbor
Dead Time(s)
l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies
the dead time of a neighbor router at the
LAN interface.
l If the local router fails to receive the hello
packets from the connected neighbor
router within the time specified in LAN
Neighbor Dead Time(s), it considers
that the neighbor router is unavailable.
l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be
set to a value that is a minimum of two
times the value of LAN Neighbor Dead
Time(s).
l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC
Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to
the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF
protocol fails to operate normally.
LAN
Retransmission
Timer(s)
1 to 65535 5 LAN Retransmission Timer(s) specifies
the time for transmitting a request for
retransmission of the LSA packets through
the LAN interface.
LAN Delay(s) 1 to 3600 1 l LAN Delay(s) specifies the delay time to
transmit the LSA packets through the
LAN interface.
l The LSA packets in the LSA database of
the local router are aged as the time
elapses, but are not aged when they are
being transmitted on the network. Hence,
before the LSA packets are transmitted,
you need to increase the age of the LSA
packets based on the value of LAN Delay
(s).
Port Type lan lan This parameter specifies the port type of the
OSPF protocol.
Used Flag Enabled
Disabled
Enabled This parameter specifies Used Flag of the
OSPF protocol.

A.3.9 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer
Parameter
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol
model.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
2. Click the Network Layer Parameters tab.
Network Layer Parameters
NE.
Configuration Role L1
L2
L1 l An NE whose Configuration Role is set
to L1 cannot function as a neighbor of an
NE in the other area. It uses a route in the
local area only and access the other area
by distributing the default route of the
nearest L2 NE.
l An NE whose Configuration Role is set
to L2 can function as a neighbor of an NE
in the other area and can use a route in the
backbone area. The backbone area is a
collection that is formed by consecutive
L2 NEs. That is, the L2 NE of all the roles
must be consecutive (connected to each
other).
Current Role - - This parameter indicates the current role.

A.3.10 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table
This topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Routing Table tab.
Parameters for Routing Tables
Port - - This parameter indicates the port used for
OSI communication.
Data Link Layer - - This parameter indicates the protocol that is
used at the data link layer.
OptiX RTN 910
A-33
Adjacency No. - - l This parameter specifies the identifier of
the adjacency that is set up by two NEs
through the OSI protocol. One adjacency
number corresponds to an OSI adjacency.
l The value is dynamically allocated by the
NE.
Adjacency Type - - This parameter indicates the type of the
adjacency.
Adjacency State - - This parameter indicates the state of the
adjacency.
Peer End Area ID - - This parameter indicates the area ID that is
contained in the NSAP address of the
opposite NE.
Peer End System
ID
- - This parameter indicates the system ID of
the opposite NE. Generally, the system ID
is the MAC address.
Destination SYSID - - This parameter indicates the system ID of
the destination NE. Generally, the system
ID is the MAC address.
Metric - - This parameter indicates the number of hops
that reach the destination NE or destination
area.
Adjacency No.1 - - This parameter indicates the number of the
adjacent link that is connected to the
destination NE.
Adjacency No.2 - - This parameter indicates the number of the
adjacent link that is connected to the
destination NE.

A.3.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.
Navigation Path
2. Click the OSI Tunnel tab.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Parameters for OSI Tunnel Attributes
Remote IP Address - - This parameter indicates the IP address of
the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.
LAPD Actor User
Network
User l This parameter specifies the LAPD actor.
l If the adjacent NEs run the OSI protocol,
they can perform the LAPD negotiation
only when the LAPD actor is set to
User at one end and is set to Network at
the other end.
Efficient LAPD
Enable
- - This parameter indicates whether the
current LAPD is enabled.
Configure LAPD
Enable
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled This parameter specifies whether the LAPD
is enabled.

LAPD Parameters
Remote IP Address - - This parameter indicates the IP address of
the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.
L2 Wait Time to
Retry(s)
1 to 20 1 l This parameter specifies L2 Wait Time
to Retry(s).
l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) indicates the
interval for retransmitting packets at the
LAPD link layer.
l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) needs to be
set according to the network situation. If
the network is in good situation, L2 Wait
Time to Retry(s) can be set to a smaller
value. Otherwise, it is recommended that
you set L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) to a
greater value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.
OptiX RTN 910
A-35
L2 Retry Times 2 to 6 3 l This parameter specifies L2 Retry
Times.
l L2 Retry Times indicates the maximum
number of packet retransmission
attempts at the LAPD link layer.
l L2 Retry Times needs to be set
according to the network situation. If the
network is in good situation, L2 Retry
Times can be set to a smaller value.
Otherwise, it is recommended that you
set L2 Retry Times to a greater value.
default value.
L3 Hello Timer(s) 1 to 100 3 l This parameter specifies L3 Hello Timer
(s).
l L3 Hello Timer(s) indicates the Hello
packet timer at the LAPD link network
layer. It is used for periodical
transmission of the Hello packets.
l The Hello timer determines the interval
for transmitting the Hello packets once.
L3 Hello Timer(s) needs to be set
network is in good situation, L3 Hello
Timer(s) can be set to a greater value.
set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value.
default value.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
L3 E3 Timer(s) 1 to 200 50 l This parameter specifies L3 E3 Timer
(s).
l L3 E3 Timer(s) indicates the ES
configuration timer at the LAPD link
network layer. It is used for setting the
time to transmit the configuration
information on the ES route.
l L3 E3 Timer(s) needs to be set according
to the network situation. If the network is
in good situation, L3 E3 Timer(s) can be
set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is
recommended that you set L3 Hello
Timer(s) to a smaller value.
default value.
L3 IS Timer(s) 1 to 200 10 l This parameter specifies L3 IS Timer
(s).
l L3 IS Timer(s) indicates the IS
configuration timer at the LAPD link
network layer. It is used for setting the
time to transmit the configuration
information through the L1/L2 router.
l L3 IS Timer(s) needs to be set according
to the network situation. If the network is
in good situation, L3 IS Timer(s) can be
set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is
recommended that you set L3 IS Timer
(s) to a smaller value.
default value.
OptiX RTN 910
A-37
L3 Hold Timer(s) 2 to 63 5 l This parameter specifies L3 Hold Timer
(s).
l L3 Hold Timer(s) indicates the hold
timer at the LAPD link network layer.
l L3 Hold Timer(s) needs to be set
network is in good situation, L3 Hold
Timer(s) can be set to a smaller value.
set L3 IS Timer(s) to a greater value.
default value.
COST 1 to 63 20 l This parameter specifies COST.
l COST indicates the overhead value of
the virtual LAPD that corresponds to the
OSI tunnel.
l The overhead value determines whether
this link is perverted. If the overhead
value is smaller, this link has a higher
priority to be selected.
l This parameter needs to set according to
the planning information.

A.3.12 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth
Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
2. Click the Bandwidth Management tab.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Parameters for Bandwidth Management
Ethernet Board
VLAN ID
1 to 4094 4094 l The equipment on the traditional DCN
can be connected to the NMS through the
SCC board, but the OptiX RTN 910 can
also be connected to the NMS through an
Ethernet interface. If an Ethernet port is
used to carry the network management
information, the NE differentiates the
network management information and
Ethernet service information according
to the VLAN ID.
l If the default VLAN ID of the inband
DCN conflicts with the VLAN ID in the
service, the VLAN ID of the inband DCN
can be changed manually. The same
VLAN ID must be, however, is used on
the network-wide inband DCN.
Bandwidth(kbps) - - This parameter specifies the bandwidth of
the inband DCN.
E1 Port Bandwidth
(kbps)
- - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
parameter.
Tunnel Bandwidth
(kbps)
parameter.
IF Port Bandwidth
(kbps)
parameter.

A.3.13 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
2. Click the Port Settings tab.
Parameters for Setting FE or GE Ports
Port Name - - This parameter indicates the name of the FE
or GE port.
OptiX RTN 910
A-39
Enable Status Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the FE
or GE port is enabled.
l The inband DCN can transmit the
network management information over
the link only after the inband DCN
function is enabled at the FE or GE ports
at both ends of a link.

Parameters for Setting IF Ports
Port Name - - This parameter indicates the name of the IF
port.
Enable Status Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the IF
port is enabled.
l The inband DCN can transmit the
network management information over
the link only after the IF ports at both ends
of a link are enabled on the inband DCN.

A.3.14 Parameter Description: Access Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Access
Control from the Function Tree.
Parameters for Ethernet Access Control
The First Network
Port
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled After The First Network Port is set to
Enabled for Ethernet access, the NE can
access the NMS through the Ethernet port.

OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Parameters for Access Control over Serial Ports
Enable Serial Port
Access
Selected
Deselected
Selected After Enable Serial Port Access is
selected, the NE can access the NMS or
command lines through the serial port.
Baud Rate 1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
9600 l This parameter specifies the data
transmission rate in the communications
through serial ports.
l This parameter is set according to the rate
of the serial port at the opposite end, and
the rates at both ends must be the same.

A.3.15 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > LCT Access
Parameters for LCT Access Control
NE.
OptiX RTN 910
A-41
LCT Access
Control Switch
Enable Access
Disable Access
Enable Access l No NMS user logs in to the NE. In this
case, when the LCT requests an LCT user
to log in to the NE, the NE does not check
the status of LCT Access Control
Switch, and directly allows the LCT user
to log in to the NE.
l An NMS user first logs in to the NE. In
this case, when the LCT requests an LCT
user to log in to the NE, the NE
determines whether to allow the LCT
user to log in to the NE through the LCT
according to the status of LCT Access
Control Switch.
l An LCT user first logs in to the NE. In
this case, when the NMS requests an
NMS user to log in to the NE, the NMS
user can directly log in to the NE. After
the NMS user successfully logs in to the
NE, the online LCT user is not affected.
l When both the LCT user and NMS user
log in to the NE, the online LCT user is
not affected after LCT Access Control
Switch is set to Disable Access.

A.4 Radio Link Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.
A.4.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.
A.4.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC
A.4.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.
A.4.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.
A.4.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.
A.4.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.
A.4.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Workgroup_Creation
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the XPIC tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters
IF Channel
Bandwidth
7M
14M
28M
56M
7M l This parameter specifies the working
bandwidth of the radio link.
l When this parameter is set to 56M, the
high-power ODU must be used.
Polarization
direction-V
- - l This parameter indicates the polarization
direction of a radio link.
l It is recommended that you set the IF port
on the IFX2 board that has a smaller slot
number to Link ID-V and the IF port on
the other IFX2 board to Link ID-H.
Polarization
direction-H
Link ID-V 1 to 4094 1 l Set Link ID-V and Link ID-H.
l A link ID is an identifier of a radio link
and is used to prevent the radio links
between sites from being wrongly
connected.
l When the link ID received by an NE is
different from the link ID set for the NE,
the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm and
inserts the AIS.
l These two parameters are set according
to the planning information. These two
parameters must be set to different
values, but Link ID-V must be set to the
same value at both ends of a link and Link
ID-H must also be set to the same value
at both ends of a link.
Link ID-H 2
OptiX RTN 910
A-43
Transmit Power
(dBm)
- - l This parameter specifies the transmit
power of an ODU. The value of this
parameter must not exceed the rated
power range supported by the ODU.
l The transmit power of the ODU must be
set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.
l Consider the receive power of the ODU
at the opposite end when you set this
parameter. Ensure that the receive power
of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure
stable radio services.
Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)
- - l This parameter specifies the maximum
transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power rang of the
ODU in the guaranteed capacity
modulation module..
l This parameter is set to limit the
maximum transmit power of the ODU
within this preset range.
l The maximum transmit power adjusted
by using the ATPC function should not
exceed this value.
Transmission
Frequency(MHz)
- - l This parameter indicates the channel
central frequency.
l The value of this parameter must not be
less than the sum of the lower transmit
frequency limit supported by the ODU
and a half of the channel spacing, and
must not be more than the difference
between the upper transmit frequency
limit supported by the ODU and a half of
the channel spacing.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter specifies the spacing
between the transmit frequency and the
receive frequency of an ODU to prevent
mutual interference between the
transmitter and the receiver.
l If Station Type of the ODU is TX high,
the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing
higher than the receive frequency. If
Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the
transmit frequency is one T/R spacing
lower than the receive frequency.
l If the ODU supports only one T/R
spacing, set this parameter to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing supported
by the ODU is used.
l A valid T/R spacing value is determined
by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing
should be set according to the technical
specifications of the ODU.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be
set to the same value at both the ends of
a radio link.
Transmission
Status
unmute
mute
unmute l When this parameter is set to mute, the
ODU does not work but can normally
receive microwave signals.
l When this parameter is set to unmute, the
ODU normally transmits and receives
microwave signals.
l In normal cases, this parameter is set to
unmute.
OptiX RTN 910
A-45
ATPC Enabled Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the
ATPC function is enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled
and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB
higher or lower than the central value
between the ATPC upper threshold and
the ATPC lower threshold at the receive
end, the receiver notifies the transmitter
to decrease or increase the transmit power
until the RSL is within the range that is 2
dB higher or lower than the central value
the ATPC lower threshold.
l The settings of the ATPC attributes must
be consistent at both ends of a radio link.
l In the case of areas where fast fading
severely affects the radio transmission, it
is recommended that you set this
parameter to Disabled.
l During the commissioning process, set
this parameter to Disabled to ensure that
the transmit power is not changed. After
the commissioning, re-set the ATPC
attributes.
ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm)
-75.0 to -20.0 -45.0 l The central value between the ATPC
upper threshold and the ATPC lower
threshold is set as the expected receive
power.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of
the planned central value between the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Lower Threshold(dBm) to the
difference between the planned central
value between the ATPC upper threshold
and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.
l You can set the ATPC upper threshold
only when ATPC Automatic Threshold
Enable Status is set to Disabled.
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
-35.0 to -90.0 -70.0
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Disabled
Enabled
automatic threshold function is enabled.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the
equipment automatically uses the preset
ATPC upper and lower thresholds
according to the work mode of the radio
link.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
2. Click the XPIC tab.
Group ID - - This parameter indicates the ID of the work
group.
Polarization
direction-V
- - This parameter indicates the IF port to which
the polarization direction V corresponds.
Link ID-V - - This parameter indicates the link ID to
which the polarization direction V
corresponds.
Polarization
direction-H
the polarization direction H corresponds.
Link ID-H - - This parameter indicates the link ID to
which the polarization direction H
corresponds.
IF Channel
Bandwidth
7M
14M
28M
56M
7M l IF Channel Bandwidth refers to the
channel spacing of the corresponding
radio links.
OptiX RTN 910
A-47
Power to Be
Received -V(dBm)
- - l This parameter is used to set the expected
receive power of the ODU and is mainly
used in the antenna alignment stage.
After this parameter is set, the NE
automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When the antenna misalignment
indicating function is enabled, if the
actual receive power of the ODU exceeds
the range of receive power3 dB, the
ODU LED of the IF board connected to
the ODU is on (yellow) for 300 ms and
off for 300 ms repeatedly, indicating that
the antenna is not aligned.
l After the antenna alignment, after the
state that the antenna is aligned lasts for
30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.
Power to Be
Received -H(dBm)
used in the antenna alignment stage.
After this parameter is set, the NE
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)
modulation module..
exceed this value.
Transmit Power
(dBm)
- - l This parameter indicates or specifies the
exceeds the nominal power range of the
ODU.
l The transmit power of the ODU should
be set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.
Transmission
Frequency(MHz)
transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,
the channel central frequency.
less than the sum of the lower TX
between the upper TX frequency limit
supported by the ODU and a half of the
channel spacing.
l The difference between the transmit
frequencies of both the ends of a radio
link should be one T/R spacing.
to the planning information.
OptiX RTN 910
A-49
T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the
spacing between the transmit frequency
and receive frequency of the ODU to
prevent mutual interference between the
transmitter and receiver.
l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the
higher than the receive frequency. If the
ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit
frequency is one T/R spacing lower than
the receive frequency.
spacing, this parameter is set to 0,
by the ODU is used.
radio link.
Transmission
Status
unmute
mute
unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the
transmit status of the ODU.
l If this parameter is set to mute, the
transmitter of the ODU does not work but
can normally receive microwave signals.
l If this parameter is set to unmute, the
ODU can normally transmit and receive
microwave signals.
unmute.

Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration
Group ID - - This parameter indicates the ID of the work
group.
Polarization
direction
the polarization direction H or the
polarization direction V corresponds.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
AM Mode Asymmetric Asymmetric If AM Mode is set to Asymmetric, the AM
switching in one direction of the radio link
does not trigger the AM switching in the
other direction of the radio link.
NOTE
The Optix RTN equipment supports
onlyAsymmetric.
AM Enable Status Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l When this parameter is set to Disabled,
the radio link uses only the specified
modulation scheme. In this case, you
need to select Manually Specified
Modulation Mode.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled,
the radio link uses the corresponding
modulation scheme according to the
channel conditions.
Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure the
reliable transmission of the E1 services and
provide bandwidth adaptively for the
Ethernet services when the AM function is
enabled.
Modulation Mode
of the Guaranteed
AM Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
- This parameter specifies the highest-gain
modulation scheme that the AM function
supports. This parameter is set according to
the planning information. Generally, the
value of this parameter is determined by the
bandwidth of the services that need to be
transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the
availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
must be higher than Modulation Mode of the
Guaranteed AM Capacity.
This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Enabled.
OptiX RTN 910
A-51
Modulation Mode
of the Full AM
Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
NOTE
Enable Status is set to Enabled.
Manually Specified
Modulation Mode
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
QPSK This parameter specifies the modulation
scheme that the radio link uses for signal
transmission.
Enable Status is set to Disabled.
Guaranteed E1
Capacity
- - l When AM Enable Status is set to
Enabled, this parameter depends on IF
Channel Bandwidth and Modulation
Mode of the Guaranteed AM
Capacity and cannot be set.
l When AM Enable Status is set to
Disabled, this parameter depends on IF
Channel Bandwidth and Manually
Specified Modulation Mode and cannot
be set.
E1 Capacity 1 to 75 - This parameter specifies the number of E1
services that can be transmitted in Hybrid
work mode.

Parameters for ATPC Management
Group ID - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
ATPC Enable
Status
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the
l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if
the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher
or lower than the central value between
the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold at the receive end, the
receiver notifies the transmitter to
decrease or increase the transmit power
attributes.
ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm)
-75.0 to -20.0 -45.0 l Set the central value between the ATPC
threshold to a value for the expected
receive power.
Lower Threshold(dBm) o the difference
between the planned central value
the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.
l You can set this parameter only when
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable
Status is set to Disabled.
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
-35.0 to -90.0 -70.0
OptiX RTN 910
A-53
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Disabled
Enabled
ATPC automatic threshold function is
enabled.
link.
l If this parameter is set to Disabled, you
need to manually set ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm).

A.4.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create.
WTR time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-
restore (WTR) time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
set WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
Enabled Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the SD
switching function of N+1 protection is
enabled.
the SD condition is considered as a
trigger condition of protection switching.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Enabled.

OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Slot Mapping Relation Parameters
Select Mapping
Direction
Work Unit
Protection Unit
Work Unit l This parameter specifies the mapping
direction of N+1 protection.
Select Mapping
Way
- - l In the case of N+1 protection, map N IF
ports as Work Unit and map the
remaining IF port as Protection Unit.
Mapped Board - - This parameter indicates the working unit
and protection unit that have been set.

A.4.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection Group Parameters
Protection Group
ID
- - This parameter indicates the ID of the
protection group.
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 - l This parameter indicates or specifies the
WTR time.
occurs.
default value.
OptiX RTN 910
A-55
SD Enable Enabled
Disabled
- l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether the SD switching function of N
+1 protection is enabled.
the SD condition is considered as a
trigger condition of protection switching.
Protocol Status - - This parameter indicates the status of the
switching control protocol.

Protection Unit Parameters
Protection Unit - - This parameter indicates the protection unit.
Line - - This parameter indicates the information
about the working board or protection
board.
Switching Status - - This parameter indicates the switching state.
Protection Unit - - This parameter indicates the protected unit.
Remote/Local End
Indication
- - This parameter indicates the local end or
remote end.

A.4.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
2. Click Create.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Parameters
Working Mode HSB
FD
SD
HSB l This parameter specifies the working
mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a
1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF
board and ODU at both ends of each hop
of a radio link to realize the protection.
l In FD mode, the system uses two
channels that have a frequency spacing
between them, to transmit and receive the
same signal. The remote end selects
signals from the two received signals.
With FD protection, the impact of the
fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l In SD mode, the system uses two
antennas that have a space distance
between them, to receive the same signal.
The equipment selects signals from the
two received signals. With SD protection,
the impact of the fading on signal
transmission is reduced.
l The FD mode and SD mode are
compatible with the HSB switching
function.
Revertive Mode Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Mode
Revertive Mode l This parameter specifies the revertive
mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
l When this parameter is set to Revertive
Mode, the NE that is in the switching
state releases the switching and enables
the former working channel to return to
the normal state some time after the
former working channel is restored to
normal.
l When this parameter is set to Non-
Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the
switching state keeps the current state
unchanged unless another switching
occurs even though the former working
channel is restored to normal.
parameter to Revertive Mode.
OptiX RTN 910
A-57
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-
restore (WTR) time.
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive
Mode.
default value.
Enable Reverse
Switching
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter indicates whether the
reverse switching function is enabled.
l When both the main IF board and the
standby IF board at the sink end report
service alarms, they send the alarms to the
source end by using the MWRDI
overhead in the microwave frame. When
this parameter at the source end is set to
Enabled and the reverse switching
conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection
switching occurs at the source end.
l This parameter is valid only when
Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to Enabled.
Working Board - - This parameter specifies the working board
of the protection group.
Protection Board - - This parameter specifies the protection
board of the protection group.

NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable Reverse
Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.
A.4.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Protection Group Parameters
Protection Group
ID
protection group.
Working Mode HSB
FD
SD
HSB l This parameter indicates the working
mode of the created IF 1+1 protection
group.
l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a
1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF
board and ODU at both ends of each hop
of a radio link to realize the protection.
l In FD mode, the system uses two
channels that have a frequency spacing
between them, to transmit and receive the
same signal. The remote end selects
signals from the two received signals.
With FD protection, the impact of the
fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l In SD mode, the system uses two
antennas that have a space distance
between them, to receive the same signal.
The equipment selects signals from the
two received signals. With SD protection,
the impact of the fading on signal
transmission is reduced.
l The FD mode and SD mode are
compatible with the HSB switching
function.
Revertive Mode Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Mode
Revertive Mode l This parameter indicates or specifies the
revertive mode of the protection group.
l When this parameter is set to Revertive
Mode, the NE that is in the switching state
releases the switching and enables the
former working channel to return to the
normal state some time after the former
working channel is restored to normal.
Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the
switching state keeps the current state
unchanged unless another switching
occurs even though the former working
channel is restored to normal.
parameter to Revertive Mode.
OptiX RTN 910
A-59
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter indicates or specifies the
WTR time.
occurs.
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive
Mode.
l It is recommended that you use the default
value.
Enable Reverse
Switching
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether the reverse switching function is
enabled.
l When both the main IF board and the
standby IF board at the sink end report
service alarms, they send the alarms to the
source end by using the MWRDI
overhead in the microwave frame. When
this parameter at the source end is set to
Enabled and the reverse switching
conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection
switching occurs at the source end.
Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.
Switching Status of
Device
- - l This parameter indicates the switching
state on the equipment side.
l Unknown is displayed when the
switching state on the channel side is not
queried or not obtained after a query.
Switching Status of
Channel
- - l This parameter indicates the switching
state on the channel side.
l Unknown is displayed when the
switching state on the channel side is not
queried or not obtained after a query.
Active Board of
Device
- - This parameter indicates the current
working board on the equipment side.
Active Board of
Channel
- - This parameter indicates the current
working board on the channel side.

NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable Reverse
Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Unit - - This parameter indicates the working board
and protection board.
Slot Mapping
Relation
- - This parameter indicates the names and
ports of the working board and protection
board.
Working Status of
Device
- - This parameter indicates the working state
on the equipment side.
Signal Status of
Channel
- - This parameter indicates the status of the
link signal.

A.4.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link
2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
OptiX RTN 910
A-61
Parameters for Configuring the IF
Work Mode 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK
2,4E1,3.5MHz,
16QAM
3,8E1,14MHz,QPS
K
4,8E1,7MHz,
16QAM
5,16E1,28MHz,QP
SK
6,16E1,14MHz,
16QAM
7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM
8,E3,28MHz,QPSK
9,E3,14MHz,
16QAM
10,22E1,14MHz,
32QAM
11,26E1,14MHz,
64QAM
12,32E1,14MHz,
128QAM
13,35E1,28MHz,
16QAM
14,44E1,28MHz,
32QAM
15,53E1,28MHz,
64QAM
- l This parameter indicates or specifies the
work mode of the radio link in "work
mode number, service capacity, channel
spacing, modulation mode" format.
planning information. The work modes
of the IF boards at the two ends of a radio
link must be the same.
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IFU2
board and the IFX2 board.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Enable AM Disabled
Enabled
Disable l When this parameter is set to Disabled,
the radio link uses only the specified
Modulation Mode.
the radio link uses the corresponding
channel conditions.
enabled.
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Channel Space 7M
14M
28M
56M
7M Channel Space indicates the channel
spacing of the corresponding radio link.
This parameter is set according to the
NOTE
Guaranteed
Capacity
Modulation
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
QPSK This parameter specifies the lowest-gain
service transmission bandwidth that the
Hybrid radio must ensure and the
This parameter is valid only when Enable
AM is set to Enabled.
NOTE
OptiX RTN 910
A-63
Full Capacity
Modulation
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
NOTE
Full Capacity Modulation must be higher than
Guaranteed E1 Capacity.
AM is set to Enabled.
NOTE
Manually Specified
Modulation
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
transmission.
AM is set to Disabled.
NOTE
Guaranteed E1
Capacity
- - l When Enable AM is set to Enabled, this
parameter depends on Channel Space
and Guaranteed E1 Capacity and is not
configurable.
l When Enable AM is set to Disabled, this
parameter depends on Channel Space
and Manually Specified Modulation
Mode and is not configurable.
NOTE
Specified Max E1
Capacity
- - This parameter specifies the number of E1
services that can be transmitted in the
Hybrid work mode.
NOTE
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter indicates or specifies the
ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a
radio link, this parameter is used to
prevent incorrect connections of radio
links between sites.
l If the value of Received Radio Link ID
does not match the preset value of Link
ID at the local end, the local end inserts
the AIS signal to the downstream
direction of the service. At the same time,
the local end reports MW_LIM alarm to
the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do
not match.
l Each radio link of an NE should have a
unique link ID, and the link IDs at both
ends of a radio link should be the same.
Received Link ID 1 to 4094 - This parameter indicates the received ID of
the radio link.
NOTE
When the radio link becomes faulty, this
parameter is displayed as an invalid value.
ATPC Enable
Status
Disabled
Enabled
ATPC function is enabled. If the APTC
function is enabled, the transmit power of
the transmitter automatically varies
within the specified ATPC range
according to the change of the RSL at the
receive end.
attributes.
ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm)
receive power.
OptiX RTN 910
A-65
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
-35.0 to -90.0 -70.0
(dBm) is set to Disabled.
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Enabled
Disabled
enabled.
link.
Threshold(dBm).
Enable IEEE-1588
Timeslot
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled If the OptiX RTN 910 is interconnected with
the packet radio equipment, this parameter
is set to Enabled. Otherwise, this parameter
is set to Disabled.
NOTE

OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Parameters for Configuring the ODU
TX Frequency
(MHz)
the channel central frequency.
less than the sum of the lower TX
between the upper TX frequency limit
supported by the ODU and a half of the
channel spacing.
frequencies of both the ends of a radio
link should be one T/R spacing.
Range of TX
Frequency(MHz)
- - l This parameter indicates the range of the
transmit frequency of the ODU.
l The Range of Frequency(MHz)
depends on the specifications of the
ODU.
Actual TX
Frequency(MHz)
- - This parameter indicates the actual transmit
frequency of the ODU.
Actual RX
Frequency(MHz)
- - This parameter indicates the actual receive
OptiX RTN 910
A-67
T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter specifies the spacing
between the transmit frequency and the
receive frequency of an ODU to prevent
interference between them.
l If Station Type of the ODU is TX high,
the TX frequency is one T/R spacing
higher than the receive frequency. If
Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the
TX frequency is one T/R spacing lower
than the receive frequency.
spacing, set this parameter to 0, indicating
that the T/R spacing supported by the
ODU is used.
set to the same value at both the ends of
a radio link.
Actual T/R
Spacing(MHz)
- - This parameter indicates the actual T/R
spacing of the ODU.
TX Power(dBm) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the
exceeds the nominal power range of the
ODU.
l This parameter cannot take a value
greater than the preset value of
Maximum Transmit Power(dBm).
radio link.
TX High
Threshold(dBm)
- - l If the value of the actual transmit power
of the ODU is greater than the preset
value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the
system separately records the duration
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
TX Low Threshold
(dBm)
- - when the value of the actual transmit
power of the ODU is greater than the
preset value of TX High Threshold
(dBm) and the duration when the value
of the actual transmit power of the ODU
is greater than the preset value of TX Low
Threshold(dBm) in the performance
events.
l If the value of the actual transmit power
of the ODU is greater than the preset
value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) and
is lower than the preset value of TX High
Threshold(dBm), the system records the
duration when the value of the actual
transmit power of the ODU is greater than
the preset value of TX Low Threshold
(dBm) in the performance events.
l If the value of the actual transmit power
of the ODU is lower than the preset value
of TX Low Threshold(dBm), the system
does not record it.
l TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX Low
Threshold(dBm) are valid only when the
RX High
Threshold(dBm)
- - l If the value of the actual receive power of
the ODU is lower than the preset value of
RX Low Threshold(dBm), the system
records the duration when the value of the
actual receive power of the ODU is lower
than the preset value of RX Low
Threshold(dBm) and duration when the
value of the actual transmit power of the
ODU is lower than the preset value of RX
High Threshold(dBm)in the
performance events.
l If the value of the actual receive power of
the ODU is greater than the preset value
of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and is
lower than the preset value of RX High
Threshold(dBm), the system records the
duration when the value of the actual
receive power of the ODU is Lower than
the preset value of RX High Threshold
(dBm) in the performance events.
l If the value of the actual receive power of
the ODU is greater than the preset value
OptiX RTN 910
A-69
RX Low Threshold
(dBm)
- -
of RX High Threshold(dBm), the
system does not record it.
Power to Be
Received(dBm)
used in the antenna alignment stage. After
this parameter is set, the NE
l This parameter needs to be according to
the planning.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)
modulation module.
exceed this value.
Range of TX
Power(dBm)
- - This parameter indicates the range of the
transmit power of the ODU.
Actual TX Power
(dBm)
- - l This parameter indicates the actual
l If the ATPC function is enabled, the
queried actual transmit power may be
different from the preset value.
Actual RX Power
(dBm)
power of the ODU.
TX Status Unmute
Mute
Unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the
l When this parameter is set to Mute, the
l When this parameter is set to Unmute,
the ODU can normally transmit and
receive microwave signals.
you set this parameter to unmute.
Actual TX Status Unmute
Mute
- This parameter indicates the actual transmit
status of the ODU.

Equipment Information
Frequency(GHz) - - This parameter indicates the frequency band
where the ODU operates.
OptiX RTN 910
A-71
Equipment Type - - l This parameter indicates the equipment
type of the ODU.
l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission
capacity only and is irrelevant to the type
of transmitted service.
Station Type - - l This parameter indicates whether the
ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low
station.
l The transmit frequency of a Tx high
station is one T/R spacing higher than the
transmit frequency of a Tx low station.
Produce SN - - This parameter indicates the manufacturing
serial number and the manufacturer code of
the ODU.
Transmission
Power Type
- - This parameter indicates the level of the
output power of the ODU.

A.5 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).
A.5.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.
A.5.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP
This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.
A.5.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear
MS from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Protection Type 1+1 Protection
1:N Protection
1+1 Protection l This parameter specifies the protection
type of the linear MSP group.
l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one
working channel and one protection
channel are required. When the working
channel fails, the service is switched from
the working channel to the protection
channel.
l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working
channels and one protection channel are
required. Normal services are transmitted
on the working channels and extra
services are transmitted on the protection
channel. When one working channel
fails, the services are switched from this
working channel to the protection
channel, and the extra services are
interrupted.
l If extra services need to be transmitted or
several working channels are required,
select 1:N Protection.
Switching Mode Single-Ended
Switching
Dual-Ended
Switching
Single-Ended
Switching (1+1
Protection)
Dual-Ended
Switching (1:N
Protection)
l This parameter specifies the switching
mode of the linear MSP.
l In single-ended mode, the switching
occurs only at one end and the state of the
other end remains unchanged.
l In dual-ended mode, the switching occurs
at both ends at the same time.
l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N
Protection, Switching Mode can be set
to Dual-Ended Switching only.
OptiX RTN 910
A-73
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive
Revertive
Non-Revertive (1+1
Protection)
Revertive (1:N
Protection)
l This parameter specifies the revertive
mode of the linear MSP.
l When this parameter is set to Revertive,
the NE that is in the switching state
Revertive, the NE that is in the switching
state keeps the current state unchanged
unless another switching occurs even
though the former working channel is
restored to normal.
parameter to Revertive.
Protection, Revertive Mode can be set
to Revertive only.
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the WTR time.
preset WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
default value.
Protocol Type New Protocol
Restructure Protocol
New Protocol l The new protocol is supported at the early
stage, and the mainstream protocol
version is used currently.
l The restructure protocol optimizes the
new protocol and provides better
measures to protect the new protocol,
thus ensuring that the new protocol runs
in a better manner.
l The new protocol is more mature, and the
restructure protocol complies with the
standard. It is recommended that you use
the new protocol.
l You must ensure that the interconnected
NEs run the protocols of the same type.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
SD Enable Enabled
Disabled
whether the switching at the SD alarm of
the linear MSP is enabled.
the B2_SD alarm is considered as a
switching condition.

Select Mapping
Mode
West Working Unit
West Protection
Unit
West Working Unit This parameter specifies the mapping
direction of the linear MSP.
Select Mapping
Mode
- - l This parameter specifies the mapping
board and port in the mapping direction.
l If the protection type is set to 1+1
Protection, only one line port can be
mapped as West Working Unit.
l Only one line port can be mapped as West
Protection Unit.
l The line port mapped as West Protection
Unit and the line port mapped as West
Working Unit should be configured for
different boards if possible.
Mapped Board - - This parameter indicates the preset slot
mapping relations, including the mapping
direction and the corresponding mapping
mode.

A.5.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP
This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS
from the Function Tree.
OptiX RTN 910
A-75
Protection Group
ID
protection group.
Protection Type 1+1 Protection
1:N Protection
- l This parameter indicates the protection
type of the linear MSP group.
l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one
working channel and one protection
channel are required. When the working
channel fails, the service is switched from
the working channel to the protection
channel.
l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working
channels and one protection channel are
required. Normal services are transmitted
on the working channels and extra
services are transmitted on the protection
channel. When one working channel
fails, the services are switched from this
working channel to the protection
channel, and the extra services are
interrupted.
l If extra services need to be transmitted or
several working channels are required,
select 1:N Protection.
Switching Mode Single-Ended
Switching
Dual-Ended
Switching
Single-Ended
Switching (1+1
Protection)
Dual-Ended
Switching (1:N
Protection)
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
switching mode of the linear MSP.
l In single-ended mode, the switching
occurs only at one end and the state of the
other end remains unchanged.
l In dual-ended mode, the switching occurs
at both ends at the same time.
Protection, Switching Mode can be set
to Dual-Ended Switching only.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Revertive
Non-Revertive (1+1
Protection)
Revertive (1:N
Protection)
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
revertive mode of the linear MSP.
l When this parameter is set to Revertive,
the NE that is in the switching state
Revertive, the NE that is in the switching
state keeps the current state unchanged
unless another switching occurs even
though the former working channel is
restored to normal.
Protection, Revertive Mode can be set
to Revertive only.
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter indicates or specifies the
WTR time.
occurs.
default value.
SD Enable Enabled
Disabled
whether the reverse switching function is
enabled.
the B2_SD alarm is considered as a
switching condition.
OptiX RTN 910
A-77
Protocol Type New Protocol
Restructure Protocol
New Protocol l The new protocol is supported at the early
stage, and the mainstream protocol
version is used currently.
l The restructure protocol optimizes the
new protocol and provides better
measures to protect the new protocol,
thus ensuring that the new protocol runs
in a better manner.
l You must ensure that the interconnected
NEs run the protocols of the same type.
l The new protocol is more mature, and the
restructure protocol complies with the
standard. It is recommended that you use
the new protocol.
Protocol Status - - This parameter indicates the protocol status
of the linear MSP.

Protection Unit - - This parameter indicates that which of the
units, namely, the west protection unit or the
west working unit, is currently in the
protection status.
West Line -
-
- This parameter indicates the west protection
unit and the west working unit of the linear
MSP.
West Switching
Status
- - This parameter indicates the switching
status of the line.
Protected Unit - - This parameter indicates the working
channel protected by the current protection
channel.
Remote/Local End
Indication
Local
Remote
- When Switching Mode is set to Dual-
Ended Switching, the central office end
that issues the switching command is
displayed.

A.6 SDH/PDH Service Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.
A.6.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point cross-
connections.
A.6.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.
A.6.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into
SNCP Services
This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP
services.
A.6.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting SNCP Services Into
Normal Services
This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting SNCP services into normal
services.
A.6.5 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely,
configuring cross-connections).
A.6.6 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.
A.6.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point cross-
connections.
Navigation Path
l Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
l Click Create.
Parameters
Level VC12
VC3
VC4
VC12 l This parameter specifies the level of the
service to be created.
l If the service is an E1 service or a data
service that is bound with VC-12
channels, set this parameter to VC12.
l If the service is a data service that is
bound with VC-3 channels, set this
parameter to VC3.
l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass
through the NE, set this parameter to
VC4.
OptiX RTN 910
A-79
Direction Bidirectional
Unidirectional
Bidirectional l When this parameter is set to
Unidirectional, create only the cross-
connections from the service source to the
service sink.
l When this parameter is set to
Bidirectional, create the cross-
connections from the service source to the
service sink and the cross-connections
from the service sink to the service
source.
you set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Source Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of the
service source.
Source VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number of
the VC-4 channel where the service
source is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when
Source Slot is set to the slot of the
tributary board.
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
- - l This parameter indicates the timeslot
range of the service source.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Sink Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of the
service sink.
Sink VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number of
the VC-4 channel where the service sink
is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when Sink
Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
- - l This parameter specifies the timeslot
range of the service sink.
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Activate
Immediately
Yes
No
Yes l This parameter specifies whether to
immediately activate the configured
service.
l To immediately deliver the configured
SDH service to the NE, set this parameter
to Yes.

A.6.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP
Service Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.
Navigation Path
l Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
l Click Create SNCP Service.
Service Type SNCP SNCP This parameter indicates that the type of the
service to be created is SNCP.
OptiX RTN 910
A-81
Direction Bidirectional
Unidirectional
Bidirectional l When this parameter is set to
Unidirectional, create only the cross-
connections from the SNCP service
source to the SNCP service sink.
l When this parameter is set to
Bidirectional, create the cross-
connections from the SNCP service
source to the service sink and the cross-
connections from the SNCP service sink
to the service source.
you set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Level VC12
VC3
VC4
VC12 l This parameter specifies the level of the
SCNP service to be created.
parameter to VC3.
VC4.
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0 to 100 0 l This parameter specifies the duration of
the hold-off time.
l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching
can be performed on the NE after a delay
of time to prevent the situation where the
NE performs SNCP switching and other
protection switching at the same time.
l If multiple link-based protection
schemes, such as SNCP, 1+1 protection,
and N+1 protection, are available at the
same time, the hold-off time needs to be
set to a duration that is longer than the
switching duration for the multiple link-
based protection schemes.
l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it
is recommended that you set the hold-off
time to 0.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Revertive
Non-Revertive l This parameter specifies whether to
switch the service to the original working
channel after the fault is rectified.
l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the
service is switched from the protection
channel to the original working channel.
If this parameter is set to Non-
Revertive, the service is not switched
from the protection channel to the
original working channel.
occurs.
default value.
service source.
source is located.
tributary board.
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
service sink.
OptiX RTN 910
A-83
is located.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Configure SNCP
Tangent Ring
Selected
Deselected
Deselected l After the Configure SNCP Tangent
Ring checkbox is selected, you can
quickly configure the SNCP service for
the SNCP ring tangent point.
you do not select this checkbox.
Activate
Immediately
Selected
Deselected
Selected l This parameter specifies whether to
SNCP service.
l After the Activate Immediately
checkbox is selected, you can
immediately activate the created SNCP
service.

A.6.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service
Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services
This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP
services.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
2. In Cross-Connection, select the configured SDH service. Right-click and choose Expand
to Unidirectional from the shortcut menu.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
3. Select the expanded unidirectional service. Right-click and choose Convert to SNCP
Service from the shortcut menu.
Service Type SNCP SNCP This parameter indicates that the type of the
service to be created is SNCP.
Direction Unidirectional Unidirectional This parameter indicates the direction of the
SNCP service.
Level VC12
VC3
VC4
VC12 l This parameter indicates the level of the
SNCP service.
parameter to VC3.
VC4.
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
the hold-off time.
time to 0.
OptiX RTN 910
A-85
Revertive
channel after the fault is rectified. If this
parameter is set to "Revertive", the
occurs.
default value.
service source.
source is located.
tributary board.
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
service sink.
is located.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Configure SNCP
Tangent Ring
Selected
Deselected
Activate
Immediately
Selected
Deselected
SNCP service.
checkbox is selected, you can
immediately activate the created SNCP
service.

A.6.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service
Configuration_Converting SNCP Services Into Normal Services
This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting SNCP services into normal
services.
Navigation Path
1. Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
OptiX RTN 910
A-87
2. In Auto-Created Cross-Connection, select the configured service. Right-click and choose
Convert to Non-Protection Service from the shortcut menu.
Service Type SNCP SNCP l This parameter specifies the SNCP
service to be created.
parameter to VC3.
VC4.
Direction Unidirecitonal Unidirecitonal This parameter indicates the direction of the
SNCP service.
Level VC12
VC3
VC4
VC12 l This parameter indicates the level of the
SNCP service.
parameter to VC3.
VC4.
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
the hold-off time.
time to 0.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Revertive Mode Revertive
Non-Revertive
channel after the fault is rectified. If this
parameter is set to "Revertive", the
WTR Time(ms) - - l This parameter specifies the WTR time.
occurs.
l WTR Time(ms) can be set only when
default value.
service sink.
source is located.
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
OptiX RTN 910
A-89
service sink.
is located.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Configure SNCP
Tangent Ring
Selected
Deselected
Activate
Immediately
Selected
Deselected
SNCP service.
checkbox is selected, the SNCP service is
activated immediately.

A.6.5 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely,
configuring cross-connections).
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Cross-Connection Parameters
Level VC12
VC3
VC4
- l This parameter indicates the level of the
service.
channels, VC12 is displayed.
bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is
displayed.
through the NE, VC4 is displayed.
Source Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the
service source.
Source Timeslot/
Path
- - This parameter indicates the timeslot or
timeslot range of the service source.
Sink Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the
source sink.
Sink Timeslot/
Path
timeslot range of the service sink.
Activation Status Yes
No
- This parameter indicates whether to activate
the service.
Bound Group
Number
parameter.
Lockout Status - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
parameter.
Trail Name - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
parameter.
Schedule No. - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
parameter.

OptiX RTN 910
A-91
Parameters for Automatically Generated Cross-Connections
Level VC12
VC3
VC4
service.
displayed.
Source Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the
service source.
Source Timeslot/
Path
timeslot range of the service source.
Sink Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the
source sink.
Sink Timeslot/
Path
timeslot range of the service sink.
Lockout Status - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
parameter.
Trail Name - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
parameter.
Schedule No. - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
parameter.

A.6.6 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service
Service Type SNCP - This parameter indicates the service
protection type of the protection group.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Source - - This parameter indicates the timeslots where
the working service source and protection
service source of the protection group are
located.
Sink - - This parameter indicates the timeslots where
the working service sink and protection
service sink of the protection group are
located.
Level VC12
VC3
VC4
service.
displayed.
Current Status - - This parameter indicates the current
switching mode and switching status of the
services of the protection group.
Non-Revertive
revertive mode of the service.
l This parameter determines whether to
switch the service from the protection
channel to the original working channel
after the fault is rectified.
OptiX RTN 910
A-93
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 - l This parameter indicates or specifies the
WTR time.
occurs.
default value.
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0 to 100 - l This parameter indicates or specifies the
duration of the hold-off time.
time to 0.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Initiation
Condition
TIM
EXC
SD
UNEQ
NULL l This parameter indicates or specifies the
conditions that trigger the protection
switching of the service.
l If TIM is selected, the SNCP service
considers the HP_TIM or LP_TIM alarm
as an automatic switching condition.
l If EXC is selected, the SNCP service
considers the B3_EXC or BIP_EXC
alarm as an automatic switching
condition.
l If SD is selected, the SNCP service
considers the B3_SD or BIP_SD alarm as
an automatic switching condition.
l If UNEQ is selected, the SNCP service
considers the HP_UNEQ or LP_UNEQ
alarm as an automatic switching
condition.
l It is recommended that you set Initiation
Condition to the same condition for
Working Service and Protection
Service.
l The protection switching conditions in
Initiation Condition are optional values
not included in the default values, and
they are set according to the planning
information.
Trail Status - - This parameter indicates the status of the
working service and protection service of
the protection group.
Service Grouping - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
parameter.
Group Type - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
parameter.
Active Channel - - This parameter indicates whether the
working service or protection service is
currently received by the protection group.

A.7 Clock Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.
A.7.2 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet
OptiX RTN 910
A-95
This topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet.
A.7.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality
This topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality.
A.7.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control.
A.7.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function.
A.7.6 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration.
A.7.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of a clock source.
A.7.8 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source
This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clock
source.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Clock Source Priority.
2. Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Parameters
Clock Source - - l External clock source 1
indicates the external
clock source at the
CLK or TIME port on
the CSTA, CSHA,
CSHB, or CSHC board
in physical slot 1.
l The internal clock
source is always at the
lowest priority and
indicates that the NE
works in the free-run
mode.
l The clock sources and
the corresponding
clock source priority
levels are determined
according to the clock
synchronization
schemes.
External Clock Source
Mode
2Mbit/s
2MHz
2Mbit/s l This parameter
indicates the type of the
external clock source
signal.
according to the
external clock signal.
In normal cases, the
external clock signal is
a 2 Mbit/s signal.
OptiX RTN 910
A-97
Synchronous Status Byte SA4 to SA8 SA4 l This parameter is valid
only when External
Clock Source Mode is
set to 2Mbit/s.
l This parameter
indicates which bit of
the TS0 in odd frames
of the external clock
signal is used to
transmit the SSM.
l This parameter needs to
be set only when the
SSM or extended SSM
is enabled. In normal
cases, the external
clock sources use the
SA4 to transmit the
SSM.
Clock Source Priority
Sequence (1 is the
highest)
- - Displays the priority
sequence of clock sources.
1 indicates the highest
clock source priority.

A.7.2 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet
This topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet.
Navigation Path
Clock Subnet Configuration.
2. Click the Clock Subnet tab.
Parameters for Setting a Clock Subnet
Affiliated Subnet 0 to 255 0 l This parameter is used
when the clock subnet
needs to be created on
the NMS.
l The NEs that trace the
same clock source
should be allocated
with the same clock
subnet ID.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Protection Status Start Extended SSM
Protocol
Start Standard SSM
Protocol
Stop SSM Protocol
Stop SSM Protocol l The SSM protocol is a
scheme used for
synchronous
management on an
SDH network and
indicates that the SSM
is passed by the lower
four bits of the S1 byte
and can be exchanged
between the nodes. The
SSM protocol ensures
that the equipment
automatically selects
the clock source of the
highest quality and
highest priority, thus
preventing mutual
clock tracing.
l After the standard SSM
protocol is started, the
NE first performs the
protection switching on
the clock source
according to the clock
quality level
information provided
by the S1 byte. If the
quality level of the
clock source is the
same, the NE then
performs the protection
switching according to
the clock priority table.
That is, the NE selects
an unlocked clock
source that is of the
highest quality and
highest priority from all
the current available
clock sources as the
clock source to be
synchronized and
traced by the local
station.
l If the SSM protocol is
stopped, it indicates
that the S1 byte is not
used. The NE selects
and switches a clock
OptiX RTN 910
A-99
source only according
to the sequence
specified in the priority
table. The clock source
of the highest priority is
used as the clock source
to be traced.
l After the SSM protocol
is stopped, each NE
performs the protection
switching on the clock
according to the preset
priority table of the
clock source only when
the clock source of a
higher priority is lost.
Clock Source - - This parameter indicates
the clock source that is
configured for an NE. In
Clock Source Priority,
you can set whether to add
or delete a clock source.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Clock Source ID (None)
1 to 15
(None) l This parameter is valid
only when the extended
SSM protocol is
started.
l Clock source IDs are
allocated for the
following clock
sources only:
External clock
source
Internal clock source
of the node that
accesses the external
clock sources
Internal clock source
of the joint node of a
ring and a chain or
the joint node of two
rings
Line clock source
that enters the ring
when the intra-ring
line clock source is
configured at the
joint node of a ring
and a chain or the
joint node of two
rings

A.7.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality
This topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Clock Quality tab.
OptiX RTN 910
A-101
Parameters for Clock Source Quality
the name of the
configured clock source.
In Clock Source
Priority, you can set
whether to add or delete a
clock source.
Configuration Quality Unknown
Synchronization Quality
G.811 Clock Signal
G.812 Transit Clock
Signal
G.812 Local Clock Signal
G.813 SDH Equipment
Timing Source (SETS)
Signal
Do Not Use For
Synchronization
Automatic Extraction
Automatic Extraction This parameter specifies
the quality level that is
configured for the clock
source. This function is
required only in a special
scenario or in a test.
Generally, this parameter
need not be set.
Clock Quality - - This parameter indicates
the clock source quality
signal received by the NE.
The NE extracts the clock
source quality signal from
the S1 byte of each clock
source.

Parameters for Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level
the name of the NE.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Manual Setting of 0
Quality Level
Do Not Use For
Synchronization
G.811 Reference Clock
Between G.811 Reference
Clock and G.812 Transit
Clock
G.812 Transit Clock
Between G.812 Transit
Clock and G.812 Local
Clock
G.812 Local Clock
Between G.812 Local
Clock and synchronous
equipment timing source
(SETS)
SETS Clock
Between synchronous
equipment timing source
(SETS) and quality
unavailable
Do Not Use For
Synchronization
This parameter specifies
the clock quality whose
level is manually set to
zero.
l Do Not Use For
Synchronization: the
notification
information in the
reverse direction of the
selected
synchronization clock
source to avoid direct
mutual locking of
adjacent NEs.
l G.811 Reference
Clock: the clock signal
specified in ITU-T G.
811.
l Between G.811
Reference Clock and
G.812 Transit Clock:
lower than the quality
level of the clock signal
specified in ITU-T G.
811 but higher than the
transit exchange clock
signal specified in ITU-
T G.812.
l G.812 Transit Clock:
the transit exchange
clock signal specified
in ITU-T G.812.
l Between G.812 Transit
Clock and G.812 Local
Clock: lower than the
transit exchange clock
T G.812 but higher than
the quality level of the
local exchange clock
T G.812.
l G.812 Local Clock: the
local exchange clock
T G.812.
OptiX RTN 910
A-103
l Between G.812 Local
Clock and synchronous
equipment timing
source (SETS): lower
than the quality level of
the local exchange
clock signal specified
in ITU-T G.812 but
higher than the quality
of the SETS.
l SETS Clock: the clock
signal of the SETS.
l Between synchronous
equipment timing
source (SETS) and
quality unavailable:
lower than the quality
of the SETS but higher
than the quality level
unavailable in the
synchronous timing
source.

A.7.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output
Control
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control.
Navigation Path
2. Click the SSM Output Control tab.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Parameters
Line Port - - l This parameter
indicates the name of
the line clock port.
l Line Port: indicates
the SSM quality
information output port
of the current available
line clock source and
the external clock
source. This output port
can transmit the quality
information of the
clock source by
outputting the S1 byte
to the downstream NE.
Control Status Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter is valid
only when the SSM
protocol or the
extended SSM protocol
is started.
l This parameter
indicates whether the
SSM is output at the
line port.
l When the line port is
connected to an NE in
the same clock subnet,
set this parameter to
Enabled. Otherwise,
Disabled.

A.7.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID
Enabling Status
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Clock ID Status tab.
OptiX RTN 910
A-105
Parameters
Line Port - - l This parameter
indicates the name of
the line clock port.
l Line Port: indicates
the SSM quality
information output port
of the current available
line clock source and
the external clock
source. This output port
can transmit the quality
information of the
clock source by
outputting the S1 byte
to the downstream NE.
Enabled Status Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter is valid
only when the extended
SSM protocol is
started.
l This parameter
indicates whether the
clock source ID is
output at the line port.
l If the line ports are
connected to the NEs in
the same clock subnet
and if the extended
SSM protocol is started
on the opposite NE, this
parameter is set to
Enabled. Otherwise,
Disabled.

A.7.6 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock
Source Restoration Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration.
Navigation Path
Clock Source Switching.
2. Click the Clock Source Reversion Parameter tab.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Parameters
the name of the NE.
Higher Priority Clock
Source Reversion Mode
Auto-Revertive
Non-Revertive
Auto-Revertive l When the quality of a
higher-priority clock
source degrades, the
NE automatically
switches the clock
source to a lower-
priority clock source. If
Auto-Revertive, the
NE automatically
switches the clock
source to the higher-
priority clock source
when this higher-
priority clock source
restores. If this
parameter is set to Non-
Revertive, the NE does
not automatically
switch the clock source
to the higher-priority
clock source when this
higher-priority clock
source restores.
l Correct setting of
Clock Source
Switching Condition
ensures the reliability
of the clock source
switching. To improve
the clock quality, select
Auto-Revertive.
Otherwise, to prevent
jitter of the clock,
generally, it is
Non-Revertive.
OptiX RTN 910
A-107
Clock Source WTR
Time(min.)
specifies the duration
from the time when the
clock source
restoration is detected
to the time when the
clock source switching
is triggered. This
parameter is used to
avoid frequent
switching of the clock
source due to
unstability of the clock
source state within a
short time.
only when Higher
Priority Clock Source
Reversion Mode is set
to Auto-Revertive.

A.7.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock
Source Switching
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of a clock source.
Navigation Path
Clock Source Switching.
2. Click the Clock Source Switching tab.
Parameters
the name of the clock
source.
Effective Status Valid
Invalid
whether the clock source
is valid.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Lock Status Lock
Unlock
- l This parameter
specifies the locking
status of the clock
source in the priority
table.
l Lock: A clock source in
the priority table is in
the locked state. The
clock source in the
locked state cannot be
switched.
l Unlock: A clock source
in the priority table is in
the unlocked state. The
clock source in the
unlocked state can be
switched.
Switching Source - - This parameter indicates
the clock source to be
traced by the NE after the
switching.
Switching Status Normal
Manual Switching
Forced Switching
the switching status of the
current clock source.

A.7.8 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the
External Clock Source
This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clock
source.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Phase-Locked Source Output by External Clock.
Parameters
2M Phase-Locked
Source Number
External Clock Source 1 - This parameter indicates
the number of the external
clock source output of the
NE.
OptiX RTN 910
A-109
External Clock Output
Mode
2Mbit/s
2MHz
2Mbit/s l This parameter
specifies the mode of
the output clock.
be set according to the
requirements of the
interconnected
equipment. Generally,
the output external
clock signal is a 2 Mbit/
s signal.
External Clock Output
Timeslot
SA4 to SA8
ALL
ALL l This parameter is valid
only when External
Clock Output Mode is
set to 2Mbit/s.
l This parameter
indicates which bit of
the TS0 in odd frames
of the output clock
signal is used to
transmit the SSM.
to ALL, it indicates
that all the bits of the
TS0 are used to
transmit the SSM.
you use the default
value.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
External Source Output
Threshold
Threshold Disabled
Not Inferior to G.813
SETS Signal
Local Signal
Transit Clock Signal
Clock Signal
Threshold Disabled l This parameter
specifies the lowest
quality of the output
clock. If the clock
quality is lower than the
value of this parameter,
it indicates that the
external clock source
does not output any
clock signal.
to Threshold
Disabled, it indicates
that the external clock
source always outputs
the clock signal.
you use the default
value.
2M Phase-Locked
Source Fail Condition
No Failure Condition
AIS
LOF
AIS OR LOF
No Failure Condition l This parameter
specifies the failure
condition of the 2 Mbit/
s phase-locked clock
source.
you use the default
value.
2M Phase-Locked
Source Fail Action
Shut Down Output
2M Output S1 Byte
Unavailable
Send AIS
Shut Down Output l This parameter is valid
only when 2M Phase-
Locked Source Fail
Condition is not set to
No Failure Condition.
l This parameter
specifies the operation
of the 2 Mbit/s phase-
locked loop (PLL)
when the 2 Mbit/s
phase-locked clock
source meets the failure
conditions.
you use the default
value.

OptiX RTN 910
A-111
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock
Synchronization Status.
Parameters
the name of the NE.
NE Clock Working
Mode
- - This parameter indicates
the working mode of the
NE clock.
S1 Byte Synchronization
Quality Information
the synchronization
quality information of the
S1 byte.
S1 Byte Synchronous
Source
the clock synchronization
source of the S1 byte.
Synchronous Source - - This parameter indicates
the synchronization
source.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Data Output Method in
Holdover Mode
Normal Data Output
Mode
Keep the Latest Data
Normal Data Output
Mode
l When all the reference
timing signals are lost,
the slave clock changes
to the holdover mode.
At this time, the slave
clock works based on
the latest frequency
information stored
before the reference
timing signals are lost.
Then, the frequency of
the oscillator drifts
slowly to ensure that
the offset between the
frequency of the slave
clock and the reference
frequency is very
small. As a result, the
impact caused by the
drift is limited within
the specified
requirement.
l Normal Data Output
Mode: The slave clock
works based on the
latest frequency
information stored
timing signals are lost,
and the holdover
duration depends on the
size of the phase-
locked clock register on
the equipment. The
holdover duration can
be up to 24 hours.
l Keep the Latest Data:
The slave clock works
in holdover mode all
the time based on the
latest frequency
information stored
timing signals are lost.

A.8 Parameters for Ethernet Services
This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.
OptiX RTN 910
A-113
A.8.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation
This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line)
service.
A.8.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service
This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.
A.8.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.
A.8.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (E-
LAN) service.
A.8.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service
This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.
A.8.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.
A.8.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation
This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line)
service.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New. The New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed.
Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - This parameter specifies
the ID of the E-Line
service.
Service Name - - This parameter specifies
the name of the E-Line
service.
Direction UNI-UNI
UNI-NNI
NNI-NNI
UNI-UNI l This parameter
specifies the direction
of the E-Line service.
according to the
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
BPDU Not Transparently
Transmitted
Transparently
Transmitted
Not Transparently
Transmitted
l This parameter
specifies the
transparent
transmission ID of the
bridge protocol data
unit (BPDU) packets. It
is used to indicate
whether the E-Line
service transparently
transmits the BPDU
packets.
l If the BPDU packets
are used as the service
packets and
transparently
transmitted to the
opposite end, set this
parameter to
Transparently
Transmitted.
l In other cases, set this
parameter to Not
Transparently
Transmitted.
according to the
MTU(byte) - - The OptiX RTN 910 does
not support this
parameter.
Service Tag Role - - The OptiX RTN 910 does
not support this
parameter.
OptiX RTN 910
A-115
Source Port - - l This parameter
specifies the port of the
service source.
only when Direction is
set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI.
l Before setting this
parameter, check and
ensure that the
attributes in Ethernet
Interface of the port
are set correctly and are
the same as the
l The value of this
parameter cannot be the
same as the value of
Sink Port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
according to the
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Source VLANs 1 to 4094 - l This parameter can be
set to null, a number, or
several numbers. When
setting this parameter
to several numbers, use
the comma (,) to
separate the discrete
numbers, or use the
endash (-) to represent
a consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.
set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI.
l The number of VLANs
must be the same value
of Sink VLANs.
to null, all the services
at the source port are
used as the service
source.
l If this parameter is not
set to null, only the
service that contains
the VLAN ID at the
source port can be used
as the service source.
Bearer Type QinQ Link QinQ Link l Uses the QinQ link to
carry the E-Line
service.
set to UNI-NNI.
QinQ Link ID - - l Selects the QinQ link
ID.
l A QinQ link ID is
preset in QinQ Link.
set to UNI-NNI.
OptiX RTN 910
A-117
Bearer Type 1 QinQ Link QinQ Link l Uses the QinQ link to
carry the E-Line
service.
set to NNI-NNI.
QinQ Link ID 1 - - l Selects the QinQ link
ID of the first QinQ
link.
set to NNI-NNI.
l The QinQ link ID is
Bearer Type 2 QinQ Link QinQ Link l Uses the QinQ link to
carry the E-Line
service.
set to NNI-NNI.
QinQ Link ID 2 - - l Selects the QinQ link
ID of the second QinQ
link.
set to NNI-NNI.
l The QinQ link ID is
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Sink Port - - l This parameter
specifies the port of the
service sink.
l Before setting this
parameter, check and
ensure that the
attributes in Ethernet
Interface of the port
are set correctly and are
the same as the
l The value of this
parameter cannot be the
Source Port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
according to the
OptiX RTN 910
A-119
Sink VLANs 1 to 4094 - l This parameter can be
the comma (,) to
numbers, or use the
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
l The number of VLANs
must be the same value
of Source VLANs.
at the sink port are used
as the service sink.
service that contains
the VLAN ID at the
sink port can be used as
the service sink.

A.8.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service
This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - This parameter indicates
the ID of the E-Line
service.
Service Name - - This parameter indicates
or specifies the name of
the E-Line service.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Source Node - - This parameter indicates
the source node.
Sink Node - - This parameter indicates
the sink node.
not support this
parameter.
MTU(byte) 1518 to 9600 - The OptiX RTN 910 does
not support this
parameter.
BPDU Not Transparently
Transmitted
Transparently
Transmitted
- l This parameter
indicates the
transparent
transmission tag of the
bridge protocol data
unit (BPDU) packets.
This parameter is used
to indicate whether the
Ethernet line
transparently transmits
the BPDU packets.
are used as the service
packets and
transparently
transmitted to the
opposite end, set this
parameter to
Transparently
Transmitted.
are used as the protocol
packets to compute the
spanning tree topology
of the network, set this
parameter to Not
Transparently
Transmitted.
Active Active
Inactive
whether E-Line service is
active.

OptiX RTN 910
A-121
Parameters for the User Network Interface (UNI)
Port - - This parameter indicates
the UNI port.
VLANs 1 to 4094 - This parameter indicates
or specifies the VLAN ID
of the UNI port.
l This parameter can be
the comma (,) to
numbers, or use the
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
process of creating an
E-Line service.
of the UNI work as the
service source or
service sink.
services of the UNI port
whose VLAN IDs are
included in the set
value of this parameter
work as the service
source or service sink.

OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Parameters for the Network Node Interface (NNI)
QinQ Link ID 1 to 4294967295 - l This parameter
indicates the QinQ link
ID of the QinQ link
connected to the NNI
port.
set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
Port - - l This parameter
indicates the NNI port.
set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
S-VLAN ID - - l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the VLAN ID of the
NNI port.
set to UNI-NNI or
NNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
l This parameter is preset
in QinQ Link.

Parameters for the Port Attributes
the QinQ link ID of the
QinQ link connected to
the port.
OptiX RTN 910
A-123
Enable Port - - l This parameter
indicates whether to
enable the port.
in General Attributes
of Ethernet Interface.
Encapsulation Type Null
802.1Q
QinQ
- l This parameter
indicates the
encapsulation type of
the port.
set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
to Null, the port
the received packets.
to 802.1Q, the port
identifies the packets
that comply with the
IEEE 802.1Q standard.
to QinQ, the port
IEEE 802.1 QinQ
standard.
in General Attributes
of Ethernet Interface.
TAG Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
l This parameter
indicates the tag of the
port.
in Layer 2 Attributes
of Ethernet
Interface .

OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
A.8.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table
Item_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.
Navigation Path
2. Click the VLAN Forwarding Table Item tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters for VLAN Forwarding Table Item
Source Interface Type V-UNI V-UNI This parameter specifies
the network attribute of
the source interface.
Source Interface - - This parameter specifies
the source interface.
Source VLAN ID 1 to 4094 - This parameter specifies
the VLAN ID of the
source service.
Sink Interface Type V-UNI V-UNI This parameter specifies
the network attribute of
the sink interface.
Sink Interface - - This parameter specifies
the sink interface.
Sink VLAN ID 1 to 4094 - This parameter specifies
the VLAN ID of the sink
service.

NOTE
l The VLAN ID of the UNI-UNI E-Line service can be converted after a VLAN forwarding table item is
created. In this case, a service from Source Interface to Sink Interface carries the VLAN ID specified in
Sink VLAN ID when the service is transmitted from Sink Interface.
l The VLAN ID in a VLAN forwarding table item is converted unidirectionally and can be converted from
Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID only. The VLAN ID can be converted bidirectionally only when the
other VLAN forwarding table item is configured reversely.
l In normal cases, Ethernet services are bidirectional. Hence, you need to set bidirectional conversion of
VLAN IDs.
A.8.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (E-
LAN) service.
OptiX RTN 910
A-125
Navigation Path
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New. The New E-LAN Service dialog box is displayed.
Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - l This parameter
specifies the ID of the
E-LAN service.
l The OptiX RTN 910
supports simultaneous
creation of an E-LAN
service only.
the name of the E-LAN
service.
BPDU - - l This parameter
indicates the
transparent
BPDU packets.
l In the case of an E-
LAN service, this
parameter supports
only transparent
transmission of the
BPDU packets and
cannot be set manually.
l Not Transparently
Transmitted indicates
that the BPDU packets
of the network.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Tag Type C-Awared
S-Awared
Tag-Transparent
C-Awared l C-Awared indicates
that the packets are
learnt according to C-
Tag (the VLAN tag on
the client-side). To
create the 802.1q
bridge, set this
parameter to C-
Awared.
l S-Awared indicates
learnt according to S-
Tag (the VLAN tag at
the carrier service
layer). To create the
802.1ad bridge, set this
parameter to S-
Awared.
l Tag-Transparent
indicates that only the
Ethernet packets that
do not contain VLAN
tags are accessed. To
create the 802.1d
bridge, set this
parameter to Tag-
Transparent.
according to the
Self-Learning MAC
Address
Enabled Enabled l This parameter
enable the MAC
address self-learning
function.
l If the MAC self-
learning function of an
Ethernet LAN is
enabled, the Ethernet
LAN learns an MAC
address according to
the original MAC
address in the packet
and automatically
refreshes the MAC
address forwarding
table.
OptiX RTN 910
A-127
MAC Address Learning
Mode
indicates the mode used
to learn an MAC
address.
l When the bridge uses
the SVL mode, all the
VLANs share one
MAC address table. If
the bridge uses the IVL
mode, each VLAN has
an MAC address table.
not support this
parameter.
not support this
parameter.

Parameters for UNIs
the UNI port.
SVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter
specifies the S-VLAN
ID of the UNI port.
only when Tag Type is
set to S-Awared.
according to the
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
VLANs/CVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter
specifies the VLAN ID
of the UNI port.
the comma (,) to
numbers, or use the
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
of the UNI work as the
service source or
service sink.
services of the UNI port
whose VLAN IDs are
included in the set
value of this parameter
work as the service
source or service sink.

Parameters of NNIs
set to S-Awared.
SVLANs - - l This parameter
ID of the NNI port.
set to S-Awared.

OptiX RTN 910
A-129
Parameters for the Split Horizon Group
Split Horizon Group ID - 1 l This parameter
indicates the ID of the
split horizon group.
l The default split
horizon group ID is 1
and cannot be set
manually.
Split Horizon Group
Member
- - l A split horizon group
member indicates the
logical port member in
the split horizon group.
l The port members that
are added to the same
split horizon group
cannot communicate
with each other.
l The OptiX RTN 910
supports only the
division of the split
horizon group
members according to
the Ethernet physical
port.
l If a UNI or NNI logical
port of the 802.1ad
bridge is added to a
split horizon group
member, the physical
port that is mounted
with the logical port is
automatically added to
the split horizon group
member.

A.8.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service
This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.
Navigation Path
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - l This parameter
E-LAN service.
l The supports
simultaneous creation
of an E-LAN service
only.
the name of the E-LAN
service.
BPDU - - l This parameter
indicates the
transparent
BPDU packets.
l In the case of an E-
LAN service, this
parameter supports
only transparent
transmission of the
BPDU packets and
l Not Transparently
Transmitted indicates
that the BPDU packets
of the network.
OptiX RTN 910
A-131
Tag Type C-Awared
S-Awared
Tag-Transparent
C-Awared l C-Awared indicates
learnt according to C-
Tag (the VLAN tag on
the client-side). To
create the 802.1q
bridge, set this
parameter to C-
Awared.
l S-Awared indicates
learnt according to S-
Tag (the VLAN tag at
the carrier service
layer). To create the
802.1ad bridge, set this
parameter to S-
Awared.
l Tag-Transparent
indicates that only the
Ethernet packets that
do not contain VLAN
tags are accessed. To
create the 802.1d
bridge, set this
parameter to S-
Awared.
Self-Learning MAC
Address
Enabled Enabled l This parameter
indicates whether to
enable the MAC
address self-learning
function.
l If the MAC self-
learning function of an
Ethernet LAN is
enabled, the Ethernet
LAN learns an MAC
address according to
the original MAC
address in the packet
and automatically
refreshes the MAC
address forwarding
table.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
MAC Address Learning
Mode
indicates the mode used
to learn an MAC
address.
l When the bridge uses
the SVL mode, all the
VLANs share one
MAC address table. If
the bridge uses the IVL
mode, each VLAN has
an MAC address table.
not support this
parameter.
not support this
parameter.

Parameters for UNIs
the UNI port.
ID of the UNI port.
set to S-Awared.
according to the
OptiX RTN 910
A-133
VLANs/CVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter
of the UNI port.
the comma (,) to
numbers, or use the
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
to null, the E-LAN
service exclusively
uses the corresponding
UNI physical port. That
is, the entire port is
mounted to the bridge.
to a non-null value,
only the corresponding
UNI port whose service
packets contain this
VLAN ID works as the
logical port and is
mounted to the bridge.

Parameters for NNIs
set to S-Awared.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
SVLANs - - l This parameter
ID of the UNI port.
set to S-Awared.
the comma (,) to
numbers, or use the
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.

Parameters for the Port Attributes
the bound port.
Enable Port Enabled
Disabled
- The corresponding port
can normally carry the
services only when this
parameter is set to
Enabled.
OptiX RTN 910
A-135
802.1Q
QinQ
l This parameter
specifies the method of
the port to process the
received packets.
to Null, the port
the received packets.
to 802.1Q, the port
IEEE 802.1Q standard.
to QinQ, the port
IEEE 802.1 QinQ
standard.
TAG Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tag Aware l If all the accessed
services are frames
with the VLAN tag
(tagged frames), set
this parameter to "Tag
Aware".
l If all the accessed
services are frames
without the VLAN tag
(untagged frames), set
this parameter to
"Access".
l If the accessed services
contain tagged frames
and untagged frames,
"Hybrid".

OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Parameters for the Split Horizon Group
Split Horizon Group ID - 1 l This parameter
split horizon group.
l The default split
horizon group ID is 1
and cannot be set
manually.
Split Horizon Group
Member
- - l A split horizon group
member indicates the
logical port member in
the split horizon group.
l The port members that
are added to different
split horizon groups
cannot communicate
with each other.
l The supports only the
division of the split
horizon group
members according to
the Ethernet physical
port.
l If a UNI or NNI logical
port of the 802.1ad
bridge is added to a
split horizon group
member, the physical
port that is mounted
with the logical port is
automatically added to
the split horizon group
member.

OptiX RTN 910
A-137
Parameters for Static MAC Addresses
VLAN ID - 1 l This parameter is
invalid if MAC
Address Learning
Mode is SVL. That is,
the preset static MAC
address entries are
valid for all VLANs.
l If MAC Address
Learning Mode is set
to IVL, the preset static
MAC address entries
are valid for only the
VLANs whose VLAN
ID is equal to the preset
VLAN ID.
according to the
MAC Address - - l This parameter
the static MAC
address.
l A static MAC address
is an address that is set
manually. It is not aged
automatically and
needs to be deleted
manually.
l Generally, a static
MAC address is used
for the port that
receives but does not
forward Ethernet
service packets or the
port whose MAC
address need not be
aged automatically.
Egress Interface - - l This parameter
specifies the Ethernet
port that corresponds to
the MAC address.
according to the

OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Parameters for Self-Learning MAC Address
VLAN ID - 1 l This parameter is
invalid if MAC
Address Learning
Mode is SVL. That is,
the preset self-learning
MAC address entries
are valid for all
VLANs.
l If MAC Address
Learning Mode is set
to IVL, the preset self-
learning MAC address
entries are valid for
only the VLANs whose
VLAN ID is equal to
the preset VLAN ID.
according to the
the self-learning MAC
address. A self-
learning MAC address
is also called a dynamic
MAC address.
l The bridge uses the
SVL or IVL mode to
obtain the entries. A
self-learning MAC
address can be aged.
Egress Interface - - l This parameter
specifies the Ethernet
port that corresponds to
the MAC address.
according to the

OptiX RTN 910
A-139
Parameters for Disabled MAC Addresses
VLAN ID - 1 This parameter indicates
or specifies the VLAN ID
of the service. A disabled
MAC address is valid for
the VLAN whose VLAN
ID is equal to the preset
VLAN ID.
specifies or indicates
the disabled MAC
address. A disabled
MAC address is also
called a blacklisted
MAC address.
l This parameter is used
for discarding an entry,
also called a black hole
entry, whose data
frame that contains a
specific destination
MAC address. A
disabled MAC address
needs to be set
manually and cannot be
aged.

Parameters for Unknown Frame Processing
Frame Type Unicast
Multicast
1 This parameter indicates
the type of the received
unknown frame.
Handing Mode Discard
Broadcast
Broadcast Selects the method of
processing the unknown
frame. If this parameter is
set to Discard, the
unknown frame is directly
discarded. If this
parameter is set to
Broadcast, the unknown
frame is broadcast at the
forwarding port.

OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Maintenance Association Parameters
Maintenance
Domain Name
- - This parameter indicates the maintenance
domain of the created maintenance
association.
Maintenance
Association Name
- - l This parameter specifies the name of the
maintenance association, which is a
domain related to a service. Through
maintenance association division, the
connectivity check (CC) can be
performed on the network that transmits
a service instance.
l This parameter can contain a maximum
of eight bytes.
CC Test Transmit
Period(ms)
1s
10s
1m
10m
1s l This parameter specifies the interval for
transmitting packets in the CC test.
l The CC is performed to check the
availability of the service.

Parameters for the MEP
Maintenance
Domain Name
domain of the created MEP.
Maintenance
Association Name
association of the created MEP.
Node - - This parameter indicates the MEP node.
VLAN - - This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of
the current service.
MP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MEP ID.
l Each MEP needs to be configured with
an MEP ID, which is unique in the
maintenance association. The MEP ID is
required in the OAM operation.
Direction Ingress
Egress
Ingress l This parameter specifies the direction of
the MEP.
l "Ingress" indicates the direction in which
the packets are transmitted to the port,
and "Egress" indicates the direction in
which the packets are transmitted from
the port.
OptiX RTN 910
A-141
CC Status Active
Inactive
Active l This parameter specifies whether to
enable the CC function of the MEP.
l In the case of the tests based on the MP
IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.

A.8.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.
Navigation Path
Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree.
2. Click New. The New QinQ Link dialog box is displayed.
Parameters for the General Attributes
QinQ Link ID 1 to 4294967295 - This parameter specifies
the ID of the QinQ link.
Board - - This parameter specifies
the board where the QinQ
link is located.
Port - - This parameter specifies
the port where the QinQ
link is located.
S-Vlan ID 1 to 4094 - l This parameter
(at the network
operator side) for the
QinQ link.
according to the

A.9 Ethernet Protocol Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
A.9.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.
A.9.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)
management.
A.9.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.
A.9.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration
A.9.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.
A.9.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.
A.9.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP
CIST.
A.9.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Protocol Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IGMP snooping protocol.
A.9.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Adding Port to Be Quickly
Deleted
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding a port to be quickly deleted.
A.9.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for IGMP Snooping protocol route
management.
A.9.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuraiton_Static Router Port Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static router ports.
A.9.12 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Member Port
Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the route member ports of the
IGMP Snooping protocol.
A.9.13 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Static Multicast Group Member
Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static multicast groups.
A.9.14 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Data Statistics
This topic describes the parameters that are used for collecting the data statistics of the IGMP
Snooping protocol.
A.9.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
A.9.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Port Priority
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the port priority of a LAG.
A.9.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating LPT management.
A.9.18 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation
OptiX RTN 910
A-143
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port mirroring tasks.
A.9.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.
Navigation Path
Protection > ERPS Management.
2. Click New.
Parameters
ERPS ID 1 to 8 - l This parameter
Ethernet ring
protection switching
(ERPS) instance.
l The ERPS ID must be
unique.
East Port - - This parameter specifies
the east port of the ERPS
instance.
West Port - - This parameter specifies
the west port of the ERPS
instance.
RPLOwner Ring Node
Flag
Yes
No
No l This parameter
specifies whether the
node on the ring is the
ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
l Only one node on the
ring can be set as the
RPL owner for each
Ethernet ring.
RPL Port - - This parameter specifies
the RPL port.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Control VLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter
of Control VLAN.
l Each node on the
Ethernet ring transmits
the R-APS packets on
the dedicated ring APS
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is performed.
Control VLAN is used
for isolating the
dedicated R-APS
channel. Therefore, the
VLAN ID in Control
VLAN cannot be
duplicate with the
VLAN IDs that are
contained in the service
packets or inband DCN
packets.
Destination Node 01-19-A7-00-00-01 01-19-A7-00-00-01 This parameter indicates
the MAC address of the
destination node. The
default destination MAC
address in the R-APS
packets is always 01-19-
A7-00-00-01.

A.9.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)
management.
Navigation Path
Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.
OptiX RTN 910
A-145
Parameters
ERPS ID 1 to 8 - l This parameter
ERPS instance.
l The ERPS ID must be
unique.
East Port - - This parameter specifies
the east port of the ERPS
instance.
West Port - - This parameter specifies
the west port of the ERPS
instance.
RPL Owner Ring Node
Flag
Yes
No
No l This parameter
specifies whether a
node on the ring is the
ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
l Only one node on the
Ethernet ring can be set
as the RPL owner.
RPL Port - - This parameter specifies
the RPL port.
Control VLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter
of Control VLAN.
l Each node on the
Ethernet ring transmits
the Ring-APS (R-APS)
packets on the
dedicated R-APS
channel to ensure
consistency between
the nodes when the
ERPS switching is
performed. Control
VLAN is used for
isolating the dedicated
R-APS channel.
Therefore, the VLAN
ID in Control VLAN
cannot be the same as
the VLAN IDs that are
contained in the service
packets or inband DCN
packets.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Destination Node 01-19-A7-00-00-01 01-19-A7-00-00-01 This parameter indicates
destination node. The
default destination MAC
address in the R-APS
packets is always 01-19-
A7-00-00-01.
Hold-Off Time(ms) 0 to 10000, in step of 100 0 l This parameter
specifies the hold-off
time of the ERPS hold-
off timer.
l The hold-off timer is
used for negotiating the
sequence when the
ERPS coexists with
other protection
schemes so that the
fault can be rectified in
the case of other
(such as LAG
protection) before the
ERPS occurs. When a
node on the ring detects
one or more new faults,
it starts up the hold-off
timer if the preset hold-
off time is set to a value
that is not 0. During the
hold-off time, the fault
is not reported to
trigger an ERPS. When
the hold-off timer times
out, the node checks the
link status regardless
whether the fault that
triggers the startup of
the timer exists. If the
fault exists, the node
reports it to trigger an
ERPS. This fault can be
the same as or different
from the fault that
triggers the initial
startup of the hold-off
timer.
OptiX RTN 910
A-147
Guard Time(ms) 10 to 2000, in step of 10 500 l This parameter
specifies the guard time
of the ERPS guard
timer.
l The nodes on the ring
continuously forward
the R-APS packets to
the Ethernet ring. As a
result, the outdated R-
APS packets may exist
on the ring network.
After a node on the ring
receives the outdated
R-APS packets, an
incorrect ERPS may
occur. The ERPS guard
timer is an R-APS timer
used for preventing a
node on the ring from
receiving outdated R-
APS packets. When a
faulty node on the ring
detects that the
switching condition is
cleared, the node starts
up the guard timer and
starts to forward the R-
APS (NR) packets.
During this period, the
R-APS packets
received by the node
are discarded. The
received R-APS
packets are forwarded
only after the time of
the guard timer expires.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
WTR Time(min) 5 to 12, in step of 1 5 l This parameter
specifies the WTR time
of the WRT timer in the
case of ERPS
protection.
l The WTR time refers to
the duration from the
time when the working
channel is restored to
the time when the
switching is released.
When the working
channel is restored, the
WTR timer of the RPL
owner starts up. In
addition, a signal that
indicates the operation
of the WTR timer is
continuously output in
the timing process.
When the WTR timer
times out and no
switching request of a
higher priority is
received, the signal
indicating the
operation of the WTR
timer is not transmitted.
In addition, the WTR
release signal is
continuously output.
l The WTR timer is used
to prevent frequent
switching caused by the
unstable working
channel.
Packet Transmit
Interval(s)
1 to 10 5 This parameter specifies
the interval for
transmitting the R-APS
packets.
Entity Level 0 to 7 0 This parameter specifies
the level of the
maintenance entity.
Last Switching Request - - This parameter indicates
the last switching request.
OptiX RTN 910
A-149
RB Status - - This parameter indicates
the RB status of the
packets received by the
working node.
l noRB: The RPL is not
blocked.
l RB (RPL Blocked):
The RPL is blocked.
DNF Status - - This parameter indicates
the DNF status of the
packets received by the
working node.
l noDNF: The R-APS
packets do not contain
the DNF flag. In this
case, the packets are
forwarded by the node
that detects the fault on
a non-RPL link, and the
node that receives the
packets is requested to
clear the forwarding
address table.
l DNF: The R-APS
packets contain the
DNF flags. In this case,
the packets are
forwarded by the node
that detects the fault on
an RPL link, and the
node that receives the
packets is informed not
to clear the forwarding
address table.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Status of State Machine - - This parameter indicates
the status of the state
machine at the working
node.
l Idle: The Ethernet ring
is in normal state. For
example, no node on
the Ethernet ring
detects any faults or
receive the R_APS
(NR, RB) packets.
l Protection: The
Ethernet ring is in
protected state. For
example, a node on the
ring is in the WTR
period, because the
fault on the node
triggers the ERPS or
the fault is rectified.
Node Carried with
Current Packet
the MAC address carried
in the R-APS packets
received by the current
node. The MAC address
refers to the MAC address
of the source node that
initiates the switching
request.

A.9.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group
Creation
Navigation Path
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
3. Click Create. The Create Port Group dialog box is displayed.
OptiX RTN 910
A-151
Protocol Type MSTP
STP
MSTP This parameter specifies
the protocol type.
l MSTP: stands for
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 910
supports the CIST
MSTP only.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.
Enable Protocol Enabled
Disabled
Disabled l This parameter
enable the protocol of
the port group or a
member port in the port
group.
l If the STP or MSTP is
enabled, the spanning
tree topology is
automatically re-
configured. As a result,
the services are
interrupted.

Parameters for Application Ports
the board where the port
group is located.
Available Port List - - This parameter indicates
the available port list in
which a port needs to be
added to the port group.
Selected Port List - - This parameter indicates
the selected ports that
need to be added to the
port group.

OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
A.9.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group
Configuration
Navigation Path
2. Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
3. On the main interface, select the port group to be configured.
4. Click Config. The Configure Port Group dialog box is displayed.
Parameters for the Added Port
the board where the port
group is located.
Available Port List - - This parameter indicates
the available port list in
which a port needs to be
added to the port group.
Selected Port List - - This parameter indicates
the selected ports that
need to be added to the
port group.

A.9.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge
Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Bridge Parameters tab.
OptiX RTN 910
A-153
Port Group ID - - l This parameter
port group.
set to only the port
group ID that is
automatically
allocated.
MST Domain Name - - The OptiX RTN 910 does
not support this
parameter.
Redaction Level - - The OptiX RTN 910 does
not support this
parameter.
Mapping List - - The OptiX RTN 910 does
not support this
parameter.

Bridge Parameters
Port Group ID - - l This parameter
port group.
set to only the port
Group ID that is
automatically
allocated.
Hello Time(s) 1 to 10 2 l This parameter
specifies the interval
for transmitting the
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
l The greater the value of
this parameter, the less
the network resources
that are occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Max Age(s) 6 to 40 20 l This parameter
specifies the maximum
age of the CBPDU
packet that is recorded
by the port.
l The greater the value,
the longer the
transmission distance
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the value
of this parameter is
greater, it is less
possible that the bridge
detects the link fault in
a timely manner and
thus the network
adaptation ability is
reduced.
Forward Delay(s) 4 to 30 15 l This parameter
specifies the holdoff
time of a port in the
listening state and in
the learning state.
the longer the delay of
the network state
change. Hence, the
topology changes are
slower and the recovery
in the case of faults is
slower.

Port Parameters
the port in the port group.
OptiX RTN 910
A-155
Enable Edge Attribute Disabled
Enabled
specifies the
management edge
attributes of the port.
l This parameter
specifies whether to set
the port as an edge port.
The edge port refers to
the bridge port that is
connected to the LAN.
An edge port only
receives BPDU
packets.
set to Enabled only
when the port is
directly connected to
the data
communications
terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In
other cases, it is
use the default value.
Actual Edge Attribute - - This parameter indicates
the actual management
edge attributes of the port.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Point-to-Point Attribute false
true
auto
auto l This parameter
specifies the point-to-
point attribute of the
port.
l false: forced non-
point-to-point link
attribute
l true: forced point-to-
point link attribute
l auto: automatically
detected point-to-point
link attribute
to auto, the bridge
determines Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute of the port
working mode. If the
actual working mode is
full-duplex, the actual
point-to-point attribute
is true. If the actual
working mode is half-
duplex, Actual Point-
to-Point Attribute is
false.
l Only the root port or
designated port whose
Actual Point-to-Point
Attribute is "True" can
transmit the rapid state
migration request and
response.
you use the default
value.
Attribute
the actual point-to-point
attribute of the port.
OptiX RTN 910
A-157
Max Transmit Packet
Count
number of packets to be
transmitted.
l The maximum number
of packets to be
transmitted by the port
refers to the maximum
number of MSTP
packets that the port
can transmit within the
interval time of
transmitting the hello
packets.

A.9.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST
Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.
Navigation Path
2. Click the CIST&MSTI Parameters tab.
Port Group - - This parameter specifies
the port group.
MSTI ID 0 0 This parameter indicates
the MSTI ID. The value 0
indicates that the OptiX
RTN 910 supports only
the MSTP that uses
common and internal
spanning tree (CIST).
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l The most significant 16
bits of the bridge ID
indicates the priority of
the bridge.
l When the value is
smaller, the priority is
higher. As a result, the
bridge is more possible
to be selected as the
root bridge.
l If the priorities of all
the bridges in the STP
network use the same
value, the bridge whose
MAC address is the
smallest is selected as
the root bridge.

Port Parameters
Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l The most significant
eight bits of the port ID
indicate the port
priority.
l When the value is
higher.
Path Cost 1 to 200000000 200000 l This parameter
indicates the status of
the network that the
port is connected to.
l In the case of the
bridges on both ends of
the path, set this
parameter to the same
value.

OptiX RTN 910
A-159
A.9.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running
Information About the CIST
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP
CIST.
Navigation Path
2. Click the CIST Running Information tab.
Port Group ID - - This parameter indicates
the ID of the port group.
Protocol Running Mode MSTP
STP
indicates the running
mode of the protocol.
l MSTP: stands for
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 910
supports only the
CIST-based MSTP.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l This parameter
the bridge.
l The most significant 16
the bridge.
l When the value is
root bridge.
MAC address is the
the root bridge.
Bridge MAC Address - - This parameter indicates
bridge.
Root Bridge MAC
Address
root bridge.
External Path Cost
ERPC
- - The OptiX RTN 910 does
not support this
parameter.
Domain Root Bridge
Priority
not support this
parameter.
Domain Root Bridge
MAC Address
not support this
parameter.
Internal Path Cost IRPC - - The OptiX RTN 910 does
not support this
parameter.
OptiX RTN 910
A-161
Root Port Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l This parameter
the root port.
l The most significant
eight bits of the ID of
the root port indicate
the priority of the root
port.
l When the value is
higher.
Root Port - - This parameter indicates
the root port.
indicates the interval
for transmitting
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.
age of the CBPDU
by the port.
the longer the
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater, it is less
a timely manner and
thus the network
reduced.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
specifies the holdoff
the learning state.
the network state
change. Hence, the
slower.
MST Domain Max Hop
Count
not support this
parameter.
Topology Change Count - - This parameter indicates
the identifier of the
topology change.
Last Topology Change
Time(s)
the duration of the last
topology change.
Topology Change Count - - This parameter indicates
the count of the topology
changes.

Port Parameters
Enable Protocol Enabled
Disabled
Disabled This parameter indicates
whether the protocol of
the port group or a
member of the port group
is enabled.
Port Role - - This parameter indicates
the role of a port.
OptiX RTN 910
A-163
Port Status Discarding
Learning
Forwarding
Discarding This parameter indicates
the state of a port.
l Discarding: receives
only BPDU packets
l Learning: only receives
or transmits BPDU
packets
l Forwarding: forwards
user traffic, and
transmits/receives
BPDU packets
Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l The most significant
indicate the port
priority.
l When the value is
higher.
Path Cost 1 to 200000000 200000 l This parameter
indicates the status of
the network that the
port is connected to.
l In the case of the
bridges on both ends of
the path, set this
parameter to the same
value.
Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l The most significant 16
the bridge.
l When the value is
root bridge.
MAC address is the
the root bridge.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Bridge MAC Address - - This parameter indicates
bridge.
Designated Port Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l The most significant
indicate the port
priority.
l When the value is
higher.
Design Port - - This parameter indicates
the designated port.
Edge Port Attribute Disabled
Enabled
Enabled l This parameter
specifies the
management edge
attributes of the port.
l This parameter
specifies whether to set
the port as an edge port.
The edge port refers to
the bridge port that is
connected to the LAN.
An edge port only
receives BPDU
packets.
set to Enabled only
when the port is
directly connected to
the data
communications
terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In
other cases, it is
Actual Edge Port
Attribute
the actual management
edge attributes of the port.
OptiX RTN 910
A-165
Point to Point false
true
auto
auto l This parameter
specifies the point-to-
point attribute of the
port.
l false: forced non-
point-to-point link
attribute
l true: forced point-to-
point link attribute
l auto: automatically
detected point-to-point
link attribute
to auto, the bridge
determines Actual
Point to Point
Attribute of the port
working mode. If the
actual working mode is
full-duplex, the actual
point-to-point attribute
is true. If the actual
working mode is half-
duplex, Actual Point
to Point Attribute is
false.
l Only the root port or
designated port whose
Attribute is "True" can
transmit the rapid state
migration request and
response.
you use the default
value.
Actual Point to Point - - This parameter indicates
the actual point-to-point
attribute of the port.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Max Count of
Transmitting Message
indicates the maximum
number of packets to be
transmitted.
l The maximum number
of packets to be
transmitted by the port
refers to the maximum
number of MSTP
packets that the port
can transmit within
each hello time.
Protocol Running Mode STP
MSTP
- l This parameter
indicates the running
mode of the protocol.
l MSTP: stands for
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 910
supports only the
CIST-based MSTP.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.
indicates the interval
for transmitting the
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.
OptiX RTN 910
A-167
age of the CBPDU
by the port.
the longer the
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater, it is less
a timely manner and
thus the network
reduced.
specifies the holding
the learning state.
the network state
change. Hence, the
slower.
Remain Hop - - The OptiX RTN 910 does
not support this
parameter.

A.9.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping
Configuration_Protocol Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IGMP snooping protocol.
Navigation Path
Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
2. Click the Protocol Configuration tab.
Service ID - - This parameter indicates
the service ID.
Enabled Protocol Enabled
Disabled
enable the IGMP
Snooping protocol.
l If the bridge accesses a
LAN where the IGMP
multicast server exists,
you can enable the
IGMP Snooping
protocol according to
the requirement.
Router Port Aging Time
(min)
1 to 120 8 l If an entry is not
updated in a certain
period (that is, no
IGMP query packet
from this multicast
address is received),
this entry is
automatically deleted.
This mechanism is
called aging, and this
period is called aging
time.
to a very large value,
the bridge stores
excessive multicast
entries that are
outdated.
Consequently, the
resources of the
multicast table are
exhausted.
to a very small value,
the bridge may delete
the multicast entry that
is required.
Consequently, the
forwarding efficiency
decreases.
OptiX RTN 910
A-169
Maximum Times of No
Response from Multicast
Members
number of multicast
group members who do
not respond.
l If the IEEE 802.1q
bridge transmits an
IGMP group query
packet to the multicast
member ports, the
IEEE 802.1q bridge
starts the timer for the
query of the maximum
number of responses. If
no IGMP report
packets are received
within the query time,
the IEEE 802.1q bridge
adds one to the number
of no responses at the
port. When the number
of no responses
exceeds the preset
value of Maximum
Times of No Response
from Multicast
Members, the IEEE
802.1q bridge deletes
the additional multicast
members from the
multicast group.
Maximum Number of
Multicast Groups
number of allowable
multicast groups.
l The multicast group
records the mapping
relations between the
ports on the router,
MAC multicast
addresses, and member
ports in the multicast
group.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Maximum Number of
Multicast Group
Members
number of allowable
multicast group
members.
l A multicast group
member refers to the
NE that is added to a
multicast group.
Actual Multicast Count - - This parameter indicates
the number of actually
used multicast groups.
Actual Multicast
Members Count
the number of actually
used multicast group
members.

Configuration_Adding Port to Be Quickly Deleted
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding a port to be quickly deleted.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Protocol Configuration tab.
3. Click Add.
Parameters for Fast Leave Ports
the service ID.
VLAN ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter
specifies the VLAN
where the port to be
quickly deleted is
located.
OptiX RTN 910
A-171
Port Type V-UNI
V-NNI
V-UNI l This parameter
specifies the type of the
port to be quickly
deleted.
the port to be quickly
deleted.

Configuration_Route Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for IGMP Snooping protocol route
management.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Router Port Management tab.
Parameters for Router Port Management
Service ID - - This parameter specifies
the ID of the created E-
LAN service.
VLAN ID 1 1 to 4094 l This parameter
indicates the VLAN ID
of the router port.
l The value of this
VLAN ID should be the
VLANs/CVLAN for
the V-UNI port in the
E-LAN service.
Port Type - - This parameter indicates
the type of the router port.
the router port.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Port Status - - This parameter indicates
the status of the router
port.
Port Creating Time - - This parameter indicates
the time when the router
port is created.
Port Remainder Aging
Time(min)
the remaining aging time
of the router port.

Configuraiton_Static Router Port Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static router ports.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Router Port Management tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters for Router Port Creation
LAN service.
of the router port.
l The value of this
VLANs/CVLAN for
the V-UNI port in the
E-LAN service.
Available Port - - This parameter indicates
the available ports.
OptiX RTN 910
A-173
Selected Port - - l This parameter
indicates the specified
router port.
l A router port refers to
the port that is
connected to the
multicast router. It
functions as the V-UNI
port in the E-LAN
service.

Configuration_Route Member Port Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the route member ports of the
IGMP Snooping protocol.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Route Member Port Management tab.
Parameters for Multicast Groups Information
LAN service.
of the router port.
l The value of this
SVLAN for the V-NNI
port in the E-LAN
service.
Multicast MAC Address - - This parameter indicates
the multicast MAC
address.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Multicast Groups Type - - This parameter indicates
the type of the multicast
group.
Multicast Group
Creating Time
the time when the
multicast group is set up.

Parameters for Multicast Group Members Information
LAN service.
of the multicast group
member.
l The value of this
SVLAN for the V- NNI
port in the E-LAN
service.
Port Type - - This parameter indicates
the type of the multicast
group member.
the multicast group
member port.
Port Remainder Aging
Times
the remaining aging times
member port.

Configuration_Static Multicast Group Member Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static multicast groups.
OptiX RTN 910
A-175
Navigation Path
2. Click the Route Member Port Management tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters for Router Port Creation
LAN service.
of the router port.
l The value of this
SVLANs for the V-
UNI port in the E-LAN
service.
Multicast MAC Address - - This parameter specifies
the multicast MAC
address.
the available interfaces.
indicates the preset port
members
l The multicast group
member port refers to a
port that is connected to
the multicast group
member. This port is a
V-NNI port in the E-
LAN service.
set according to the

OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Configuration_Data Statistics
This topic describes the parameters that are used for collecting the data statistics of the IGMP
Snooping protocol.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Packet Statistics tab.
Parameters for Routing Member Interface Management
the service ID.
VLAN ID - - This parameter indicates
the VLAN ID of the
service.
Port Type - -
the port.
Packet Statistics Status - - This parameter indicates
or specifies the status of
collecting the packet
statistics.
IGMPv1 Query Packet
Count
the number of received
IGMPv1 query packets.
IGMPv2 Query Packet
Count
IGMPv3 Query Packet
Count
IGMP Leaving Packet
Count
packets showing that the
IGMP is transmitted from
the multicast group.
IGMPv1 Member
Report Packet Count
packets that are reported
by the IGMPv1 members.
OptiX RTN 910
A-177
IGMPv2 Member
Report Packet Count
IGMPv3 Member
Report Packet Count
Unrecognized or
Unprocessed Packet
Count
the number of packets that
cannot be recognized or
processed.
Discarded Incorrect
Packet Count
the number of discarded
error packets.

A.9.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation
Management_LAG Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
3. Click New. The Create Link Aggregation Group dialog box is displayed.
LAG No. 1 to 65535 1 l This parameter
specifies the LAG
number to be set
manually.
only when
Automatically Assign
is not selected.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Automatically Assign Selected
Deselected
Selected l This parameter
indicates whether LAG
No. is allocated
automatically.
l When Automatically
Assign is selected,
LAG No. cannot be set.
LAG Name - - This parameter specifies
the LAG name.
LAG Type Static
Manual
Static l Static: You can create a
LAG. When you add or
delete a member port to
or from the LAG, the
Link Aggregation
Control Protocol
(LACP) protocol is
required. In a LAG, a
port can be in the
Selected or Standby
state. The aggregation
information is
exchanged among
different equipment
through the LACP
protocol to ensure that
the aggregation
information is the same
among all the nodes.
l Manual: You can
manually create a LAG.
When you add or delete
a member port, the
LACP protocol is not
required. The port can
be in the up or down
state. According to the
physical up or down
state, you can
determine whether to
perform an
aggregation.
Non-Revertive
Non-Revertive This parameter can be set
only when Load Sharing
is set to Non-Sharing.
OptiX RTN 910
A-179
Load Sharing Sharing
Non-Sharing
Non-Sharing l Sharing: Each member
link of a LAG
processes traffic at the
same time and shares
the traffic load. The
sharing mode can
increase a bandwidth
utilization for the link.
When the LAG
members change, or
certain links fail, the
system automatically
re-allocates the traffic.
l Non-Sharing: Only one
member link of a LAG
carries traffic, and the
other link is in the
standby state. In this
case, a hot backup
mechanism is
provided. When the
active link of a LAG is
faulty, the system
activates the standby
link, thus preventing
link failure.
Load Sharing Hash
Algorithm
Source MAC
Destination MAC
Source and Destination
MAC
Source IP
Destination IP
Source and Destination IP
Source MAC l This parameter is valid
only when Load
Sharing of a LAG is set
to Sharing.
l The load sharing
computation methods
include: MAC address
specific allocation
(based on the source
MAC address,
destination MAC
address, and XOR
between source MAC
address and source
MAC address), IP
address specific
allocation (based on the
source IP address,
destination IP address,
and XOR between
source IP address and
source IP address).
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
System Priority 0 to 65535 32768 l This parameter
a LAG. The smaller the
value of System
Priority, the higher the
priority.
l When a local LAG
negotiates with an
opposite LAG through
LACP packets, both
LAGs can obtain the
system priorities of
each other. Then, the
LAG of the higher
system priority is
considered as the
comparison result of
both LAGs so that the
aggregation
information is
consistent at both
LAGs. If the priorities
of both LAGs are the
same, the system MAC
addresses are
compared. Then, the
comparison result
based on the LAG with
smaller system MAC
address is considered as
the result of both LAGs
and is used to ensure
that the aggregation
information is
consistent at both
LAGs.

Port Settings Parameters
Main Board - - l This parameter
specifies the main
board in a LAG.
according to the
OptiX RTN 910
A-181
Main Port - - l This parameter
specifies the main port
in a LAG.
l After a LAG is created,
you can add Ethernet
services to the main
port only. Services
cannot be added to a
slave port. When Load
Sharing is set to Non-
Sharing, the link
connected to the main
port is used to transmit
the services, and the
link connected to the
slave port is used for
protection.
Board (Available Slave
Ports)
specifies the slave
board in a LAG.
according to the
Port (Available Slave
Ports)
specifies the salve port
in a LAG.
l The slave ports in a
LAG are fixed. Unless
they are manually
modified, the system
does not automatically
add them to or delete
them from the LAG.
Selected Slave Ports - - This parameter indicates
the selected slave ports.

A.9.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Port
Priority
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the port priority of a LAG.
Navigation Path
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
2. Click the Port Priority tab.
the port whose priority can
be set.
Port Priority 0 to 65535 32768 l This parameter
indicates the priorities
of the ports in a LAG as
defined in the LACP
protocol. The smaller
the value, the higher the
priority.
l When ports are added
into a LAG, the port of
the highest priority is
preferred for service
transmission.

A.9.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating LPT management.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT
2. Click New.
Parameters for Convergence Points
Board - - This parameter specifies the board at the
convergence point.
Port - - This parameter specifies the port on the
board of the convergence point.
NOTE
One port can be in an LPT only.

OptiX RTN 910
A-183
Parameters for Access Points
Board - - This parameter specifies the board at the
access point.
Port - - This parameter specifies the port on the
board of the access point.
NOTE
The access point supports selection of multiple
ports on different boards.

A.9.18 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port mirroring tasks.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Port Mirroring from the Function Tree.
2. Click New. The Port Mirror Management dialog box is displayed.
Mirror Name - - l This parameter specifies the name of the
mirroring task.
l After the mirroring function of the port is
enabled, you can monitor all the mirrored
ports by analyzing the packets at the
mirroring port only. As a result, you can
easily manage the ports.
Direction Ingress
Egress
Ingress l This parameter specifies the direction in
which the service to be monitored.
l Ingress indicates that the uplink direction
of the service to be monitored.
l Egress indicates that the downlink
direction of the service to be monitored.
Mirror Listener
Port
- - l This parameter specifies the mirroring
listener port and the listened port.
l Mirror Listener Port: The port where
services are available cannot be selected.
Otherwise, the creation fails.
Listened Port - -

OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
A.10 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration and
maintenance (OAM).
A.10.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain
Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.
A.10.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association
Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.
A.10.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end
point (MEP).
A.10.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.
A.10.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association
intermediate point (MIP).
A.10.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.
A.10.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.
A.10.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter
This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.
A.10.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring
This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the
Ethernet port.
A.10.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM
Management_Maintenance Domain Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.
Navigation Path
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3. Choose New > New Maintenance Domain.
OptiX RTN 910
A-185
Maintenance
Domain Name
maintenance domain.
l The maintenance domain refers to the
network for the Ethernet OAM.
of eight bytes.
Maintenance
Domain Level
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4 l This parameter specifies the level of the
maintenance domain.
l The values 0-2 indicate the carrier level,
the values 3-4 indicate the supplier level,
and the values 5-7 indicates the user level.
l When the value is set to 0, the
maintenance domain is at the lowest
level. The values 1-7 indicate that the
level increases in a sequential order.
l The OAM packets whose level is higher
than the preset value are transparently
transmitted by the MEPs. The OAM
packets whose level is lower than the
preset value are directly discarded by the
MEPs. The OAM packets whose level is
the same as the preset value are responded
to or terminated by the MEPs according
to the message type.

Management_Maintenance Association Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.
Navigation Path
3. Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created.
Choose New > New Maintenance Association.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Maintenance
Domain Name
domain of the created maintenance
association.
Maintenance
Association Name
maintenance association, which is a
domain related to a service. Through
maintenance association division, the
connectivity check (CC) can be
performed on the network that transmits
a service instance.
of eight bytes.
Relevant Service - - This parameter specifies the service
instance that is related to the maintenance
association.
CC Test Transmit
Period(ms)
1s
10s
1 min
10 min
1s l This parameter specifies the interval for
transmitting packets in the CC.
l The CC is performed to check the
availability of the service.

Management_MEP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end
point (MEP).
Navigation Path
3. Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New >
New MEP Point.
Maintenance
Domain Name
domain of the created MEP.
Maintenance
Association Name
OptiX RTN 910
A-187
Board - - This parameter specifies the board where
the MEP is located.
Port - - This parameter specifies the port where the
MEP is located.
VLAN - - This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of
the current service.
MP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MEP ID.
l Each MEP needs to be configured with
an MEP ID, which is unique in the
maintenance association. The MEP ID is
Direction Ingress
Egress
Ingress l This parameter specifies the direction of
the MEP.
l Ingress indicates the direction in which
the packets are transmitted to the port,
and Egress indicates the direction in
which the packets are transmitted from
the port.
CC Status Active
Inactive
Active l This parameter specifies whether to
enable the CC function of the MEP.
l In the case of the tests based on the MP
IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.

Management_Remote MEP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.
Navigation Path
3. Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. Then, the Maintenance Domain Name
dialog box is displayed.
4. Click New.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Maintenance
Domain Name
domain of the MEP.
Maintenance
Association Name
Remote
Maintenance Point
ID(_e.g:1,3-6)
1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the ID of the
remote MEP.
l If other MEPs may initiate OAM
operations to an MEP in the same MA,
set the other MEPs to be the remote
MEPs.

Management_MIP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association
intermediate point (MIP).
Navigation Path
2. Click the MIP Point tab.
3. Select the maintenance domain in which an MIP needs to be created, and then click New.
Maintenance
Domain Name
domain of the MIP.
Board - - This parameter specifies the board where
the MIP is located.
Port - - This parameter specifies the port where the
MIP is located.
OptiX RTN 910
A-189
MP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MIP ID.
l Each MIP needs to be configured with an
MIP ID, which is unique in the
maintenance domain. The MIP ID is
NOTE
To create MEPs and MIPs in a service at a
port, ensure that only one MIP can be created
and the level of the MIP must be higher than
the level of the MEP.

Management_LB Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.
Navigation Path
3. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LB test.
4. Choose OAM > Start LB. The LB Test dialog box is displayed.
MP ID Selected
Deselected
Deselected This parameter needs to be selected if the
LB test is performed on the basis of MP IDs.
Sink Maintenance
Point MAC
Address
Selected
Deselected
Selected This parameter needs to be selected if the
LB test is performed on the basis of MAC
addresses.
Maintenance
Domain Name
- - This parameter indicates the name of the
maintenance domain for the LB test.
Maintenance
Association Name
maintenance association for the LB test.
Source
Maintenance Point
ID
- - l This parameter specifies the source
maintenance point in the LB test.
l Only the MEP can be set to the source
maintenance point.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID
- - l This parameter specifies the destination
maintenance point in the LB test.
l Only the MEP can be set to the
destination maintenance point.
l Destination Maintenance Point ID can
be set only when MP ID is selected.
Destination
Maintenance Point
MAC Address
- 00-00-00-00-00-00 l This parameter specifies the MAC
address of the port where the destination
maintenance point is located in the LB
test.
l Only the MAC address of the MEP can
be set to the MAC address of the
l Destination Maintenance Point MAC
Address can be set only when Sink
Maintenance Point MAC Address.
Transmitted
Packet Count
1 to 255 3 l This parameter specifies the number of
packets transmitted each time in the LB
test.
l When the value is greater, the required
duration is longer.
Transmitted
Packet Length
64 to 1400 64 l This parameter specifies the length of a
transmitted LBM packet.
l If the packet length is different, the test
result may be different. In normal cases,
it is recommended that you use the
default value.
Transmitted
Packet Priority
0 to 7 7 l This parameter specifies the priority of
transmitting packets.
l 0 indicates the lowest priority, and 7
indicates the highest priority. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to the highest
priority.
Detection Result - - This parameter indicates the relevant
information and result of the LB test.

Management_LT Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.
OptiX RTN 910
A-191
Navigation Path
3. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LT test.
4. Choose OAM > Start LT. The LT Test dialog box is displayed.
Test Node Parameters
Maintenance
Domain Name
maintenance domain for the LT test.
Maintenance
Association Name
maintenance association for the LT test.
Source
Maintenance Point
ID
- - l This parameter specifies the source
maintenance point in the LT test.
l Only the MEP can be set to the source
maintenance point.
Destination
Maintenance Point
MAC Address
- 00-00-00-00-00-00 l This parameter specifies the MAC
address of the board where the
destination maintenance point is located.
l Only the MAC address of the MEP can
be set to the MAC address of the

Parameters for the Test Result
Source
Maintenance Point
- - This parameter indicates the source
maintenance point in the LT test.
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID/MAC
- - This parameter indicates the MAC address
of the port where the destination
maintenance point is located in the LT test.
Response
Maintenance Point
ID/MAC
- - This parameter indicates the MAC address
of the port where the responding
maintenance point is located in the LT test.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Hop Count 1 to 64 - l This parameter indicates the number of
hops from the source maintenance point
to the responding maintenance point or to
the destination maintenance point in the
LT test.
l The number of hops indicates the
adjacent relation between the responding
maintenance point to the source
maintenance point. The number of hops
increases by one when a responding point
occurs on the link from the source
maintenance point to the destination
maintenance point.
Test Result -
-
- This parameter indicates the result of the LT
test.

A.10.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM
Management_OAM Parameter
This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the OAM Parameter tab.
Port - - This parameter indicates the corresponding
port.
Enable OAM
Protocol
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the OAM protocol.
l After the OAM protocol is enabled, the
current Ethernet port starts to use the
preset mode to create the OAM
connection with the opposite end.
OptiX RTN 910
A-193
OAM Working
Mode
Active
Passive
Active l This parameter indicates or specifies the
working mode of the OAM.
l The port whose OAM working mode is
set to Active can initiate the OAM
connection.
l The port whose OAM working mode is
set to Passive can only wait for the
opposite end to send the OAM
connection request.
l The OAM working mode of the
equipment at only one end can be
Passive.
Link Event
Notification
Enabled
Disabled
whether the local link events can be
notified to the opposite end.
l If the alarms caused by link events can be
reported, that is, if the number of
performance events (for example, error
frame period, error frame, error frame
second, and error frame signal cycle) at
the local end exceeds the preset
threshold, these performance events are
notified to the port at the opposite end
through the link event notification
function.
Remote Side
Loopback
Response
Disabled
Enabled
whether the port responds to the remote
loopback.
l Remote loopback indicates that the local
OAM entity transmits packets to the
remote OAM entity for loopback. The
local OAM entity can locate the fault and
test the link performance through
loopback data analysis.
l If a port does not support remote
loopback response, this port does not
respond to the loopback request from the
remote port regardless of the OAM port
status.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Loopback Status Non-Loopback
Initiate Loopback at
Local
Respond Loopback
of Remote
- This parameter indicates the loopback status
at the local end.
NOTE
Loopback Status is valid only after you choose
OAM > Enable Remote Loopback.
OAM Discovery
Status
FAULT
ACTIVE_SEND_L
OCAL
PASSIVE_WAIT
SEND_LOCAL_R
EMOTE
SEND_LOCAL_R
EMOTE_OK
SEND_ANY
- This parameter indicates the OAM
discovery status at the local end.
Port Transmit
Status
FWD
DISCARD
- l This parameter indicates the status of
transmitting packets at the local end.
l When a port is in the FWD state, the port
forwards the non-OAM packets. When a
port is in the DISCARD state, the port
discards the non-OAM packets.
Port Receive Status FWD
DISCARD
LB
- l This parameter indicates the status of
receiving packets at the local end.
l In the FWD state, the port forwards the
non-OAM packets. In the LB state, the
port loopback the non-OAM packets. In
the DISCARD state, the port discards the
non-OAM packets.

A.10.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM
Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring
This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the
Ethernet port.
Navigation Path
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.
OptiX RTN 910
A-195
port.
Error Frame
Monitor Window
(ms)
1000 to 60000, in
step of 100
1000 This parameter specifies the duration of
monitoring error frames.
Error Frame
Monitor Threshold
(frame)
1 to 4294967295, in
step of 1
1 l This parameter specifies the threshold of
monitoring error frames.
l Within the specified value of Error
Frame Monitor Window(ms), if the
number of error frames on the link
exceeds the preset value of Error Frame
Monitor Threshold(frame), an alarm is
reported.
Error Frame
Period Window
(frame)
1488 to 892800000,
in step of 1
892800000 This parameter specifies the window of
monitoring the error frame period.
Error Frame
Period Threshold
(frame)
- 1 l This parameter specifies the threshold of
monitoring the error frame period.
Frame Period Window(frame), if the
Period Threshold(frame), an alarm is
reported.
Error Frame
Second Window(s)
10 to 900, in step of
1
60 This parameter specifies the time window of
monitoring the error frame second.
Error Frame
Second Threshold
(s)
10 to 900, in step of
1
monitoring error frame seconds.
l If any error frame occurs in one second,
this second is called an errored frame
second. Within the specified value of
Error Frame Second Window(s), if the
Second Threshold(s), an alarm is
reported.
Error Frame
Signal Periodic
Monitor Window
(Entries)
1 to 60, in step of 1 1 This parameter specifies the window of
monitoring the error frame signal period.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Error Frame
Signal Periodic
Monitor Threshold
(Entries)
1 to 7500000000, in
step of 1
monitoring the error frame signal period.
Frame Signal Periodic Monitor
Window(Entries), if the number of error
signals exceeds the preset value of Error
Frame Signal Periodic Monitor
Threshold(Entries), an alarm is
reported.

A.11 QoS Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.
A.11.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.
A.11.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification
This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain applied
ports.
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.
A.11.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.
A.11.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.
OptiX RTN 910
A-197
Mapping Relation ID 1 to 8 1 This parameter indicates
the ID of the mapping
relation between DiffServ
domains.
Mapping Relation Name - Default Map This parameter indicates
the name of the mapping
relation between DiffServ
domains.

NOTE
If one default DiffServ domain exists on the OptiX RTN equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and
Mapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain.
The default Diffserv domain cannot be modified and deleted.
Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation
CVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameter
the C-VLAN of the
ingress packets.
l C-VLAN indicates the
client-side VLAN, and
the value 7 indicates the
highest priority.
the S-VLAN of the
ingress packets.
l S-VLAN indicates the
server-side VLAN, and
highest priority.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
IP DSCP 0 to 63 - l This parameter
indicates the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the ingress
packets.
l The differentiated
services code point
(DSCP) refers to bits
0-5 of the differentiated
services (DS) field in
the packet and indicates
the service class and
discarding priority of
the packet.
OptiX RTN 910
A-199
PHB BE
AF1
AF2
AF3
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
- l This parameter
indicates the per-hop
behavior (PHB) service
class of the DiffServ
domain.
l The PHB service class
refers to the forwarding
behavior of the
DiffServ node on the
behavior aggregate
(BA) operation. The
forwarding behavior
can meet the specific
requirements.
l The PHB service
classes are BE, AF1,
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, and DSCP
value) contained in the
packets of the DiffServ
domain and the eight
PDB service classes
meet the requirements
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTE
The AF1 is classified into
three sub service classes,
namely, AF11, AF12, and
AF13, only one of which is
valid. It is the same case
with the AF2, AF3, and
AF4.

OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation
PHB BE
AF1
AF2
AF3
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
- l This parameter
indicates the PHB
service class of the
DiffServ domain.
behavior of the
DiffServ node on the
behavior aggregate
(BA) operation. The
forwarding behavior
requirements.
l The PHB service
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, and DSCP
packets of the DiffServ
PDB service classes
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTE
AF4.
the C-VLAN of the
egress packets.
highest priority.
OptiX RTN 910
A-201
the S-VLAN of the
egress packets.
highest priority.
indicates the DSCP
priority of the IP
packets.
l The DSCP refers to bits
0-5 of the DS field in
the packet.

the port that uses the
DiffServ domain.

A.11.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain
Management_Create
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
2. Click Create. The Create DS Mapping Relation dialog box is displayed.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Mapping Relation ID 2 to 8 2 This parameter specifies
the ID of the mapping
relation of a DS domain.
Mapping Relation Name - - This parameter specifies
Packet Type cvlan
svlan
ip-dscp
cvlan l This parameter
packet.
l The packets trusted by
the OptiX RTN 910 are
the C_VLAN,
S_VLAN and IP DSCP
packets that contain the
C_VLAN priority,
S_VLAN priority, or
DSCP value. By
default, the untrusted
packets are mapped to
the BE service class for
best-effort forwarding.
NOTE
The E-Line point-to-point
transparent transmission
service supports only the
mapping from DSCP
packets to the PHB service
class.

NOTE
If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, Mapping
Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain. The
default DS domain cannot be modified and deleted.
OptiX RTN 910
A-203
Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation
specifies the C-VLAN
priority of the ingress
packets.
highest priority.
priority of the ingress
packets.
highest priority.
specifies the DSCP
priority of the IP
packets.
services code point
the packet.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
PHB BE
AF1
AF2
AF3
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
- l This parameter
indicates the PHB
service class of the DS
domain.
behavior of the DS
node on the behavior
aggregate (BA)
operation. The
forwarding behavior
requirements.
l The PHB service
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, and DSCP
packets of the DS
PDB service classes
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTE
AF4.

OptiX RTN 910
A-205
Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation
PHB BE
AF1
AF2
AF3
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
- l This parameter
indicates the PHB
service class of the DS
domain.
behavior of the DS
node on the behavior
aggregate (BA)
operation. The
forwarding behavior
requirements.
l The PHB service
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, and DSCP
packets of the DS
PDB service classes
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTE
AF4.
specifies the C-VLAN
priority of the egress
packets.
highest priority.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
priority of the egress
packets.
highest priority.
specifies the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the egress
packets.
services code point
the packet.

the board that uses the
mapping relations
between DS domains.
Available Port - - This parameter displays
the available port list from
which you can select the
port that uses the mapping
relations between DS
domains.
OptiX RTN 910
A-207
displays the selected
port list. The ports in
the list use the mapping
relations between DS
domains.
l Encapsulation Type
determines the packet
types that the port
trusts. In the case of a
UNI port, set Packet
Type to cvlan or ip-
dscp. In the case of an
NNI port, set Packet
Type to svlan.

A.11.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied
Port_Modification
This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain applied
ports.
Navigation Path
2. Select the DS domain to be changed in the main interface.
3. Click the Apply Port tab.
4. Click Modify.
Parameters for Configuring the Applied Ports
Mapping Relation Name - - This parameter indicates
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Packet Type cvlan
svlan
ip-dscp
cvlan l This parameter
packet.
l The packets trusted by
the OptiX RTN 910 are
the C_VLAN,
S_VLAN and IP DSCP
packets that contain the
C_VLAN priority,
S_VLAN priority, or
DSCP value. By
default, the untrusted
packets are mapped to
the BE service class for
best-effort forwarding.
NOTE
The E-Line point-to-point
transparent transmission
service supports only the
mapping from DSCP
packets to the PHB service
class.
the board where the port is
located.
the available port.
Selected Port - - This parameter indicates
the selected port.
The selected port is
applied to the DS domain.

NOTE
If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN 910, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and Mapping Relation
Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain. The port applied
to the default DS domain cannot be modified.
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree.
OptiX RTN 910
A-209
Parameters
Policy ID 1 to 36 - l This parameter
indicates the policy ID
of the port.
l The OptiX RTN 910
supports a maximum
number of 36 policies.
Policy Name - - This parameter indicates
or specifies the policy
name of the port.
CoS CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
- l The BE, AF1, AF2,
AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,
and CS7 service classes
respectively map eight
queuing entities. The
OptiX RTN 910
provides different QoS
policies for the queues
at different service
classes.
l CS6-CS7: indicates the
highest service grade,
which is mainly
involved in signaling
transmission.
l EF: indicates fast
forwarding. This
service class is
applicable to the traffic
whose delay is small
and packet loss ratio is
low, for example, voice
and video services.
l AF1-AF4: indicates
assured forwarding.
This service class is
that requires rate
guarantee but does not
require delay or jitter
limit.
l BE: indicates that the
traffic is forwarded in
best-effort manner
without special
processing.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Grooming Police After
Reloading
SP
WRR
CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP
AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1:
WRR
l The strict priority (SP)
scheduling algorithm is
designed for the key
services. One
important
characteristic of the key
services is that higher
priorities are required
to minimize the
response delay in the
case of congestion
events.
l The weighted round
robin (WRR)
scheduling algorithm
divides each port into
multiple output sub-
queues. The polling
scheduling is
performed among the
output sub-queues to
ensure that each sub-
queue has a certain
period of service time.
l The OptiX RTN 910
supports the setting of
the SP+WRR
of the CoS queue
according to the
requirement, and
provides one or more
queues that comply
with the SP algorithm.
Except for the default
value, however, the
value of the WRR
and the value of the SP
cannot be interleaved.
That is, except for the
default value,
Grooming Police
After Reloading can
be changed from SP to
WRR according to the
queue priorities in a
descending order
(CS7-BE).
OptiX RTN 910
A-211
according to the
Policy Weight(%) 1 to 100 25 l This parameter
specifies the weight of
the policy in the WRR
queue. The weight
indicates the
percentage of the
bandwidth resources
obtained by the WRR
queue.
set only when
Grooming Police
After Reloading is set
to WRR.
according to the
Bandwidth Limit Disabled
Enabled
whether the traffic
shaping function is
enabled for the PHB
service class queues in
the egress direction.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
(kbit/s), CBS (byte),
and PBS (byte) can be
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
CIR(kbit/s) - - l In the case that no
packets exist in the
egress queue: When the
rate of the packets is not
more than the CIR,
these packets directly
enter the egress queue.
l In the case that certain
egress queue: The
packets whose rate
passes the restriction of
the PIR directly enter
the egress queue, which
forwards the packets to
the next port at the CIR.
according to the
PIR(kbit/s) - - l In the case that no
egress queue: If the rate
of the packets is more
than the CIR but is not
more than the PIR, the
packets whose rate is
more than the CIR enter
If the rate of the packets
is more than the PIR,
the packets are directly
discarded.
egress queue: The
packets whose rate
according to the
OptiX RTN 910
A-213
CBS(byte) - - l If the rate of the packets
is not more than the
CIR during a certain
period, the burst
packets are directly
transmitted. The
maximum traffic of the
burst packets is
determined by the
CBS.
according to the
PBS(byte) - - l If the rate of the packets
is more than the CIR
but is not more than the
PIR during a certain
period, the burst
packets enter the egress
queue. The maximum
traffic of the burst
packets is determined
by the PBS.
according to the

A.11.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.
Navigation Path
2. Click the CoS Queue Configuration tab.
3. Click New. The Create Port Policy dialog box is displayed.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Parameters
Policy ID 1 to 36 - l This parameter
specifies the policy ID
of the port.
l The OptiX RTN 910
supports a maximum
number of 36 policies.
Automatically Assign Selected
Deselected
Deselected This parameter specifies
whether to automatically
allocate the policy ID of
the port policy. After this
parameter is selected, the
system automatically
allocates the policy ID,
and then the policy ID
Policy Name - - This parameter specifies
the policy name of the
port.
OptiX RTN 910
A-215
CoS CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
- l The BE, AF1, AF2,
AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,
and CS7 service classes
respectively map eight
queuing entities. The
OptiX RTN 910
provides different QoS
policies for the queues
at different service
class.
l CS6-CS7: indicates the
highest service grade,
which is mainly
involved in signaling
transmission.
l EF: indicates fast
forwarding. This
service class is
whose delay is small
and packet loss ratio is
low, for example, voice
and video services.
l AF1-AF4: indicates
assured forwarding.
This service class is
that requires rate
guarantee but does not
require delay or jitter
limit.
l BE: indicates that the
traffic is forwarded in
best-effort manner
without special
processing.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Grooming Police After
Reloading
SP
WRR
CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP
AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1:
WRR
l The strict priority (SP)
scheduling algorithm is
designed for the key
services. One
important
characteristic of the key
services is that higher
priorities are required
to minimize the
response delay in the
case of congestion
events.
l The weighted round
robin (WRR)
divides each port into
multiple output sub-
queues. The polling
scheduling is
performed among the
output sub-queues to
ensure that each sub-
queue has a certain
period of service time.
l The OptiX RTN 910
the SP+WRR
of the CoS queue
according to the
requirement, and
provides one or more
queues that comply
with the SP algorithm.
Except for the default
value, however, the
value of the WRR
and the value of the SP
cannot be interleaved.
That is, except for the
default value,
Grooming Police
After Reloading can
be changed from SP to
WRR according to the
queue priorities in a
descending order
(CS7-BE).
OptiX RTN 910
A-217
according to the
Policy Weight(%) 1 to 100 25 l This parameter
specifies the weight of
the policy in the WRR
queue. The weight
indicates the
percentage of the
bandwidth resources
obtained by the WRR
queue.
set only when
Grooming Police
After Reloading is set
to WRR.
according to the
Enabled
whether the traffic
shaping function is
enabled for the PHB
service class queues.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
more than the CIR,
egress queue: The
packets whose rate
according to the
discarded.
egress queue: The
packets whose rate
according to the
OptiX RTN 910
A-219
period, the burst
transmitted. The
burst packets is
determined by the
CBS.
according to the
period, the burst
queue. The maximum
by the PBS.
according to the

A.11.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification
Configuration
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab.
3. Click New. The Create Traffic Classification dialog box is displayed.
Traffic Classification ID 1 to 1024 - This parameter specifies
the ID of the traffic
classification.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
ACL Action Permit
Deny
Permit l The access control list
(ACL) determines
whether to forward or
discard the packets that
enter the port according
to the specified
matching rules.
l When this parameter is
set to Permit, the ACL
on the ingress side
filters the packets that
enter the port. Only the
packets that match the
specified rules can be
received by the port.
l When this parameter is
set to Deny, ACL
processing is not
performed for the
packets over the ingress
port.

Ingress Parameters
Logical Relation
Between Matched Rules
And And l This parameter
specifies the logical
relationship between
the traffic classification
matching rules.
l The OptiX RTN 910
the logical AND
between multiple
matching rules.
OptiX RTN 910
A-221
Match Type DSCP Value
CVlan ID
CVlan priority
SVlan ID
SVlan priority
- l After you click Add or
Delete, complex traffic
classification can be
performed on the traffic
that enters the ingress
port according to the
preset matching rules.
l In the case a specific
service, complex traffic
classification can be
divided into basic
traffic types according
to the DSCP value,
C_VLAN ID,
C_VLAN priority,
S_VLAN ID, or
S_VLAN priority.
Traffic type is based on
the associated Ethernet
packets. Therefore, this
parameter is set
according to the packet
type and the planning
information.
Match Value DSCP Value: 0 to 63
CVlan ID: 1 to 4094
CVlan priority: 0 to 7
SVlan ID: 1 to 4094
SVlan priority: 0 to 7
- l If the matching value of
the packets is the same
as the preset Match
Value, the packets
match the rules of
complex traffic
classification.
according to the
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
CoS -
CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
- l This parameter
specifies the PHB
service class queue
mapped by the traffic
classification packets.
to empty (-), the traffic
classification packets
map the PHB service
class queue according
the mapping relation
specified in the topic
about Diffserv domain
management.
according to the
Enabled
Enabled l This parameter
whether the CAR
operation is performed
for the flow in the
ingress direction.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the
OptiX RTN 910
A-223
CIR(kbit/s) - - l When the rate of the
packets is not more
than the CIR, the
packets are marked
blue and pass the CAR
policing. These packets
are first forwarded in
the case of network
congestion.
l When the rate of the
packets is more than the
CIR but not more than
the PIR, the packets
whose rate is more than
the CIR can pass the
restriction of the CAR
and are marked yellow.
The processing method
of the packets marked
yellow can be set to
"Pass" or "Remark".
"Remark" indicates
mapped into another
specified queue of a
higher priority (this is
equal to changing the
priority of the packets)
and then forwarded to
the next port. If a
network congestion
event occurs again, the
packets marked yellow
can be processed
according to the new
priority.
according to the
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the rate of the
PIR, the packets that
exceed the rate
restriction are marked
red and directly
discarded.
the PIR, the packets
whose rate is more than
the CIR can pass the
restriction of the CAR
and are marked yellow.
The processing method
of the packets marked
yellow can be set to
"Pass" or "Remark".
"Remark" indicates
mapped into another
the next port. If a
network congestion
event occurs again, the
packets marked yellow
can be processed
according to the new
priority.
according to the
OptiX RTN 910
A-225
CBS(byte) - - l During a certain period,
if the rate of the packets
whose processing
method is marked
"Pass" is not more than
the CIR, certain burst
packets are allowed and
can be first forwarded
in the case of network
congestion. The
burst packets is
determined by the
CBS.
according to the
PBS(byte) - - l During a certain period,
if the rate of the packets
whose processing
method is marked
"Pass" is more than the
the PIR, certain burst
packets are allowed and
marked yellow. The
burst packets is
determined by the PBS.
according to the
Coloration Mode Color Blindness Color Blindness l This parameter
specifies the CAR
operation performed by
the equipment on the
packets. The packets
are dyed according to
the result of the CAR
operation. The dying
rule is determined by
the comparison
between the rate of the
packets and the preset
CAR value.
l The OptiX RTN 910
supports Color
Blindness only.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Packet Color Red
Yellow
Green
- Packets can be dyed in
three colors: red, yellow,
and green. The packets in
red are first discarded.
Handling Mode Discard
Pass
Remark
- l This parameter
handling the packets.
l Discard: The packets
are discarded.
l Pass: The packets are
forwarded.
l Remark: The packets
are remarked.
"Remark" indicates
mapped into another
the next port.
Relabeled CoS CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
- If the handling method is
set to "Remark", you can
reset the CoS of the
packets.

OptiX RTN 910
A-227
Egress Parameters
Enable
Enable l This parameter
whether the traffic
shaping is performed in
the egress function.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the
more than the CIR,
egress queue: The
packets whose rate
according to the
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
discarded.
egress queue: The
packets whose rate
according to the
period, the burst
transmitted. The
burst packets is
determined by the
CBS.
according to the
OptiX RTN 910
A-229
period, the burst
queue. The maximum
by the PBS.
according to the

A.11.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.
Navigation Path
Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Parameters for Port Shaping Management
Slot No. - - This parameter specifies
the slot ID.
the port.
CIR (kbit/s) - - If the traffic shaping
function is enabled, OptiX
RTN 910 processes the
packets in the buffer
queue through the
following methods when
no packets are available in
the queue.
l If the rate of the packets
is not higher than the
specified CIR, the
packets are forwarded
directly to the next port.
CBS (kbyte) - -
PIR (kbit/s) - -
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
PBS (kbyte) - -
packets is higher than
the CIR but is not
higher than the PIR, the
higher than the CIR
enter the buffer queue,
which forwards the
packets to the next port
at the CIR.
packets is higher than
the PIR, the packets are
discarded first in the
case of network
congestion.
is not higher than the
period of time, a part of
the burst packets are
directly transmitted.
The maximum traffic
of the burst packets is
determined by the
CBS.
is higher than the CIR
but is not higher than
the PIR during a certain
period of time, a part of
the burst packets enter
the buffer queue. The
burst packets is
determined by the PBS.
When certain packets
exist in the buffer queue,
the packets whose rate is
higher than the PIR
directly enter the buffer
queue, which forwards the
OptiX RTN 910
A-231
packets to the next port at
the CIR.

A.12 RMON Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.
A.12.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.
A.12.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.
A.12.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.
A.12.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.
A.12.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics
Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.
Navigation Path
Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Statistics Group tab.
Parameters
Object - - This parameter specifies the object to be
monitored.
Sampling Period 5 to 150 5 l This parameter specifies the duration of
the monitoring period.
History Table Type is set to Custom
Period 1 and Custom Period 2.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Display
Accumulated
Value
Selected
Deselected
Deselected l This parameter specifies the method of
displaying the performance events.
l If this parameter is not selected, the
displayed value is an increment
compared to the value that is collected in
last sampling period and stored in the
register.
l If this parameter is selected, the displayed
value is an absolute value that is currently
stored in the register.
Display Mode Graphics
List
List l This parameter specifies the method of
l If this parameter is set to Graphics, the
number of performance events to be
monitored at each time cannot be more
than 10, and the unit should be the same.
Legend Color
Description
- l This parameter indicates the description
of different colors.
Display Mode is set to Graphics.
Event - - l This parameter indicates the queried
performance events.
Display Mode is set to List.

A.12.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.
Navigation Path
2. Click the History Group tab.
Parameters
Object - - The parameter indicates the object to be
monitored.
Ended - - This parameter specifies the start time and
end time of the monitoring period.
OptiX RTN 910
A-233
History Table
Type
30-Second
30-Minute
Custom Period 1
Custom Period 2
30-Second This parameter specifies the monitoring
period.
Display Mode Graphics
List
List l This parameter specifies the method of
l If this parameter is set to Graphics, the
number of performance events to be
monitored at each time cannot be more
than 10, and the unit should be the same.
Legend Color
Description
- l This parameter indicates the description
of different colors.
Display Mode is set to Graphics.
Event - - l This parameter indicates the queried
performance events.
Display Mode is set to List.
Statistical Item - - This parameter indicates the performance
items to be monitored.
Statistical Value - - This parameter indicates the statistical value
of the monitored performance items.
Time Flag - - This parameter indicates the time point of
each performance event.

A.12.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History
Control Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON History
Control.
Parameters
30-Second Enabled
Disabled
Disabled This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the 30-Second
monitoring function.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
30-Minute Enabled
Disabled
Enabled This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the 30-Minute
Custom Period 1 Enabled
Disabled
whether to enable Custom Period 1.
Disabled
whether to enable Custom Period 2.
History Register
Count(1-50)
1 to 50 16
6(Custom Period 2)
This parameter indicates or specifies the
quantity of the history registers.
Period Length(300
to 43200 seconds, a
multiple of 30)
300 to 43200 900 l This parameter indicates or specifies the
monitoring period in Custom Period 1.
l The value must be an integer multiple of
30.
Period Length(300
to 86400 seconds, a
multiple of 30)
300 to 86400 86400 l This parameter indicates or specifies the
monitoring period in Custom Period 2.
l The value must be an integer multiple of
30.

A.12.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.
Navigation Path
l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
l Click the RMON Setting tab.
Object Parameters
Object - - This parameter indicates the object to be
collected.
30-Second Enabled
Disabled
- This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the 30-Second
NOTE
In the case of Object, 30-Second cannot be set.
OptiX RTN 910
A-235
30-Minute Enabled
Disabled
l In RMON History Control Group of
the NE, if 30-Minute is set to Disabled,
Not Supported is displayed for this
parameter.
Disabled
whether to enable the monitoring
function based on Custom Period 1.
the NE, if Custom Period 1 is set to
Disabled, Not Supported is displayed
for this parameter.
Disabled
whether to enable the monitoring
function based on Custom Period 2.
the NE, if Custom Period 2 is set to
Disabled, Not Supported is displayed
for this parameter.

Event Parameters
Event - - This parameter indicates the performance
event to be monitored.
30-Second Enabled
Disabled
whether to enable the monitoring function
based on 30-Second.
30-Minute Enabled
Disabled
- This parameter indicates or specifies
Disabled
based on Custom Period 1.
Disabled
based on Custom Period 2.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Threshold Detect Report All
Do Not Detect
Report Only the
Upper Threshold
Report Only the
Lower Threshold
Report All l This parameter indicates or specifies the
threshold detection method.
l If the number of detected events reaches
the preset threshold, the events are
reported to the NMS. Otherwise, the
events are not reported to the NMS.
l If an event does not support this
parameter, Not Supported is displayed.
Upper Threshold 0 to
9223372036854775
80
- This parameter indicates or specifies the
upper threshold. If the number of
performance events exceeds the preset
upper threshold, the corresponding
performance events are reported.
Lower Threshold 0 to
9223372036854775
80
- This parameter indicates or specifies the
lower threshold. If the number of
performance events is less than the preset
lower threshold, the corresponding
performance events are reported.
Threshold Unit - - This parameter indicates the unit of each
threshold of the performance events.

A.13 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.
A.13.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced
This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.
OptiX RTN 910
A-237
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2. Click the General tab.
Parameters
Call Waiting Time
(s)
1 to 9 9 l This parameter indicates the waiting time
after the local station dials the number. If
the calling station does not receive the
response message from the called station
within the call waiting time, it
automatically removes the
communication connection.
l If less than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire
subnet, it is recommended that you set
this parameter to five seconds. If more
than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire
subnet, it is recommended that you set
this parameter to nine seconds.
l The call waiting time should be set to the
same for all the NEs.
Dialling Mode Pulse
Dual-Tone
Frequency
Dual-Tone
Frequency
This parameter indicates the dialling mode
of the orderwire phone.
Telephone No. - 888 l This parameter specifies the telephone
number of the network-wide orderwire
conference call.
l When a OptiX RTN 910 dials the
telephone number 888, the orderwire
phones of all the NEs on the orderwire
subnet ring. When a OptiX RTN 910
receives the call, the orderwire phones on
the other NEs do not ring. In this case, the
orderwire point-to-multipoint group call
changes to a point-to-point call between
two NEs.
l The telephone number of the orderwire
conference call should be the same for all
the nodes on the same subnet.
l The telephone number of the orderwire
conference call must have the same
length as the telephone number of the
orderwire phone (phone 1) at the local
site.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Phone 1 100 to 99999999 101 l This parameter specifies the orderwire
phone number of the local station. An
addressing call refers to a point-to-point
call.
l The length of the orderwire phone
number of each NE should be the same.
It is recommended that you set the phone
number to a three-digit number.
l The orderwire phone number of each NE
should be unique. It is recommended that
the phone numbers are allocated from
101 for the NEs in a sequential order
according to the NE IDs.
l The orderwire phone number cannot be
set to the group call number 888 and
cannot start with 888.
Available
Orderwire Port
- - This parameter indicates the available port
for the orderwire phone.
Selected
Orderwire Port
- - This parameter indicates the selected port
for the orderwire phone.

A.13.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced
This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Advanced tab.
Parameters for Bytes Occupied by Orderwire Phones
Orderwire
Occupied Bytes
E1
E2
E1 l This parameter specifies the overhead
byte that is used to transmit the orderwire
signals.
l Regardless the parameter value, the radio
link always uses a customized overhead
byte to transmit the orderwire signals.
Hence, this parameter should be set
according to the occupied SDH overhead
bytes in the ordinary SDH.

OptiX RTN 910
A-239
This topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.
Navigation Path
2. Click the F1 Data Port tab.
Parameters
Available Data
Channel
- - l This parameter indicates the available F1
data channel.
l Two data channels should be selected for
the configuration.
No - - This parameter indicates the number of the
F1 data port.
Data Channel 1 - - l If an SDH optical or electrical line port is
selected, this parameter corresponds to
the F1 byte in the SDH frame at the line
port.
l If an IF port is selected, this parameter
corresponds to the customized F1 byte in
the microwave frame at the IF port.
l If F1 is selected, this parameter
corresponds to the F1/S1 interface on the
SCC, Cross-Connect and Clock Board.
The F1/S1 interface complies with ITU-
T G.703 and operates at the rate of 64
kbit/s.
Data Channel 2

This topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Broadcast Data Port tab.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Parameters for Broadcast Data Ports
Overhead Byte SERIAL1 to
SERIAL4
SERIAL1 l In the case of an SDH optical/electrical
line, the preset overhead byte is used to
transmit the asynchronous data services.
l In the case of a radio link, a customized
serial overhead byte in the microwave
frame is used to transmit the
asynchronous data services.
Broadcast Data
Source
- - l When this parameter is set to the
SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the
corresponding SCC, Cross-Connect and
Clock Board is used.
l When this parameter is set to the SDH
optical/electrical line port, the value of
Overhead Byte of this port is used.
l When this parameter is set to the IF port,
the customized Serial byte in the
microwave frame of this port is used.
Available
Broadcast Data
Sink
- - This parameter indicates the available
broadcast data sink.
Selected Broadcast
Data Sink
- - l When this parameter is set to the
SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the
corresponding SCC, Cross-Connect and
Clock Board is used.
l When this parameter is set to the SDH
optical/electrical line port, the value of
Overhead Byte of this port is used.
l When this parameter is set to the IF port,
the customized Serial byte in the
microwave frame of this port is used.

This topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.
Navigation Path
Select the AUX logical board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface
from the Function Tree.
OptiX RTN 910
A-241
Parameters for the Basic Attributes
Operation Object - - This parameter indicates the operation
object.
Relay Control
Mode
Auto Control
Manual Control
Auto Control l Auto Control: If an alarm is reported, the
alarming relay is started up
automatically. Otherwise, the alarming
relay is shut down.
l Manual Control: Relay Status in Major
Alarm(K0) and Relay Status in Critical
Alarm(K1) need to be set.
Relay Status in
Major Alarm(K0)
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l This parameter indicates that the status of
the relay is set manually for major alarms.
l Enable: The relay is set to the "0N" status
for major alarms.
l Disabled: The relay is set to the "OFF"
status for major alarms.
l This parameter is valid only when Relay
Control Mode is set to Manual
Control.
Relay Status in
Critical Alarm(K1)
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l This parameter indicates that the status of
the relay is set manually for critical
alarms.
l Enable: The relay is set to the enabled
status for critical alarms.
l Disabled: The relay is set to the disabled
status for critical alarms.
l This parameter is valid only when Relay
Control Mode is set to Manual
Control.

Parameters for the Input Relay
object.
Path Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the
name of the channel.
Using Status Unused
Used
Unused This parameter specifies whether the alarm
interface of the input relay is used.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Alarm Mode Relay Turns Off/
High Level
Relay Turns On/
Low Level
Relay Turns Off/
High Level
l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns
Off/High Level, an alarm is generated
when the relay is turned off.
l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns
On/Low Level, an alarm is generated
when the relay is turned on.
l This parameter is valid only when Using
Status is set to Used.
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Warning Alarm
Critical Alarm This parameter specifies the severity of the
alarm that is generated at the input relay.

Parameters for the Output Relay
object.
Output Path Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the
name of the output channel.
Use or Not Unused
Used
Unused This parameter specifies whether the alarm
interface of the output relay is used.

Parameters for the Temperature Attributes
object.
Temperature
Upper Threshold
(Deg.C)
-40.0 to 80.0 - This parameter specifies the upper
temperature threshold of the board. When
the actual temperature is higher than the
preset value, an alarm is generated.
Temperature
Lower Threshold
(Deg.C)
-40.0 to 80.0 - This parameter specifies the lower
temperature threshold of the board. When
the actual temperature is lower than the
preset value, an alarm is generated.

OptiX RTN 910
A-243
Parameters for the Alarm Relay
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Warning Alarm
Critical Alarm
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Warning Alarm
This parameter indicates the severity of the
alarm.
Alarm Output
Channel
CSK-1
CSK-2
CSK-3
CSK-4
CSK-1 This parameter specifies the channel of the
output alarm relay.

A.14 Parameters for Board Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the Hybrid/AM function.
A.14.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records
This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.
A.14.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS)
test.
A.14.6 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.
A.14.7 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of the
ODU.
A.14.8 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of
the ODU.
A.14.9 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the
ODU.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.
A.14.11 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
function.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH interfaces.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.
A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.
A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave
interfaces.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave
interfaces.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave
interfaces.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.
Navigation Path
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the IF Attributes tab.
Parameters
IF interface.
Radio Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter indicates or specifies the
ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a
radio link, this parameter is used to
prevent incorrect connections of radio
links between sites.
l Each radio link of an NE should have a
unique link ID, and the link IDs at both
ends of a radio link should be the same.
OptiX RTN 910
A-245
Received Radio
Link ID
1 to 4094 - l This parameter indicates the received ID
of the radio link.
does not match the preset value of Radio
Link ID at the local end, the local end
inserts the AIS signal to the downstream
direction of the service. At the same time,
the local end reports an alarm to the NMS,
indicating that the link IDs do not match.
IF Port Loopback Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the
loopback status of the IF interface.
l Non-Loopback indicates that the
loopback is cancelled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the IF signals
transmitted to the opposite end are looped
back.
l Outloop indicates that the received SDH
signals are looped back.
l Generally, this parameter is used to locate
the faults that occur at each IF interface.
The IF loopback is used for diagnosis. If
this function is enabled, the services at the
related ports are affected. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to Non-
Loopback.
2M Wayside
Enable Status
a
Disabled
Enabled
whether the radio link transmits the
wayside E1 service.
l The wayside E1 service can be supported
by the IF1 board in the 7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or
9,E3,14MHz,16QAM mode.
2M Wayside Input
Board
a
slot in which the 2M wayside service is
accessed.
l This parameter can be set only when 2M
Wayside Enable Status is set to
Enabled.
l The wayside E1 service can be supported
by the IF1 board in the 7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or
9,E3,14MHz,16QAM mode.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
350 MHz
Consecutive Wave
Status
Stop
Start
Stop l This parameter indicates or specifies the
status of transmitting the 350 MHz carrier
signals at the IF interface.
l This parameter can be set to Start in the
commissioning process only. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to Stop.
Otherwise, the services are interrupted.
XPIC Enabled
b
Enabled
Disabled
whether the XPIC function of the IFX2
board is enabled.
l If the IFX2 board does not perform the
XPIC function, this parameter should be
set to Disabled. In this case, the XPIC
cable is required to perform self-loop for
the XPIC port on the IFX2 board.
Enable IEEE-1588
Timeslot
c
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled If the OptiX RTN 910 is interconnected with
the packet radio equipment, this parameter
should be set to Enabled. Otherwise, this
parameter should be set to Disabled.

NOTE
l a. The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support the 2M wayside service.
l b. The IFU2 and IF1 boards do not support the XPIC function.
l c. The IF1 board does not support the IEEE-1588 timeslot function.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.
Navigation Path
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the ATPC Attributes tab.
Parameters
IF interface.
OptiX RTN 910
A-247
ATPC Enable
Status
Disabled
Enabled
l When this parameter is set to Enabled
and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB
higher or lower than the central value
the ATPC lower threshold at the receive
end, the receiver notifies the transmitter
to decrease or increase the transmit power
attributes.
ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm)
receive power.
(dBm) is set to Disabled.
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
-35.0 to -90.0 -70.0
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Enabled
Disabled
enabled.
link.
Threshold(dBm).
ATPC Upper
Automatic
Threshold(dBm)
- - l This parameter indicates that the
ATPC upper and lower thresholds.
l This parameter is valid only when ATPC
Automatic Threshold Enable Status is
set to Enabled.
ATPC Lower
Automatic
Threshold(dBm)
- -

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the Hybrid/AM function.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select a Hybrid IF board from the Object Tree and then choose
Configuration > Hybrid/AM Configuration from the Function Tree.
Parameters
IF port.
IF Channel
Bandwidth
7M
14M
28M
56M
7M IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the
channel spacing of the corresponding radio
link. This parameter is set according to the
OptiX RTN 910
A-249
AM Mode Asymmetric Asymmetric When AM Mode is set to Asymmetric, the
AM switching in one direction of the radio
link does not trigger AM switching in the
other direction of the radio link.
NOTE
On the OptiX RTN equipment, this parameter
can be set to Asymmetric only.
AM Enable Status Disable
Enable
Disable l When this parameter is set to Disable, the
radio link uses only the specified
Modulation Mode.
l When this parameter is set to Enable, the
radio link uses the corresponding
channel conditions.
enabled.
Modulation Mode
of the Guaranteed
AM Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
QPSK This parameter specifies the lowest-gain
service transmission bandwidth that the
Hybrid radio must ensure and the
Enable Status is set to Enable.
Modulation Mode
of the Full AM
Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
NOTE
Enable Status is set to Enable.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Manually
Specified
Modulation Mode
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
transmission.
Enable Status is set to Disable.
Guaranteed E1
Capacity
- - l When AM Enable Status is set to
Enable, this parameter depends on IF
Channel Bandwidth and Modulation
Mode of the Guaranteed AM
Capacity and is not configurable.
l When AM Enable Status is set to
Disable, this parameter depends on IF
Channel Bandwidth and Manually
Specified Modulation Mode and is not
configurable.
E1 Capacity - - This parameter specifies the number of E1
services that can be transmitted in the
Hybrid work mode.

A.14.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records
This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > ATPC Adjustment Records from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Port - - This parameter indicates the port for the
ATPC adjustment.
Event NO. - - This parameter indicates the number of the
ATPC adjustment event.
Adjustment Time - - This parameter indicates the time of the
ATPC adjustment.
Adjustment
Direction
- - This parameter indicates the direction of the
adjustment at the port.
OptiX RTN 910
A-251
Switchover - - This parameter indicates the switching
operation at the port.
Transmitted
Power(dBm)
- - This parameter indicates the transmitted
power of the port to be switched.
Received Power
(dBm)
- - This parameter indicates the received power
of the port to be switched.

A.14.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS)
test.
Navigation Path
Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Port - - This parameter indicates the port for the
PRBS test.
Direction Cross
Tributary
Cross l This parameter indicates or specifies the
direction of the PRBS test.
l In the tributary direction, the PRBS test
is performed to check the connectivity of
the cable from the tributary board to the
DDF.
l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS
test is performed to check the processing
of the service from the tributary board to
the NE at the remote end.
Duration 1 to 255 1 This parameter indicates or specifies the
duration of the PRBS test.
Measured Time s
10min
h
s This parameter indicates or specifies the
time unit used for the PRBS test.
Start Time - - This parameter indicates the start time of the
PRBS test.
Progress - - This parameter indicates the progress
percentage of the PRBS test.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Total PRBS - - This parameter indicates the number of bit
errors that occur in the PRBS test.
Accumulating
Mode
Selected
Deselected
Deselected This parameter specifies whether to display
the values in accumulative mode. If
Accumulating Mode is selected, it
indicates that the values are displayed in
accumulative mode.

A.14.6 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency
Attribute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.
Navigation Path
l Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab.
Parameters
Board - - This parameter indicates the corresponding
ODU.
Transmit
Frequency(MHz)
the central frequency of the channel.
less than the sum of the minimum
transmit frequency supported by the
ODU and a half of the channel spacing,
and must not be more than the difference
between the maximum transmit
frequency supported by the ODU and a
half of the channel spacing.
frequencies at both ends of a radio link
should be one T/R spacing.
OptiX RTN 910
A-253
T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the
spacing between the transmit frequency
and receive frequency of the ODU to
prevent mutual interference of the
transmitter and receiver.
l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the
higher than the receive frequency. If the
ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit
frequency is one T/R spacing lower than
the receive frequency.
spacing, this parameter is set to 0,
by the ODU is used.
radio link.
Actual Transmit
Frequency(MHz)
- - This parameter indicates the actual transmit
Actual Receive
Frequency(MHz)
Actual T/R
Spacing(MHz)
- - This parameter indicates the actual T/R
spacing of the ODU.
The Range of
frequency Point
(MHz)
- - This parameter indicates the working range
of the frequency of the ODU.

A.14.7 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of the
ODU.
Navigation Path
l Click the Power Attributes tab.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Parameters
ODU.
Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)
modulation module..
exceed this value.
Transmit Power
(dBm)
- - l This parameter specifies the transmit
power of the ODU. This parameter
cannot be set to a value that exceeds the
nominal power rang of the ODU or a
value that exceeds Maximum Transmit
Power(dBm).
radio link.
OptiX RTN 910
A-255
Power to Be
Received(dBm)
used in the antenna alignment stage. After
this parameter is set, the NE
Actual Transmit
Power(dBm)
- - l This parameter indicates the actual
l If the ATPC function is enabled, the
queried actual transmit power may be
different from the preset value.
Actual Received
Power(dBm)
power of the ODU.
Actual range of
Power(dBm)
- - This parameter indicates the range of the
actual transmit power of the ODU.

Equip Information
Equip Type - - l This parameter indicates the equipment
type of the ODU.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Station Type Tx Low
Tx High
- l This parameter indicates whether the
station.
the ODU.
Transmission
Power Type
Standard Power
Output
High Power Output
- This parameter indicates the level of the

A.14.8 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment
Information
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of
the ODU.
Navigation Path
Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the Equipment Information tab.
Parameters
ODU.
Equipment Type PDH
SDH
- l This parameter indicates the equipment
type of the ODU.
T/R Spacing(MHz) - - This parameter indicates the T/R spacing of
the ODU.
OptiX RTN 910
A-257
Intermediate
Frequency
Bandwidth (MHz)
- - This parameter indicates the IF frequency
bandwidth of the ODU.
Station Type - - l This parameter indicates whether the
station.
Transmission
Power Type
- - This parameter indicates the level of the
Produce Time - - This parameter indicates the manufacturing
time of the ODU.
the ODU.

A.14.9 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the
ODU.
Navigation Path
l Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Parameters
ODU.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
RF Loopback Non-Loopback
Inloop
loopback status of the RF interface of the
ODU.
loopback is canceled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the RF signals
back.
l This function is used for fault locating for
the RF interfaces. The RF Loopback
function is used for diagnosis and may
affect the services that are transmitted
over the interfaces. Hence, exercise
precaution before starting this function.
Non-Loopback.
Configure
Transmission
Status
unmute
mute
unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the
l If this parameter is set to mute, the
l If this parameter is set to unmute, the
ODU can normally transmit and receive
microwave signals.
unmute.
Actual
Transmission
Status
unmute
mute
- This parameter indicates the actual transmit
status of the ODU.
Factory
Information
- - This parameter indicates the manufacturer
information about the ODU.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.
Navigation Path
Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
l Select By Board/Port(Channel), and select Port or VC4 Channel from the list box.
OptiX RTN 910
A-259
Parameters
SDH interface.
Optical Interface
Name
a
- - This parameter indicates or specifies the
name of the optical interface.
Laser Switch
a
Open
Close
Open l This parameter indicates or specifies the
on/off state of the laser.
l This parameter is set for SDH optical
interfaces only.
Open.
Optical(Electrical)
Interface
Loopback
a
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
loopback status on the SDH interface.
l Inloop indicates that the SDH signals
back.
the SDH interfaces. The Optical
(Electrical) Interface Loopback
Non-Loopback.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
VC4 Loopback
b
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
loopback status in the VC-4 path.
l Inloop indicates that the VC-4 signals
back.
l Outloop indicates that the received VC-4
the VC-4 paths. The VC4 Loopback
Non-Loopback.

NOTE
l a: Indicates the parameters that are supported when Port is selected from the list box.
l b: Indicates the parameters that are supported when VC4 Channel is selected from the list box.
A.14.11 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
function.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Optical Interface - - This parameter indicates the corresponding
optical interface.
OptiX RTN 910
A-261
Automatic
Shutdown
Disabled
Enabled
whether the Automatic Laser
Shutdown function is enabled or
disabled for the laser.
l The ALS function allows the laser to shut
down automatically when an optical port
does not carry services, an optical fiber is
broken, or no optical signal is received.
l You can set On Period(ms), Off Period
(ms), and Continuously On-test Period
(ms) only when this parameter is set to
Enabled.
On Period(ms) 1000 to 3000 2000 This parameter indicates or specifies the
period when a shutdown laser automatically
starts up and tests whether the optical fiber
is normal.
Off Period(ms) 2000 to 300000 60000 This parameter indicates or specifies the
period when the laser does not work (with
the ALS function being enabled).
Continuously On-
test Period(ms)
2000 to 300000 90000 This parameter indicates or specifies the
period when a shutdown laser is manually
started up and tests whether the optical fiber
is normal.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH interfaces.
Navigation Path
Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
l Select By Board/Port(Channel).
l Select Port from the list box.
Parameters
port.
Port Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the
name of the port.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Tributary
Loopback
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
loopback status in the associated path of
the tributary unit.
l Inloop indicates that the PDH signals
back.
l Outloop indicates that the received PDH
the paths of the tributary unit. The
Tributary Loopback function is used for
diagnosis and may affect the services that
are transmitted over the interfaces.
Hence, exercise precaution before
starting this function.
Non-Loopback.
Port Impedance 75 Ohm
120 ohm
- This parameter indicates the impedance of a
path, which depends on the tributary unit.
Service Load
Indication
Load
Non-Loaded
service loading status in a specific path.
l When this parameter is set to Load, the
board detects whether alarms exist in the
path.
Loaded, the board does not detect
whether there are alarms in the path.
l If a path does not carry any services, you
can set this parameter to Non-Loaded for
the path to mask all the alarms. If a path
carries services, you need to set this
parameter to Load for the path.
OptiX RTN 910
A-263
Retiming Mode Normal
Retiming Mode of
Tributary Clock
Retiming Mode of
Cross-connect
Clock
retiming mode of a specific path.
l By using the retiming function, the
retiming reference signal from the SDH
network and the service data signal are
combined and then sent to the client
equipment, thus decreasing the output
jitter in the signal. In this way, the
retiming function ensures that the service
code flow can normally transfer the
retiming reference signal.
l When this parameter is set to Normal, the
retiming function is not used.
l When this parameter is set to Retiming
Mode of Tributary Clock, the retiming
function is used with the clock of the
upstream tributary unit traced.
l When this parameter is set to the
retiming function is used with the clock
of the upstream tributary unit traced.,
the retiming function is used with the
clock of the cross-connect unit traced.
l It is recommended that the external clock,
instead of the retiming function, should
be used to provide reference clock signals
for the equipment.
l If the retiming function is required, it is
recommended that you set this parameter
to Retiming Mode of Cross-connect
Clock.
Port Service Type E1 - This parameter indicates the type of services
that are processed in a path. It depends on
the services that are transmitted in a path.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.
Navigation Path
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the General Attributes tab.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
the port name.
the port name.
Enable Port Enabled
Disabled
Enabled This parameter indicates
port.
Port Mode Layer 2 Layer 2 This parameter indicates
port.
802.1Q
QinQ
- l This parameter
the port to process the
received packets.
l If you set this
parameter to Null, the
port transparently
transmits the received
packets.
l If you set this
parameter to 802.1Q,
the port identifies the
packets that comply
with the IEEE 802.1Q
standard.
l If you set this
parameter to QinQ, the
port identifies the
packets that comply
with the IEEE 802.1
QinQ standard.
OptiX RTN 910
A-265
Working Mode Auto-Negotiation
10M Half-Duplex
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
1000M Full-Duplex
Auto-Negotiation l The Ethernet ports of
different types support
different working
modes.
l When the equipment on
the opposite side works
in auto-negotiation
mode, set the working
mode of the equipment
on the local side to
Auto-Negotiation.
in full-duplex mode, set
the working mode of
local side to 10M Full-
Duplex, 100M Full-
Duplex, or 1000M
Full-Duplex
depending on the port
rate of the equipment
on the opposite side.
in half-duplex mode,
set the working mode
of the equipment on the
local side to 10M Half-
Duplex, 100M Half-
Duplex, or Auto-
Negotiation depending
on the port rate of the
equipment on the
opposite side.
l The GE optical
interface supports the
1000M full-duplex
mode only.
Max Frame Length
(byte)
1518 to 9600 1522 The value of this
parameter should be
greater than the length of
any frame to be
transported.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Auto-Negotiation
Enable
Auto-Negotiation
10M Half-Duplex
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
1000M Full-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex l This parameter
specifies the auto-
negotiation capability
of the Ethernet port.
only when Working
Mode is set to Auto-
Negotiation.
Logical Port Attribute Optical Port
Electrical Port
Optical Port l This parameter
specifies the attribute
of the logical port.
l The SFP on the EM6F
board supports the
optical port and
electrical port.
Physical Port Attribute - - This parameter indicates
the attribute of the
physical port.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Flow Control tab.
the port name.
OptiX RTN 910
A-267
Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
Disabled
Enable Symmetric Flow
Control
Disabled l This parameter is valid
only when Working
Mode is not set to
Auto-Negotiation.
l The non-
autonegotiation flow
control mode of the
equipment on the local
side must be consistent
with the non-
autonegotiation flow
control mode of the
equipment on the
opposite side
Auto-Negotiation Flow
Control Mode
Disabled
Enable Symmetric Flow
Control
Disabled l This parameter is valid
only when Working
Mode is set to Auto-
Negotiation.
l The auto-negotiation
flow control mode of
local side must be
consistent with the
auto-negotiation flow
control mode of the
equipment on the
opposite side

A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2
Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.
the port name.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
QinQ Type Domain - - l This parameter
specifies the QinQ type
domain.
l When Encapsulation
Type in the General
Attributes tab page is
set to QinQ, you need
to set QinQ Type
Domain. The default
value is 88A8.
l When Encapsulation
Type in the General
Attributes tab page is
set to Null or 802.1Q,
you cannot set QinQ
Type Domain. In this
case, QinQ Type
Domain is displayed as
FFFF and cannot be
changed.
l QinQ Type Domain
should be set to the
same value for all the
ports on the EM6T/
EM6F board or the
EM4T/EM4F logical
board.
OptiX RTN 910
A-269
TAG Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tag Aware l This parameter
specifies the TAG flag
of a port. For details
about the TAG flags
and associated frame-
processing methods,
see Table A-1.
services are frames
with the VLAN tag
(tagged frames), this
parameter is set to Tag
Aware.
services are frames
without the VLAN tag
(untagged frames), this
parameter is set to
Access.
l If the accessed services
contain tagged frames
and untagged frames,
Hybrid.
Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter is valid
only when TAG is set
to Access or Hybrid.
l For details about the
functions of this
parameter, see Table
A-1.
situations.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
VLAN Priority 0 to 7 0 l This parameter is valid
only when TAG is set
to Access or Hybrid.
l For details about the
functions of this
parameter, see Table
A-1.
l When the VLAN
priority is required to
divide streams or to be
used for other
purposes, this
parameter is set
according to the
In normal cases, it is

Table A-1 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames
Port Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag Aware Access Hybrid
Ingress UNI Tagged frame The port receives the
frame.
The port discards
the frame.
The port receives
the frame.
Untagged frame The port discards the
frame.
The ports add the
VLAN tag, to which
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority
correspond, to the
frame and receives
the frame.
The ports add the
VLAN tag, to which
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority
correspond, to the
frame and receives
the frame.
OptiX RTN 910
A-271
Port Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Egress UNI Tagged frame The port transmits
the frame.
The port strips the
VLAN tag from the
frame and then
transmits the frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
Default VLAN
ID, the port strips
the VLAN tag
from the frame
and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is not
Default VLAN
ID, the port
directly transmits
the frame.

A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced
Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
the port name.
Port Physical
Parameters
the physical parameters of
the port.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
MAC Loopback Non-Loopback
Inloop
Non-Loopback l This parameter
specifies the loopback
state at the MAC layer.
When this parameter is
set to Inloop, the
Ethernet signals
transmitted to the
opposite end are looped
back.
l In normal cases, it is
PHY Loopback Non-Loopback
Inloop
Non-Loopback l This parameter
specifies the loopback
state at the PHY layer.
When this parameter is
set to Inloop, the
Ethernet physical
signals transmitted to
the opposite end are
looped back.
l In normal cases, it is
Loopback Check - - This parameter specifies
whether to enable loop
detection, which is used to
check whether a loop
exists on the port.
Loopback Port
Shutdown
whether to enable the loop
port shutdown function.
Egress PIR Bandwidth
(kbit/s)
the egress PIR bandwidth.
Enabling Broadcast
Packet Suppression
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled This parameter specifies
whether to limit the traffic
rate of the broadcast
packets according to the
proportion of the
broadcast packets in the
total packets. When the
equipment at the opposite
end may encounter a
broadcast storm, this
parameter is set to
Enabled.
OptiX RTN 910
A-273
Broadcast Packet
Suppression Threshold
1 to 100 30 When the proportion of
the broadcast packets in
the total packets exceeds
the value of this
parameter, the received
broadcast packets are
discarded. The value of
this parameter should be
more than the proportion
of the broadcast packets in
the total packets before
the broadcast storm
occurs. In normal cases,
30% or higher.

A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic
Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
l Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the Basic Attributes tab.
Parameters
IF port.
Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the
customized port name.
Port Mode Layer 2 Layer 2 This parameter indicates the working mode
of the Ethernet name.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Encapsulation
Type
Null
802.1Q
QinQ
802.1Q l This parameter specifies the method of
the port to process the received packets.
l If this parameter is set to Null, the port
transparently transmits the received
packets.
l If this parameter is set to 802.1Q, the port
identifies the packets that comply with
the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
l If this parameter is set to QinQ, the port
identifies the packets that comply with
the IEEE 802.1 QinQ standard.

A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2
Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
l Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.
Parameters for Layer 2 Attributes
IF port.
QinQ Type
Domain
- - l This parameter specifies the QinQ type
domain.
l This parameter can be set only when
Encapsulation Type in General
Attributes is set to QinQ.
OptiX RTN 910
A-275
Tag Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tag Aware l This parameter specifies the TAG flag of
a port. For details about the TAG flags
and associated frame-processing
methods, see Table A-2.
l If all the accessed services are frames that
contain the VLAN tag (tagged frames),
set this parameter to "Tag Aware".
l If all the accessed services are frames that
do not contain the VLAN tag (untagged
frames), set this parameter to "Access".
l If the accessed services contain tagged
frames and untagged frames, set this
parameter to "Hybrid".
Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter is valid only when TAG
is set to Access or Hybrid.
l For details about the functions of this
parameter, see Table A-2.
to the actual situations.
VLAN Priority 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 l This parameter is valid only when TAG
is set to Access or Hybrid.
l For details about the functions of this
parameter, see Table A-2.
l When the VLAN priority is required to
divide streams or to be used for other
purposes, this parameter needs to be set
according to the planning information. In
normal cases, it is recommended that you

Table A-2 Data frame processing
Status Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Ingress Port Tagged frame The port receives the
frame.
The port discards
the frame.
The port receives
the frame.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Status Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Untagged frame The port discards the
frame.
The port receives
the frame after the
VLAN tag that
corresponds to
"Default VLAN ID"
and "VLAN
Priority" are added
to the frame.
The port receives
the frame after the
VLAN tag that
corresponds to
"Default VLAN ID"
and "VLAN
Priority" are added
to the frame.
Egress Port Tagged frame The port transmits
the frame.
The port strips the
VLAN tag from the
frame and then
transmits the frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
"Default VLAN
ID", the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is not
"Default VLAN
ID", the port
directly transmits
the frame.

A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced
Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
l Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Parameters for Advanced Attributes
IF port.
OptiX RTN 910
A-277
Radio Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter specifies the ID of the
radio link. As the identifier of a radio link,
this parameter is used to prevent incorrect
connections of radio links between sites.
l The ID of each radio link of an NE must
be unique, and the link IDs at both ends
of a radio link must be the same.
Received Radio
Link ID
- - l This parameter indicates the received ID
of the radio link.
does not match with the preset value of
Radio Link ID at the local end, the local
end inserts the AIS signal to the
downstream direction of the service. At
the same time, the local end reports an
alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link
IDs do not match.
IF Port Loopback Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
loopback status of the IF interface.
l Inloop indicates that the IF signals
back.
l Generally, this parameter is used to locate
the faults that occur at each IF interface.
The IF loopback is used for diagnosis. If
this function is enabled, the services at the
related ports are affected. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to Non-
Loopback.
Composite Port
Loopback
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
loopback status on the composite
interface.
l Inloop indicates that the composite
signals transmitted to the opposite end are
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received
composite signals are looped back.
Non-Loopback.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Error Frame
Discard Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
whether to discard the Ethernet frame
when a CRC error occurs in an Ethernet
frame.
l If the Ethernet service transmitted on the
IF_ETH port is a voice service or a video
service, you can set this parameter to
Disabled.
l The IF1 board does not support this
parameter.
MAC Address - - l This parameter indicates the MAC
address of the port.
parameter.
Transmitting Rate
(Kbit/s)
- - l This parameter indicates the transmit rate
of the local port.
parameter.
Receiving Rate
(Kbit/s)
- - l This parameter indicates the receive rate
of the local port.
parameter.
MAC Loopback Non-Loopback
Inloop
Non-Loopback l This parameter specifies the loopback
state at the MAC layer. When this
parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet
signals transmitted to the opposite end are
looped back.
you use the default value.
parameter.
PHY Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback The IF port on the OptiX RTN 910 does not
support the setting of this parameter.

A.15 Parameters for Overhead
This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads
(RSOHs).
OptiX RTN 910
A-279
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-4 path overheads (POHs).
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads
(RSOHs).
Navigation Path
1. Select an SDH interface board in the NE Explorer Choose Configuration > Overhead
Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree.
2. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
Parameters for Setting the Display Format
Display in Text
Format
Selected
Deselected
Selected This parameter specifies the display in the
text format.
Display in
Hexadecimal
Selected
Deselected
Deselected This parameter specifies the display in the
hexadecimal format.

Object - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.
J0 to be Sent
([Mode]Content)
- [16 Bytes]HuaWei
SBS
If the NE at the opposite end reports the
J0_MM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the J0 byte to be received at the
opposite end.
J0 to be Received
([Mode]Content)
- [Disabled] l This parameter specifies the J0 byte to be
received.
l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the
board does not monitor the received J0
byte.
default value.

OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Overhead
Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.
Display in Text
Format
Selected
Deselected
text format.
Display in
Hexadecimal
Selected
Deselected
hexadecimal format.

Parameters for the Trace Byte J1
J1 to be Sent
([Mode]Content)
- [16 Bytes]HuaWei
SBS
LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC3 alarm, this
parameter is set according to the J1 byte to
be received at the opposite end.
J1 to be Received
([Mode]Content)
- [Disabled] l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the
byte.
default value.

Parameters for the Signal Flag C2
C2 to be Sent - - If the NE at the opposite end reports the
HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the C2 byte to be received at the
opposite end.
C2 to be Received - - If the NE at the local end reports the
HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the C2 byte to be sent at the
opposite end.

OptiX RTN 910
A-281
Parameters for Overhead Termination
VC4 Overhead
Termination
Termination
Pass-Through
Auto
Auto l If this parameter is set to Pass-Through,
the NE forwards the original overhead
after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead
regardless of the C2 byte.
l If this parameter is set to Termination,
the NE generates the new VC-4 path
overhead according to the board setting
after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead
regardless of the C2 byte.
l If this parameter is set to Auto, the VC-4
path overhead in the VC-4 pass-through
service is passed through, and the VC-4
path overhead in the VC-12 service is
terminated.
l It is recommended that you use the default
value.

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Overhead
Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.
Display in Text
Format
Selected
Deselected
text format.
Display in
Hexadecimal
Selected
Deselected
hexadecimal format.

Parameters for the Trace Byte
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
J2 to be Sent - [16 Bytes]HuaWei
SBS
HP_TIM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the J2 byte to be received by
the NE at the opposite end.
J2 to be Received - [Disabled] l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the
byte.
default value.

Parameters for the Signal Flag
Signal Label
(L1,L2,L3 of V5) to
be Sent
- - If the NE at the opposite end reports the
LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm, this
parameter is set according to the V5 byte to
be received at the opposite end.
Signal Label
(L1,L2,L3 of V5) to
be Received
- - If the NE at the local end reports the
LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm, this
parameter is set according to the V5 byte to
be sent at the opposite end.

OptiX RTN 910
A-283
B Board Loopback Types
Different service interface boards support different loopback types.
Table B-1 Loopback types supported by different service interface boards
Board Loopback Type Remarks
SL1D l Supports the optical
interface inloop
l Supports the optical
interface outloop
l Supports the VC-4 path
inloop
outloop
The SL1D boards described in
this topic include the physical
SL1D board and the logical
SL1D board that the physical
CSTA/CSHC board maps.
SP3S and SP3D l Supports the tributary
inloop
l Supports the tributary
outloop
The SP3S and SP3D boards
described in this topic include
the physical SP3S and SP3D
boards and the logical SP3S and
SP3D boards that the physical
CSTA, CSHA, CHSB, and
CHSC boards map.
EM4T and EM4F
EM6T and EM6F
l Supports the Ethernet port
inloop at the MAC layer
l Supports the Ethernet port
inloop at the PHY layer
The EM4T/EM4F is the logical
Ethernet board mapping the
physical Ethernet board CSHA/
CSHB/CSHC.
IF1 l Supports the IF port inloop
l Supports the IF port outloop
inloop
-
OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description B Board Loopback Types
B-1
Board Loopback Type Remarks
IFU2 l Supports the IF port inloop
l Supports the composite port
inloop
outloop
l Supports the MAC inloop at
IF_ETH ports
-
IFX2 l Supports the IF port inloop
inloop
outloop
l Supports the MAC inloop at
IF_ETH ports
-
B Board Loopback Types
OptiX RTN 910
B-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
C Indicators, Weight, and Power
Consumption of Boards
Indicators of Boards
Table C-1 Description of the indicators on the CSTA
board.
BIOS boot state.
initialized.
fails.
OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards
C-1
board.
system.

Table C-2 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB
board.
C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards
OptiX RTN 910
C-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
BIOS boot state.
initialized.
fails.
board.
system.

Table C-3 Description of the indicators on the CSHC
board.
OptiX RTN 910
C-3
BIOS boot state.
initialized.
fails.
board.
system.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)

Table C-4 Description of the indicators on the IF1
normally.
to the board.
service.
configured.
ODU.
an RDI.
OptiX RTN 910
C-5
system.
system.
system.

Table C-5 Description of the indicators on the IFU2
normally.
to the board.
service.
configured.
ODU.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
an RDI.
system.
system.
system.

Table C-6 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F
l There is no power supplied to the board.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the
system.
On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.
PROG On for 100 ms (green) and off
being reset, the software is being loaded to
the flash memory.
On for 300 ms (green) and off
being reset, the board software is in BIOS
boot state.
On (green) The upper layer software is being initialized.
OptiX RTN 910
C-7
On for 100 ms (red) and off for
100 ms repeatedly
fails.
On (red) When the board is being powered on or
being reset, the memory self-check fails or
loading the upper layer software fails.
When the board is running, the logic file or
upper layer software is lost.
LINK1
a
Blinking (yellow) The GE1 interface is receiving or
transmitting data.
LINK2
a
Flashing (green) The GE2 interface is receiving or
transmitting data.

NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE optical interfaces.
Table C-7 Description of the indicators on the SL1D
normally.
to the board.
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
service.
configured.
LOS1 On (red) The first optical interface of
the SL1D reports the R_LOS
alarm.
Off The first optical interface of
the SL1D does not report the
R_LOS alarm.
LOS2 On (red) The second optical interface
of the SL1D reports the
R_LOS alarm.
Off The second optical interface
of the SL1D does not report
the R_LOS alarm.

Table C-8 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D
normally.
to the board.
service.
configured.

OptiX RTN 910
C-9
Table C-9 Description of the indicators on the AUX
board.
board.
system.

Table C-10 Description of the power status indicators
Indicator Status Description
PWRA On (green) The power supply is connected.
PWRB On (green) The power supply is connected.

Table C-11 Description of the fan status indicators
FAN On (green) The fan is running normally.
On (red) The fan is faulty.
Off The fan is not powered on or is not installed.

OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Weight and Power Consumption of Boards
Table C-12 Weight and power consumption of boards
Boards Weight (kg) Power consumption (W)
CSTA 1.079 kg <19 W
CSHA 1.110 kg <19 W
CSHB 1.158 kg <22 W
CSHC 1.129 kg < 20 W
IF1A 0.720 kg < 8 W
IF1B 0.720 kg < 8 W
IFU2A 0.790 kg < 22 W
IFU2B 0.790 kg < 17.4 W
IFX2 0.796 kg < 24 W
EM6T 0.370 kg < 12 W
EM6F 0.382 kg < 12 W
SL1D 0.296 kg < 3 W
SP3S 0.544 kg < 5 W
SP3D 0.644 kg < 10 W
AUX 0.270 kg < 2.1 W
PIU 0.120 kg < 0.5 W
FAN 0.200 kg < 2.3 W (room temperature)
< 17 W (high temperature)

OptiX RTN 910
C-11
D Glossary
Terms are listed in an alphabetical order.
Number
1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/
1.75 in.)
1+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of one working channel and one
protection channel. Two ODUs and two IF boards are used at each end of
a radio link.

A
Adaptive
modulation
A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode
based on the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the
equipment adopts a high-efficiency modulation mode to improve the
transmission efficiency and the spectrum utilization of the system. When
the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts the low-efficiency
modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the link
that carries high-priority services.
Add/Drop
multiplexer
A network element that adds/drops the PDH signal or STM-x (x < N) signal
to/from the STM-N signal on the SDH transport network.
Adjacent
channel
alternate
polarization
A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a
horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit
two signals.
Automatic
transmit power
control
A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit
signal detected at the receiver.

C
OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description D Glossary
D-1
Co-channel
dual
polarization
A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization
wave and a vertical polarization wave to transmit two signals. The co-
channel dual polarization is twice the transmission capacity of the single
polarization.
Cross
polarization
interference
cancellation
A technology used in the case of the co-channel dual polarization (CCDP)
to eliminate the cross-connect interference between two polarization
waves in the CCDP.

D
DC-C A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-
circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet
and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and
the electric equipment.
DC-I A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-
circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet
and is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power
supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
Digital
modulation
A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and
frequency of the carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal.
In this manner, the information can be transmitted by the carrier.
Dual-polarized
antenna
An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent
radio waves orthogonally polarized.

E
Equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can
compensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency
selective fading.
Bit error A symptom that the quality of the transmitted information is degraded
because some bits of a data stream are errored after being received,
decided, and regenerated.

F
Forward error
correction
A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to
the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the
bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end.
Frequency
diversity
A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with
a certain frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal
and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact
of fading.
D Glossary
OptiX RTN 910
D-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)

G
Gateway
network
element
A network element that is used for communication between the NE
application layer and the NM application layer.

H
Hybrid radio The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid
radio supports the AM function.

I
Indoor Unit The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements
accessing, multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.
Internet Group
Management
Protocol
The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast
groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent
multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships.
Intermediate
frequency
The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal
and an RF signal.
IGMP
snooping
A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This
protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and
analyze the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between
hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data
on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.

L
Layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet
switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address.
Since the MAC address is the second layer of the OSI model, this data
forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located
on the NE management layer of the transport network.
Link
aggregation
group
An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to
form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link
aggregation group as if it were a single link.
Trail A type of transport entity, mainly engaged in transferring signals from the
input of the trail source to the output of the trail sink, and monitoring the
integrality of the transferred signals.

M
OptiX RTN 910
D-3
Multiplex
section
protection
The function performed to provide capability for switching a signal
between and including two MST functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.
Multiple
Spanning Tree
Protocol
MSTP is an evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol and the Rapid
Spanning Tree Protocol, and was introduced in IEEE 802.1s as amendment
to 802.1Q, 1998 edition. Standard IEEE 802.1Q-2003 now includes
MSTP.

N
N+1 protection A microwave link protection system that employs N working channels and
one protection channel.
Network
element
A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software
running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control board
which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software
runs on the system control Unit.
Network
management
system
The network management system in charge of the operation,
administration, and maintenance of a network.
Non-gateway
network
element
A network element whose communication with the NM application layer
must be transferred by the gateway network element application layer.

O
Orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation
engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations.
Outdoor unit The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements
frequency conversion and amplification for RF signals.

P
Plesiochronous
Digital
Hierarchy
A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes
the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565
Mbit/s rates.
Polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector
is fixed or rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the
electromagnetic wave is perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this
electromagnetic wave is called vertically polarized wave; if the electric
field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the plane of horizon,
this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the tip of
the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this
electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.

D Glossary
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
Q
QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It
encapsulates the tag of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN)
into the tag of the public VLAN. The packet carries two layers of tags to
travel through the backbone network of the carrier. In this manner, the layer
2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.

R
Rapid
Spanning Tree
Protocol
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning
tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward
compatible with the STP protocol.

S
Single
polarized
antenna
An antenna that can transmit only one channel of polarized electromagnetic
waves.
Space diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a
specific distance to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then
performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently,
only receive SD is used.
Spanning Tree
Protocol
An algorithm defined in the IEEE 802.1D. It configures the active topology
of a Bridged LAN of arbitrary topology into a single spanning tree.
Subnet A logical entity in the transmission network, which comprises a group of
network management objects. A subnet can contain NEs and other subnets.
Subnetwork
connection
protection
A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced
by a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork
connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level.
Synchronous
Digital
Hierarchy
A hierarchical set of synchronous digital transport, multiplexing, and
cross-connect structures, which is standardized for the transport of suitably
adapted payloads over physical transmission networks.

U
U2000 A unified network management system developed by Huawei. It can
support all the NE level and network level management functions, and can
manage the transport network, access network, and MAN Ethernet in a
unified manner.

V
OptiX RTN 910
D-5
Virtual LAN An end-to-end logical network that can travel through several network
segments or networks by using the network management software based
on the switch LAN. The IEEE 802.1Q is the main standard for the virtual
LAN.
D Glossary
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
E Acronyms and Abbreviations
Acronyms and abbreviations are listed in alphabetical order.
A
ADC Analog Digit Converter
AGC Automatic Gain Control
APS Automatic Protection Switching
ARP Address Resolution Protocol
ASK Amplitude Shift Keying
ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control
AU Administrative Unit

B
BER Bit Error Rate
BIOS Basic Input Output System
BIP Bit-Interleaved Parity
BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit
BSC Base Station Controller

C
CAR Committed Access Rate
CBS Committed Burst Size
CCDP Co-Channel Dual Polarization
CF Compact Flash card
CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol
OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description E Acronyms and Abbreviations
E-1
CIR Committed Information Rate
CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree
CoS Class of Service
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CVLAN Customer VLAN
C-VLAN Customer VLAN

D
DC Direct Current
DCC Data Communications Channel
DCN Data Communication Network
DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point
DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

E
ECC Embedded Control Channel
E-LAN Ethernet-LAN
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
ERPS Ethernet Ring Protection Switching
ES-IS End System to Intermediate System
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

F
FCS Frame Check Sequence
FD Frequency Diversity
FE Fast Ethernet
FEC Forward Error Correction
FIFO First In First Out
FLP Fast Link Pulse
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
OptiX RTN 910
E-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
FTP File Transfer Protocol

G
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GFP Generic Framing Procedure
GTS Generic Traffic Shaping
GUI Graphical User Interface

H
HDB3 High Density Bipolar Code 3
HDLC High level Data Link Control procedure
HSB Hot Standby
HSM Hitless Switch Mode

I
ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol
IDU Indoor Unit
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF The Internet Engineering Task Force
IF Intermediate Frequency
IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol
IP Internet Protocol
IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6
IS-IS Intermediate System to Intermediate System
ISO International Standard Organization
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication
Standardization Sector
IVL Independence VLAN learning

L
LAN Local Area Network
LAPD Link Access Procedure on the D channel
OptiX RTN 910
E-3
LAG Link Aggregation Group
LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH
LB LoopBack
LCT Generation-Local Craft Terminal
LDPC Low-Density Parity Check code
LMSP Linear Multiplex Section Protection
LPT Link State Pass Through

M
MA Maintenance Association
MAC Medium Access Control
MADM Multi Add-Drop Multiplexer
MBS Maximum Burst Size
MD Maintenance Domain
MDI Medium Dependent Interface
MEP Maintenance End Point
MIB Management Information Base
MP Maintenance Point
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTBF Mean Time Between Failure
MTTR Mean Time To Repair
MTU Maximum Transmission Unit

N
NE Network Element
NLP Normal Link Pulse
NMS Network Management System
NNI Network-to-Network Interface or Network Node Interface
NSAP Network Service Access Point

O
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
OAM Operations, Administration and Maintenance
ODU Outdoor Unit
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OSPF Open Shortest Path First

P
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast-Dense Mode
PIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode
PIR Peak Information Rate
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
PRBS Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence

Q
QinQ 802.1Q in 802.1Q
QoS Quality of Service
QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying

R
RF Radio Frequency
RFC Request For Comment
RIP Routing Information Protocol
RMON Remote Monitoring
RNC Radio Network Controller
RS Reed-Solomon encoding
RSL Received Signal Level
RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator
RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RTN Radio Transmission Node

S
SD Space Diversity
OptiX RTN 910
E-5
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SFP Small Form-Factor Pluggable
SNC SubNetwork Connection
SNCP Sub-Network Connection Protection
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SNR Signal-to-Noise Ratio
SP Strict Priority
SSM Synchronization Status Message
STM Synchronous Transport Module
STM-1 SDH Transport Module -1
STM-1e STM-1 Electrical Interface
STM-1o STM-1 Optical Interface
STM-N SDH Transport Module -N
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
SVL Shared VLAN Learning

T
TCI Tag Control Information
TCP Transfer Control Protocol
TDM Time Division Multiplex
TMN Telecommunication Management Network
TU Tributary Unit

U
UDP User Datagram Protocol
UNI User-Network Interface

V
VC Virtual Container
VC12 Virtual Container -12
VC-12 Virtual Container -12
OptiX RTN 910
Issue 02 (2009-10-30)
VCG Virtual Concatenation Group
VLAN Virtual LAN
VoIP Voice over IP
VPN Virtual Private Network

W
WAN Wide Area Network
WRR Weighted Round Robin
WTR Wait to Restore Time

X
XPD Cross-Polarization Discrimination
XPIC Cross-polarization Interference Cancellation

OptiX RTN 910
E-7

IDU Hardware Description (V100R002C00 - 02)

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

IDU Hardware Description (V100R002C00 - 02)

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System

HUAWEI TECHNOLGIES CO., LTD. MADE IN CHINA

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen